MATHEMATICS

ACCORDING TO FEDERAL BOARD

 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014

CONTENTS
NUMBER SYSTEM ...................................................................................................................................... 2
SETS, FUNCTIONS AND GROUPS ............................................................................................................. 16
MATRICES & DETERMINANTS ................................................................................................................. 33
SOLUTIONS OF QUADRATIC EQUATIONS................................................................................................ 43
PARTIAL FRACTIONS................................................................................................................................ 53
SEQUENCE AND SERIES ........................................................................................................................... 56
PERMUTATION, COMBINATION AND PROBABILITY ............................................................................... 70
MATHEMATICAL INDUCTION AND.......................................................................................................... 84
BINOMIAL THEOREM .............................................................................................................................. 84
FUNDAMENTALS OF TRIGONOMETRY .................................................................................................... 92
TRIGONOMETRIC IDENTITIES OF SUM AND.......................................................................................... 102
DIFFERENCE OF ANGLES ....................................................................................................................... 102
TRIGONOMETRIC FUNCTIONS .............................................................................................................. 109
AND THEIR GRAPHS .............................................................................................................................. 109
APPLICATION OF TRIGONOMTERY........................................................................................................ 111
INVERSE TRIGONOMETRIC FUNCTIONS ................................................................................................ 120
SOLUTIONS OF TRIGONOMETRIC ......................................................................................................... 126
FUNCTIONS AND LIMITS ....................................................................................................................... 130
DIFFERENTIATION ................................................................................................................................. 150
INTEGRATION ........................................................................................................................................ 169
INTRODUCTION TO ANALYTIC GEOMETRY ........................................................................................... 184
LINEAR INEQUALITIES & LINEAR PROGRAMMING................................................................................ 205
CONIC SECTION ..................................................................................................................................... 209
VECTORS................................................................................................................................................ 239

MUHAMMAD ALI 1
 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014

Chapter 1
NUMBER SYSTEM

SYNOPSIS
Set
The collection of well-defined and distinct objects is called a set

N = {1, 2, 3, ….}
W = {0, 1, 2, 3, …}
Z = {0, ±1, ±2, ±3, ….}
Z′ = {-1, -2, -3, …..}
O = {±1, ±3 …..}
E = {0, ±2, ±4,…..}
P
Q = {x|x = q where p, q∈ Z^q ≠ 0}
P
Q′ = { x|x ≠ q where p, q∈ Z^q ≠ 0}
R = { Q ∪ Q′}

Rational Numbers
“Numbers that can be expressed as a quotient of an integer and a non-zero integer are called rational
numbers”
P
Q = { |P is an integer, q is an integer, q ≠ 0}
q

Note: Rational numbers are generally expressed using fractional or decimal notation. The rational
numbers can also be named using decimal notation
P
Every integer p is a rational number since it can be written as the fraction I
13 5
Examples , − , …. Etc
7 3

Irrational Numbers
2
Number such as √2, π and , which are not rational numbers, are called irrational numbers.
√3
P
Q′ = { x|x ≠ where p is an integer, q is an integer and q≠ 0}
q

Note: If n is prime number, then √n is always an irrational number

Real Numbers
Numbers that are either rational or irrational are called real number
R = {x: x is rational or x is irrational}
R = Q ∪ Q′

Properties of Real Numbers

Closure Law:
For any real numbers a and b
Addition: a + b is real number
Multiplication: ab is real number

MUHAMMAD ALI 2
 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014
Associative Law:
Addition: For any real numbers a, b and c
a + (b + c) = (a + b) + c
Multiplication: For any real numbers a, b and c
a. (b. c) = (a. b). c

Note: Ordinary addition and multiplication are always associative

Identity Law:
Addition: For any real number a, there exists a unique real number ‘0’ such that
a+0=a
0+a=a
Note: Zero is called additive identity

Multiplication: For any real number a, there exists a unique number ‘1’ such that
a. 1 = a
1. a = a

Note: One is called the multiplicative identity

Inverse Law:
Addition: For each real number a, there exists a unique real number “-a” such that
a + (−a) = 0 (Additive identity)
(−a) + a = 0
1
Multiplication: For each real number a not equal to zero, there exists a unique real number a such that
1
a. = 1 (Multiplicative inverse)
a
1
.a =1
a

Commutative Law
Addition: For any real numbers a and b
a+b =b+a
Multiplication: For any real numbers a and b
a. b = b. a

Note: Ordinary addition & multiplication are always commutative

Distributive Law:
For any real numbers a, b and c
a(b + c) = ab + ac
(b + c)a = ba + ca

Field Axioms
Any non-empty set F is called field if it satisfies
➢ Five properties under addition
➢ Five properties under multiplication
➢ One distributive law

Total: Eleven properties

MUHAMMAD ALI 3
 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014
Absolute Value
The absolute value of a non-zero real number a is the positive number in the set {a, −a}
The absolute value of 0 is 0. The absolute value of any real number a is denoted by |a|
a, if a ≥ 0
|a| = -a if a < 0
The absolute value of “a” is “a” if “a” non-negative. The absolute value of a is opposite of a if a is
negative

Note: |a| = | − a|

Properties of Equality
Equality of numbers denoted by ‘=’ processes the following
properties
i) Reflexive Property
For all a ∈ R, a = a

ii) Symmetric Property

For all a, b ∈ R, a = b => b = a

iii) Transitive Property

For all a, b, c ∈ R, a = b ^ b = c => a = c

iv) Additive Property

For all a, b, c ∈ R, a = b => a + c = b + c

v) Multiplicative Property
For all a, b, c ∈ R, a = b => ac = bc ^ ca = cb

vi) Cancellation Property w.r.t. Addition

For all a, b, c ∈ R, a + c = b + c => a = b

vii) Cancellation Property w.r.t. Multiplication

For all a, b, c ∈ R, ac = bc => a = b provided c ≠ 0

Properties of Inequalities (Order Properties)

i) Trichotomy Property
For all a, b ∈ R, either a = b or a > b or a < b

ii) Transitive Property

For all a, b, c ∈ R a > b^b > c => a > c
Similarly a < b^ b< c => a < c

iii) Additive Property

For all a, b, c ∈ R
• a > b => a + c > b + c
• a > b^ c> d => a + c > b + d
• a < b => a + c < b + c
• a < b^c < d => a + c < b + d

MUHAMMAD ALI 4
 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014

iv) Multiplicative Property

For all a, b, c ∈ R

Case-I: If c > 0 (+ve)

• a > b => ac > bc
• a < b => ac < bc

Case-II: If c < 0 (-ve)

• a > b => ac < bc
• a < b => ac > bc
For all a, b, c, d ∈ R and a, b, c, d all are positive
• a > b^ c > d => ac > bd
• a < b ^ c < d => ac < bd

Complex Number
In the real number system, negative numbers do not have square root. Mathematics have invented a larger
number system that contains the real number system, but is such that negative numbers would have
square roots. That system is called ‘Complex-number system’

Imaginary Number i:
The imaginary number i is defined as
i = √−1 and i2 = −1

Note: If p is a positive real number, then

√−p = i√p
We refer to i √p as the ‘Principal square root of –p’
Complex Number:
If a and b are real numbers, then any number of the form a + ib is called a complex number

Real Part: The number a is called a real of the complex number

Imaginary Part: The number b is called the imaginary part of the complex number

Pure Imaginary Number

Any number of the form ib, where b ≠ 0, is called a pure imaginary number

Note: Every real number is a complex number with zero as its imaginary part.
e. g. , 4 = 4 + i0
5 = 5 + i0 etc
Complex Numbers as an Ordered Pair
Every complex number a + ib can be written as an ordered pair (a, b)
a + ib = (a , b)
↓ ↓ ↓ ↓
Real Imaginary Real Imaginary
part part part part

e.g., 4 + i5 = (4, 5)
2 − i3 = (2, −3) etc

MUHAMMAD ALI 5
 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014

Addition, Subtraction and Multiplication

If a + ib and c + id are complex numbers, we define their sum, difference and product as follows

Addition:
(a + ib) + (c + id) = (a + c) + (b + d)i
or (a, b) + (c, d) = (a + c, b + d)

Subtraction
(a + ib) − (c + id) = (a − c) + (b − d)i
or (a, b) − (c, d) = (a ± c, b − d)

Multiplication
(a + ib)(c + id) = (ac − bd) + (bc + ad)i
or (a, b)(c, d) = (ac − bd, bc + ad)

Note: The set of complex number does not satisfy the order axioms. We cannot say one complex number
is greater or less than another
We can compare only magnitudes of complex numbers

Definition:
Two complex numbers a + ib and c + id and equal iff a = c and b = d

Conjugate Complex Number

In general, for real numbers a and b, the complex conjugate of a + ib is a − ib
If z = a + ib
=> z̅ = a − ib

Note:
• Real number is self-conjugate
• Product of complex number and its conjugate is a real number

Facts
If z̅ and w
̅ are complex conjugates of the complex number z and w, respectively, then
1) ̅̅̅̅̅̅̅
z + w = z̅ + w ̅
2) ̅̅̅̅̅̅̅
z − w = z̅ − w ̅
3) ̅̅̅̅̅
z. w = z̅. w ̅
̅̅̅̅̅
z z̅
4) (w) = w ̅
for w ≠ 0
5) z̅̅̅n = (z̅)𝑛 , for every +ve integer n
6) z̅ = 𝑧, if z is real
7) |z| = |z̅| = |−z| = |−z|
8) z̿ = 𝑧
9) zz̅ = |𝑧|2
10) |z| − |w| ≤ |z + w| ≤ |z| + |w|
(Triangular inequality)

Complex Plane
Complex numbers can be visualized as points in a plane called the
complex plane (z-plane) shown in figure

MUHAMMAD ALI 6
 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014

Argand Diagram
The figure representing one or more complex numbers on the complex plane is called an Argand diagram

Absolute Value, Modulus of C.N

The absolute value of a complex number a + ib, denoted |a + ib|, is the distance between the origin and
the point associated with a + ib
That is, |a + ib| = √a2 + b 2

Polar Form of C.N. or Trigonometric Form of C.N.

Any complex number a + ib can be written in polar or trigonometric form,
as illustrated below
The complex number z = a + ib has trigonometric form
z̅ = r(cos θ + i sin θ)
Where r = |z| = √a2 + b 2
b
And tan θ = a

The number r is called the modulus of z, and θ is called the argument of z

Note From figure

a
cos θ = r => a = rcos θ
b
sin θ = r => b = r sin θ
So z = a + ib becomes
z = r cos θ + irsin θ
z = r(cos θ + i sin θ)

Rule
If z1 = r1 (cos θ1 + sin θ1 )
And z2 = r2 (cos θ2 + i sin θ2 )
are two complex number, their product is given by
z1 z2 = r1 r2 . [cos(θ1 + θ2 ) + i sin(θ1 + θ2 )]

Rule
If z1 = r1 (cos θ1 + i sin θ1 )
And z2 = r2 (cos θ2 + i sin θ2 )
z
Then 1 = r1 /r2 [cos(θ1 − θ2 ) + i sin(θ1 − θ2 )]
z2
For z2 ≠ 0

De Moivre’ Theorem
For any positive integer n,
[r(cos θ + i sin θ)]n = r n (cos nθ + i sin nθ)

Fundamental Theorem of Arithmetic or Unique Factorization Theorem

“All composite numbers can be expressed as products of unique sets of prime numbers”
Composite numbers is any integer have more than one prime factor

MUHAMMAD ALI 7
 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014

MCQs
1. Which of the following is correct?
a) 5 + i > 3 + i b) 5 + i > 5 − i c) 5 + 2i > 7 + i d) none of these

2. If ω is a complex cube root of unity, then the value of (ω + ω2 + ω3 )1/6 is

a) 0 b) 128 c) 324 d) 724

1 1
3. The value of |1+3i − 1−3i| is
2 3 2 3
a) 7
b) 5 c) − 7 d) − 5

1
4. i + i2 has the value
a) 0 b) 1 c) 2 d) (i − 1)

2i 2
5. The value of (1+i) is
a) 𝑖 b) 2𝑖 c) 1 − 𝑖 d) 1 − 2𝑖

6. Which of the following is correct?

a) 3 + 2i > 1 + 4i b) 6 + 2i > 3 + 3i c) 5 + 8i > 5 + 7i d) none of these
1
7. i2 + i125 , when simplified has the value
a) 0 b) 2i c) – 2i d) 2

1+2i
8. The complex number z = ( 1−i ) lies in the quadrant number
a) I b) II c) III d) IV

9. When simplified, the expression (1 + i)−3 equals

1−i 1+i 1−i
a) 1 − 3i b) − 3 c) − 4 d) 4

10. If a complex number lies in the III quadrant, then its conjugate lies in quadrant number
a) I b) II c) III d) IV

11. The product of four fourth root of unity is

a) 1 b) – 1 c) i d) – i

12. A value of √i + √−i is

a) 0 b) ±√2 c) – i d) i

13. The square root of (3 − 4i) are

a) ±(2 − 𝑖) b) ±(2 + 𝑖) c) ±(√3 − 2𝑖) d) ±(√3 + 2𝑖)

14. If n = 4m + 3, m integral, then in is equal to

a) −i b) 𝑖 c) 1 d) – 1

MUHAMMAD ALI 8
 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014
15. {x|x ∈ N ⋀ 2 < x < 4} is
a) An infinite set b) a finite set c) a singleton set d) empty set

16. Product √−2 × √−2 is equal to

a) – 2 b) 2 c) 0 d) 4

17. If x < y, y < z then

a) x > z b) x < z c) x = z d) none of these

18. (−𝑖)5 is
a) i b) – 1 c) 1 d) – 𝑖

19. The solution set of 5x + 8 = 0 when x ∈ N is

8 8
a) Non-empty set b) − c) d) empty set
5 5

20. The property used in this equation 3 × 7 = 7 × 3 is called

a) Closure law b) Commutative law of addition c) Commutative property w.r.t.
multiplication d) Identity

21. The additive inverse of (−x, −y) is

a) (−x, −y) b) (x, y) c) (−x, 0) d) (x, −y)

22. The product of two conjugate complex number is always a

a) Real number b) complex number c) irrational number d) natural number

23. The sum of two conjugate complex numbers is always a

a) Real number b) irrational number c) complex number d) natural number

1+2i
24. | |=
2−i
a) 1 b) 5 c) ¾ d) 5/3

25. 2x 2 + 3y 2 =
a) (2x + 3iy)(2x − 3iy) b) (√2x + √3iy)(√2x − √3iy) c) (2x − 3y)(2x + 3y)
d) (√2x + √3y)(√2x − √3yi)

26. If z = 1 then 𝑧̅ = ____________

a) 𝑖 b) – i c) ±1 d) none

27. |i| = ____________

a) – 1 b) 1 c) 0 d) i
1 3
28. The real and imaginary part of 2+𝑖 + 2−𝑖 is _________
5 2 5 2 8 2
a) ,
8 5
b) 8 , − 5 c) 5 , 5 d) none

29. If a complex number lies in the third quadrant then its conjugate lies in the quadrant
a) First b) second c) third d) none of these

MUHAMMAD ALI 9
 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014
30. (1 − 𝑖)6 + (1 − 𝑖)3 =
a) 2 − 10𝑖 b) 2 + 𝑖 c) −2 − 10𝑖 d) 2 + 𝑖

31. If z is a complex number, then

a) |z 2 | < |z|2 b) |z 2 | ≥ |z|2 c) |z 2 | = |z|2 d) none of these

32. The solution set of the equation |5x − 3| = −1 is

3
a) Φ b) {0} c) {5} d) none of these

33. Which of the following sets has closure property with respect to addition
a) {−1,1} b) {−1} c) {−1,0} d) none of these

34. Geometrically, the modulus of a complex number represents its distance from the
a) Point (1, 0) b) point (0, 1) c) point (1, 1) d) origin

35. Every real number is also a

a) Natural number b) complex number c) rational number d) whole number

36. Multiplicative inverse of i is

a) – i b) i c) 1 d) does not exists

37. (1 + 𝑖)8 =
a) 16i8 + 8i + 1 b) 16 c) – 16 d) none

38. Which complex number has zero as real part?

a) (2 + 6i)(3 + i) b) (5 + 3𝑖)(3 + 5𝑖) c) (−2 + 4𝑖)(−8 + 4𝑖) d) All of
these

39. Argument of number (1, −√3) is

a) −60o b) 60o c) 30o d) −30o
1
40. If z = cos θ + 𝑖 sin θ, then z =
a) sec θ + i cosec θ b) cos θ − 𝑖 sin θ c) cos−1 θ + isin−1 θ d) sin θ −
𝑖 cos θ

41. Any integral power of i cannot give

a) 1 b) 𝑖 c) 0 d) – 𝑖

42. If z1 = 3 − 6i and z2 = 4 + 5i then z1 − z2 is

a) 42 – 9i b) 9 – 42i c) 12 – 30i d) none of these

43. 1 in polar form can be written as

a) cos θ + sin θ b) cos π + 𝑖 sin π c) cos π/2 + 𝑖 sin π/2 d) None of these

44. The multiplicative inverse of zero

a) Is also zero b) one c) does not exists d) none of these

45. A non-empty set obeying all the addition laws, multiplication laws and distributive laws is called
a) Group b) Abelian group c) field d) none of these

MUHAMMAD ALI 10
 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014

46. The set C of complex numbers does not satisfy

a) The order axioms b) the group axioms c) the field axioms d) none of these

47. If z is a complex number, then

a) |z 2 | < |z|2 b) |z 2 | ≥ |z|2 c) |z 2 | = |z|2 d) none of these

3 2
48. |2+i + 3+i| is
√26 √97 26 √13
a) b) c) d)
5 5 5 5

49. If x = 6 + 5i and y = 1 − 3i, then imaginary part of x. y̅ is

a) – 10 b) 4 c) 5 d) 23

50. If z 2 = i, then one of the value of z is

(1−i) 𝑖−1 2+𝑖 1+𝑖
a) 2
b) 2 c) 2 d)
√ √ √ √2

π π 12
51. (sin 6 + 𝑖 cos 6 ) is equal to
a) -1 b) –i c) i d) 1
5
52. (−1 − 𝑖√3) =
2π 2π 10π 10π 10π 10π
a) cos 3 + 𝑖 sin 3
b) 32 (cos 3
− i sin 3
) c) 32 (cos 3
+ 𝑖 sin 3
) d)
none

2+3i
53. If z = 5−i
then z. z̅ =
1 1
a) 2 b) c) d) none of these
√2 2

2−𝑖
54. The conjugate complex number of (1−2𝑖)2 is
2 11 2 11 2 11 2 11
a) 25
+ 25 𝑖 b) 25 − 25 𝑖 c) − 25 + 25 𝑖 d) − 25 − 25 𝑖

55. The conjugate and the reciprocal of a complex number z = x + iy are equal. Then
a) x = 1, y = 0 b) x = 0, y = 1 c) x = y = 1 d) x 2 + y 2 = 1

56. The value of (−1 + i)5 + (−1 − i)5 is

a) 8 b) – 8 c) 0 d) -4
1
57. The conjugate of a complex number is i−1. Then that complex number is
1 1 1 1
a) − b) c) − d)
𝑖−1 𝑖+1 𝑖+1 𝑖−1

62
58. The value of (−1 + √−3) is
a) 262 b) 264 c) −262 d) 0

MUHAMMAD ALI 11
 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014

59. The modulus of √2𝑖 − √−2𝑖 is

a) 2 b) √2 c) 0 d) 2 √2

ANSWERS
1. D 11. B 21. B 31. C 41. C 51. C
2. A 12. B 22. A 32. A 42. A 52. D
3. B 13. A 23. A 33. D 43. D 53. C
4. D 14. A 24. A 34. D 44. C 54. D
5. B 15. B 25. B 35. B 45. C 55. D
6. D 16. A 26. D 36. A 46. A 56. C
7. A 17. B 27. B 37. B 47. B 57. C
8. B 18. D 28. C 38. D 48. B 58. C
9. C 19. B 29. B 39. B 49. D 59. A
10. B 20. C 30. C 40. B 50. D

SOLUTIONS / HINTS

1. Hint: The set of Complex numbers does not satisfy the Order of Axioms. So we cannot say one
complex number is greater or less than another d)

2. Hint: Use the result ω3 = 1 and 1 + ω + ω2 = 0 a)

3. Hint: Take LCM, simplify and then take magnitude b)

4. Hint: Use the result 𝑖 2 = −1 d)

5. Hint: Open the square and simplify b)

8. Hint: First multiplying and dividing with 1 + 𝑖 and then check the coordinates of the point b)

12. Solution: Let x = √𝑖 + √−𝑖

Squaring on both sides
2 2
x 2 = (√𝑖) + (√−𝑖) + 2(√𝑖)(√−𝑖)
x 2 = i + (−i) + 2√𝑖 × −𝑖
𝑥 2 = 𝑖 − 𝑖 + 2√−𝑖 2
= 2√1
𝑥2 = 2
𝑥 = ±√2 b)

13. Hint: Just check the options such that its square is (3 − 4i). Option ‘a’ is the right answer
because its square is (3 – 4i) a)

14. Solution:
𝑖 𝑛 = 𝑖 (4𝑚+3)
= 𝑖 4𝑚 𝑖 3
= (𝑖)2𝑚 𝑖 2 . 𝑖

MUHAMMAD ALI 12
 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014
= (−1)2𝑚 . (−1). 𝑖
= (1). (1). 𝑖
= −𝑖 a)

16. Solution:
√−2 × √−2
= 𝑖√2 × 𝑖√2
2
= 𝑖 2 . (√2)
= (−1)(2)
= −2 a)

25. Hint: Either Factorize 2x 2 + 3y 2 or check options such that product is 2x 2 + 3y 2 b)

28. Hint: Take LCM and simplify c)

30. Solution:
(1 + 𝑖)6 + (1 − 𝑖)3
= [(1 + 𝑖)2 ]3 + (1 − 𝑖)2 . (1 − 𝑖)
= (1 + 𝑖 2 + 2𝑖)3 + (1 + 𝑖 2 − 2𝑖)(1 − 𝑖)
= (2𝑖)3 + (−2𝑖)(1 − 𝑖)
= 8𝑖 3 − 2𝑖 + 2𝑖
= −8𝑖 − 2𝑖 − 2
= −10𝑖 − 2 c)

36. Hint: Either take multiplicative inverse of 𝑖 or check the options such that its product with 𝑖 is 1
a)

37. Solution:
(1 + 𝑖)8 = [(1 + 𝑖)2 ]4
= (2𝑖)4
= 16𝑖 4
= 16 b)

y
39. Hint: Argument = tan−1 (x)
√3
= tan−1 (− 1
)
= 60𝑜 b)

40. Hint: Either take multiplicative inverse of z or check the options such that its product with z is
one b)

43. Hint: Polar form of one is again one d)

47. Solution:

MUHAMMAD ALI 13
 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014
9 9
(−1 + 𝑖√3) + (−1 − 𝑖√3) = (2ω)9 + (2ω2 )9
= 29 (ω9 + ω18 )
= 29 (1 + 1) = 210 b)

48. Hint: Take LCM and simplify b)

49. Solution:
x. y̅ = (6 + 5𝑖)(1 + 3𝑖) = −9 + 23𝑖 d)

1+𝑖 2
50. Hint: ( ) =𝑖 d)
√2

51. Solution:
π 12
(sin 6 + i cos π/6) = sin 2π + i cos 2π
=𝑖 c)

52. Solution:
5
(−1 − 𝑖√3) = r (cos θ + 𝑖 sin θ)
2 −√3
Here r = √(−1)2 + (−√3 ) ; θ = tan−1 ( )
−1
π
r = 2; θ =
3
Therefore;
5 5π 5π
(−1 − 𝑖√3) = 25 [cos 3
+ i sin ]
3
5π 5π
= 32 [cos + i sin ] d)
3 3

53. Solution:
2+3𝑖 2−3𝑖 4+9 1
𝑧. 𝑧̅ = 5−𝑖
× 5+𝑖
= 25+1 = 2 c)
54. Solution:
2−i 2−i 2 11
z = (1+2i)2 = =− +i
1+4i2 +4i 25 15
2 11
=> z̅ = − 25 − 𝑖 25 d)

55. Solution:
1
Given x − iy =
x+iy
=> x 2 + y 2 = 1 d)

56. Solution:
(−1 + 𝑖)5 + (−1 − 𝑖)5
= (−1 + 𝑖)4 (−1 + 𝑖) + (−1 − 𝑖)4 . (−1 − 𝑖)
=0 c)

57. Solution:

MUHAMMAD ALI 14
 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014
1
Take conjugate of because z̿ = 𝑧 c)
𝑖−1

58. Solution:
62 62
(−1 + √−3) + (−1 − √−3) = (2ω)62 + (2ω2 )62
= 262 [ω62 + ω124 ]
= 262 [ω2 + ω]
= 262 [−1] = −262 c)

59. Solution:
√2𝑖 − √−2𝑖 = √(1 + 𝑖)2 − √(1 − 𝑖)2
= 2𝑖
Modulus of 2i = √0 + 4
=2 a)

MUHAMMAD ALI 15
 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014

Chapter # 2
SETS, FUNCTIONS AND GROUPS

SYNOPSIS
Set
The collection of well defined and distinct objects is called set

Methods to Describe a Set

There are three ways to describe a set

i) The Descriptive Method

The method in which the set can be described in words is called descriptive method
Example: The set of whole numbers

ii) The Tabular Method

The method in which the set is described by listing its elements within brackets is called the
tabular method
Example: Set of whole numbers = {0, 1, 2, 3,….}

iii) Set Builder Method

In this method a symbol or a letter is used for an arbitrary number of the set and also stating
the property common to all the members of the set
Belongs to
↑
Set of whole numbers = {x|x∈ W}
↓
Such that

Order of a Set
The number of elements present in a set is called the order of the set e.g.,
If A = {1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6}
Then n(A) = 6

Types of Sets w.r.t. Order

• Finite Set: A set is said to be a finite set if the set has definite number of elements present in it,
E.g., A = {1, 2, 3,….,100}
“Order is finite”

• Infinite Set: A set is said to be an infinite set if the set has indefinite number of elements present in
it.
e.g. N = {1, 2, 3,…}
W = {0, 1, 2, 3,….}

• Null / Empty Set: A set having no element in it is called null set or empty set
It is denoted by ϕ

e.g.,

MUHAMMAD ALI 16
 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014
i) {x|x ∈ Q ⋀ x 2 = 2}
ii) {x|x ∈ N ⋀ x + 4 = 0}
iii) {x|x ∈ E ⋀ 4 < x < 6}
iv) {x|x ∈ O ⋀ 5 < x < 7}

Singleton Set
A set having only one element is called singleton set
e.g., A = { 7 }, B = {Chair}
Definition
• Equal Sets: Two non-empty sets A and B are said to be equal if they have the same order and same
elements
We write A = B for equal sets e.g.,
A = {a, b, c}
B = {c, b, a}
Here A = B
Note: The order of elements of the sets does not matter

• Equivalent or Similar Sets: Two non-empty sets A and B are said to be equivalent sets if they have
equal number of elements
(OR)
If one to one correspondence exists between the elements of the sets
We write A ∼ B or A≅ B e.g.,
If A = {a, b, c, d, e, f}
↕ ↕ ↕ ↕ ↕ ↕
B = {1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6}
Then A ~ B

Subset
If every element of set A is also an element of B, then A is a subset of B
We write A ⊆ B
e.g., if A = {1, 2, 3}; B = {1, 2, 3, 4,…., 10}
then A ⊆ B
or A ⊆ B iff x ∈ A => x ∈ B

Note: If a set has n, elements, then

No. of elements in subset = 2n
If A ⊆ B, then B is called superset of A
It is denote by B ⊇ A

Types of Subsets
• Proper Subset: If A is a subset of B and B contains at least one element which is not an element of
A, then A is called proper subset of B.
e.g., If A = {1, 2, 3}, B = {1, 2, 3, 4, 5}
then A is proper subset of B
We write A ⊂ B

• Improper Subset: If A is a subset of B and B does not contain any extra element which is not an
element of A, then A is called improper subset of B,
In this case A = B

MUHAMMAD ALI 17
 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014
Note:
i) If A⊆ B and B ⊆ A
Then A = B
ii) The empty set is a subset of every set
iii) Empty set is a set which has no proper subset

N⊂Z⊂Q⊂R⊂C

• Power Set: The collection of all the proper and improper subsets of a set A is called the power set of
A. It is denoted by P(A). e.g.,
If A = {a, b}

Then P(A) = {ϕ, {a}, {b}, {a, b}}

↓ ↓
Empty set The set itself

Note:
If n = No. element in the set A
Then 2n = No. of elements in the power set of A

• Universal Set/ Universe of Discourse: The set under consideration is called universal set
(OR)
The super set of all the sets under a particular discussion is called universal set
It is denoted by U or 𝛆

Operation on Sets
• Union of Two Sets: The unions of two non-empty sets A and B is the set of all those elements which
are either present in A or present in B
A ∪ B = {x|x ∈ A or x ∈ B}

Note: A ∪ B = B ∪ A

• Intersection of Two Sets: The intersection of two non-empty sets A and B is the set of all those
elements which are common in A and B
A ∩ B = {x|x ∈ A ⋀ x ∈ B}
Note: A∩ B = B ∩ A

• Different of Two Sets: Consider two non-empty sets A and B

Now A – B = Set of all those elements which are present in A but not in B
i.e., A – B = {x | x ∈ A ⋀ x ≠ B}
Similarly,
B – A = Set of all those elements which are present in B but not in A
i.e., B – A = {x|x ∈ B⋀ x ∉A}
Note: In general, A – B ≠ B – A
• Compliment of a Set
Ac = U − A
Ac = {x|x ∈ U ⋀ x ∉ A}
Where U = Universal set and A ⊆ U

Note: AC is also written as A′

MUHAMMAD ALI 18
 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014

• Disjoint Sets: Two non-empty sets A and B are said to be disjoint set iff their intersection is an
empty set. That is if A ∩ B = ϕ
Then A and B are disjoints and vice versa e.g.,
If A = The set of even numbers
B = The set of odd numbers
Then A ∩ B = ϕ => A and B are disjoint sets

• Overlapping Sets: Two non-empty sets A and B are said to be overlapping if A ∩ B ≠ ϕ and neither
A ⊆ B nor B ⊆ A

Examples:
A = {1, 2, 3, 4}
B = {4, 5, 6, 7}
Here A ∩ B ≠ ϕ; A ⊈ B; B ⊈ A
=> A and B are overlapping sets

Properties and Laws of Sets

• Commutative Property
A∪B =B∪A
A∩B =B∩A
• Associative Property
A ∪ (B ∪ C) = (A ∪ B) ∪ C
A ∩ (B ∩ C) = (A ∩ B) ∩ C
• Distributivity of Union Over Intersection
A ∪ (B ∩ C) = (A ∪ B) ∩ (A ∪ C)
• Distributivity of Intersection Over Union
A ∩ (B ∪ C) = (A ∩ B) ∪ (A ∩ C)
• De Morgan’s Law
(A ∪ B)′ = A′ ∩ B′
(A ∩ B)′ = A′ ∪ B′
• Identity Laws
A∪ϕ =A
A∩ϕ=ϕ
• The Compliment Laws
A ∩ A′ = ϕ
A ∪ A′ = U
• The Double Complement Property
(A′ )′ = A
• Idempotent Laws
A∪A =A
A∩A =A

MUHAMMAD ALI 19
 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014
Venn Diagrams

Key Point to Remember

1) If A∪ B = ϕ (that is A and B are disjoint)
Then n(A ∪ B) = n(A) + n(B) and n(A ∩ B) = 0
n(A − B) = n(A)
n(B − A) = n(B)

2) If A ∩ B ≠ ϕ (that is A and B are not disjoint)

Then n(A ∪ B) = n(A) + n(B) − n(A ∩ B)

3) If A⊆ B
Then n(A ∪ B) = n(B)
n(A ∩ B) = n(A)
n(A − B) = 0
n(B − A) = n(B) − n(A)

4) If B ⊆ A
Then n(A ∪ B) = n(A)
n(A ∩ B) = n(B)
n(B − A) = 0
n(A − B) = n(A) − n(B)

5) If A and B are overlapping

Then n(A − B) = n(A) − n(A ∩ B)
n(B − A) = n(B) − n(A ∩ B)

MUHAMMAD ALI 20
 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014

Logic
The science of correct reasoning science which describes relationships among proposition in terms of
implication, contradiction etc. Logic is a way of reasoning, whether correct or incorrect

• Inductive Logic: The logic in which conclusions are drawn from a limited number of observations or
experiences is called inductive logic
• Deductive Logic: The logic in which conclusion are drawn from a number of experiments and
observations
• Proposition: A declarative statement is called proposition. A proposition is either true or false but not
both
• Aristotelian Logic: According to Aristotelian logic, a proposition can be only true or false and there
is not third possibility
• Non-Aristotelian Logic: According to non-Aristotelian logic there are more chances other than true
or false for a proposition

Table
Symbol How to read Symbolic How to be read
Expression
− Not ~p Negation of p
⋀ And p⋀q p and q
⋁ Or p⋁q p or q
→ If… then p→q If p then q
implies p implies q
↔ Is equivalent to p↔q p if and only if q
if and only if p is equivalent
to q

Negation (~)
If P is any proposition then negation of P is denoted by ~P and is defined as
If P is true then ~P is false and vice versa

Truth Table:
p ~p
T F
F T

Conjunction (⋀)
The conjunction of two proposition p and q is denoted by p⋀q (read as p and q) and is defined as
"p⋀q is true only when both p and q are true otherwise always false”

Truth Table of 𝐩⋀𝐪

p q 𝐩⋀𝐪
T T T
T F F
F T F
F F F

MUHAMMAD ALI 21
 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014
Disjunction (⋁)
The disjunction of two proposition p and q is denoted by p⋁q (read as p or q) and is defined as
“p⋁q is false only when both p and q are false otherwise always true”

Truth Table of 𝐩⋁𝐪

p q 𝐩⋁𝐪
T T T
T F T
F T T
F F F

Implication or Conditional (→)

The implication p→q (read as p implies q) is defined as:
“p → q is false when p is true and q is false otherwise always true”
p → q
Antecedent / hypothesis Consequent / conclusion

Truth Table of p→q

p q p→q
T T T
T F F
F T T
F F T

Note: Associative with every implication there are three statements

i) Converse: The converse of p→q is q→p
ii) Inverse: The inverse of p→q is ~p→ ~q
iii) Contrapositive: The contrapositive of p→q is ~q → ~p

Key Points to Remember

• The truth table of original implication and its contrapositive is always equal
• P implies q, if then q, p only if q, q if p are all equivalent statements to p → q

Biconditional or Double Implication (↔)

The biconditional p ↔ q (read as p iff q) is defined as
“p ↔ q is true when both p and q are true or both are false, otherwise always false”

Truth Table of 𝐩 ↔ 𝐪
p q p↔q
T T T
T F F
F T F
F F T
Definition
• Tautology: A statement which is always true is called tautology
• Absurdity: A statement which is always false is called absurdity
• Contingency: A statement which can be true or false depending upon the truth values of the variable
involved is called contingency

MUHAMMAD ALI 22
 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014

Statement

Tautology Absurdity Contingency

Always true Always false Can be true or false

Quantifiers
The symbols or words which give the idea of a quantity are called quantifiers

Universal Quantifiers
∀ for all

Existential Quantifiers
∃ there exist

Logical Equivalence
Compound propositions that have the same truth values are called logically equivalent
⇔ stands for logically equivalent

Examples
p → q ⇔ ~p⋁q
p → q ⇔ ~q →∼ p

A Link between Set Theory and Logic

Consider proportion p as a set A and proportion q as a set B
Logical statement Equivalence in Set Theory
~p Compliment of A i.e. AC
p⋀q A∩B
p⋁q A∪B
p→q A′ ∪ B
p↔q A=B

De Morgan’s Laws
i) (A ∪ B)C = AC ∩ B C becomes ∼ (p⋁q) =∼ p⋀ ∼ q
ii) (A ∩ B)C = AC ∪ B C becomes ∼ (p ⋀ q) ∼ p⋁ ∼ q

Definition:
• Cartesian Product: Consider two non-empty set A and B. The Cartesian product A and B denoted
by A×B is given as
A×B = {(a, b)|a ∈ A⋀b ∈ B}
Similarly,
B × A = {(b, a)| b ∈ B ⋀ a ∈ A}
Example
Let A = {m, n}, B = {1, 2}
Then A × B = {(m, 1), (m, 2), (n, 1), (n, 2)}

MUHAMMAD ALI 23
 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014

• Relation or Binary Relation: Any subset of the Cartesian product A× B is called a relation from A
to B

Example:
In above example
r1 = {(m, 1), (n, 1)}
r2 = {(m, 1), (n, 2)}

• Domain of the Relation: The set of all the first elements of the ordered pairs forming a relation is
called domain of the relation
Dom. of r1 = {m, n}

• Range of the Relation: The set of all the second elements of the ordered pairs forming a relation is
called range of the relation
Rangle of r2 = {1, 2}

• Inverse Relation: To find the inverse relation of a relation, interchange the domain and the range of
every ordered pair of the given relation

Example:
Let r = {(m, 1), (n, 2)}
Inverse is
r −1 = {(1, m), (2, n)}

• Function: Consider two non-empty sets A and B. A function from A to B, written as f: A → B is

defined as
“Function is a rule or a correspondence that assigns every x ∈ A a unique value y ∈ B”

Domain: The set A is called the domain of the function

Range: The set of corresponding values in B is called ranged of the function

Example
The relation r = {(m, 1), (n, 2)} is a function.

Note: The inverse of a relation may or may not be a function

In above case, the inverse relation
r −1 = {(1, m), (2, n)} is also a function

• Into Function: A function f: A → B is called into function if range of f is a subset of B but range f≠B
• Onto Function (Surjective Function): A function f: A → B is called onto if range f = B
• One-one Function: A function f: A → B is called one-one if second elements of no two of its ordered
pairs are equal
• Injective Function: A function f: A → B which is both one-one and into is called injective functions
• Bijective Function: A function f: A → B which is both one-one and onto is called bijective function
• Linear Function: A function of the form {(x, y)| y = mx + c} is called linear function. The graph of
a linear function is always a straight line
• Quadratic Function: The function of the form {(x, y)|y = ax 2 + bx + c; a ≠ 0} is called quadratic
function. The graph of the quadratic function is always a parabola

MUHAMMAD ALI 24
 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014
• Inverse Function: If f: A → B; then its inverse f −1 is a function from B to A
f −1 : B → A
The inverse function f −1 can be obtained by interchanging the domain and range of
function f.

Note:
i) The inverse of a function exists only if it is one-one function, otherwise not
ii) Inverse of a function may or may not be a function
iii) Inverse of a line is a line

Groups: (Proportion of Binary Operations)

Let G be a non-empty set and * is a defined binary operation
for G. Also let a, b and c belong to G

Note:
• The multiplicative inverse of zero does not exists
• In a group the identity element is unique
• In a group the inverse of each element w.r.t. * is unique
• If a, b∈ G then (ab)−1 = b−1 a−1

Order of a Group
The number of elements of a group is called order of the group

Finite and Infinite Groups

If the order of a group is finite, then it is called finite group
otherwise infinite group.

Residue Classes of Module n:

• Cayley’s table for set of residue classes modulo 5 under multiplication is given as
Set of residues classes modulo 5 = {0, 1, 2, 3, 4}

x 0 1 2 3 4
0 0 0 0 0 0
1 0 1 2 3 4
2 0 2 4 1 3
3 0 3 1 4 2
4 0 4 3 2 1

• Cayley’s tables for set of residue classes modulo 6 w.r.t. addition

Set of residues classes modulo 6 = {0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5}
+ 0 1 2 3 4 5
0 0 1 2 3 4 5
1 1 2 3 4 5 0
2 2 3 4 5 0 1
3 3 4 5 0 1 2
4 4 5 0 1 2 3
5 5 0 1 2 3 4

MUHAMMAD ALI 25
 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014

• Table of multiplying of cube roots of unity.

Set of cube root of unity = {1,ω, ω2 }

x 1 𝛚 𝛚𝟐
1 1 ω. ω2
ω. ω. ω2 1 (ω3 = 1)
ω2 ω2 1 ω.

• Table of multiplication of fourth roots of unity

Set of four fourth roots of unity = {±1, ±i}
x 1 -1 i -i
1 1 -1 i -i
-1 -1 1 -i i (i2 = −1)
i i -i -1 1
-i -i i 1 -1

• The following table describes which properties are satisfied by the specified set of numbers

MUHAMMAD ALI 26
 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014

MCQs
1. The number of non-empty subsets of the set {1, 2, 3, 4} is
a) 15 b) 14 c) 16 d) 17

2. If A has 3 elements and B has 6 elements, then the minimum number of elements in the set A∪ B
is
a) 6 b) 3 c) ϕ d) none of these

3. If a N = {ax : x ϵ N}, then 3N∩ 7N =

a) 3 N b) 7N c) N d) 21 N

4. If A = {1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11, 13, 15, 17}, B = {2, 4, …., 18} and N is the universal set, then A′ ∪
((A ∪ B) ∩ B ′ ) is
a) A b) N c) B d) none of these

5. X and Y are two sets such that n(X) = 17, n(Y) = 23, n(X ∪ Y) = 38, then n (X ∩ Y) is
a) 4 b) 2 c) 6 d) none of these

6. If A and B are two sets such that A has 12 elements, B has 17 elements and A ∪B has 21
elements, then number of elements in A ∩B are
a) 6 b) 4 c) 8 d) none of these

7. Given the sets A = {1, 2, 3}, B = {3, 4}, C = {4, 5, 6} then [A ∪ (B ∩ C)] is
a) {1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6} b) {1, 2, 4, 5} c) {1, 2, 3, 4} d) {3}

8. The set A = {x : x ∈ R, x 2 = 16 and 2x = 6} equals

a) Φ b) {14, 3, 4} c) {3 } d) {4}

9. If A and B are any two sets, then A∪ (A ∩ B) is equal to

a) B C b) AC c) B d) A

10. Let A = {a, b, c}, B = {b, c, d}, C = {a, b, d, e} then A ∩ (B ∪ C) is

a) (c) b) {a, b, c} c) {b, c, d} d) {a, b, d, e}

11. If aN = {ax : x ∈N} and bN∩ cN = dN, where b, c ∈ N are relatively prime, then
a) c = bd b) b = cd c) d = bc d) none of these

12. If the sets A and B are given by A = {1, 2, 3, 4}, B = {2, 4, 6, 8, 10} and the universal set U = {1,
2, 3,…,10}, then
a) (A ∪ B)C = {5, 7, 9} b) (A ∩ B)C = {1, 3,5, 6, 7} c) (A ∩ B)C = {1, 3, 5, 7, 8, 9, 10}
d) None

13. The set of intelligent students in a class is

a) A null set b) a singleton set c) a finite set d) not a well defined collection

14. The solution of 3x 2 − 12x = 0 when

a) x ∈ Nis{4} b) x ∈ I is {0, 4} c) x ∈ S = {a + ib : b≠ 0 a, b ∈ R} d) All of
these

MUHAMMAD ALI 27
 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014

15. Let A = {x : x is a multiple of 3} and B = {x:x is a multiple to 5}, then A ∩ B is given by

a) {3, 6, 9} b) {5, 10, 15, 20, …} c) {15, 30, 45,..} d) none

16. Which of the following is the empty set?

a) {x|x is a real number and x 2 − 1 = 0} b) {x|x is a real number x 3 + 1 + 0}
c) {x|x is a real number and x 2 + 9 = 0}| d) {x|x is a real number and x 2 = x + 2}

17. Which of the following set has only one subset?

a) {Y, Z} b) { Y } c) { 0} d) { }

18. If S contains n elements then power set of S, P(s) contains elements. Which are?
a) 2𝑛 b) 4𝑛 c) 5𝑛 d) 6𝑛

19. The compliment of set A relative to universal set U is the set

a) {x|x ∈ U and x ∈ A} b) {x|x ∉ U and x ∉ A} c) {x|x ∉ U and x ∈ A} d)
{x|x ∈ U and x ∉ A}

20. The union of the set A and B is defined as

a) A ∪ B = {x|x ∈ A or x ∈ B} b) A ∪ B = {x|x ∉ A or x ∈ B} c) A ∪ B =
{x|x ∉ A or x ∉ B}
d) A ∪ B = {x|x ∈ A or x ∉ B}

21. If A and B are any two sets and A’, B’ are their compliments relative to the universal set U, the
(A ∪ B)′ =
a) A′ ∪ B′ b) A ∪ B c) A′ ∩ B′ d) A ∩ B

22. Difference between two sets A\B is defined as

a) {x|x ∈ A ⋀ x ∈ B} b) {x|x ∈ A ⋀ x ∉ B} c) {x|x ∉ A ⋀ x ∈ B} d)
{x|x ∉ A ⋀ x ∉ B}

23. The set of rational number between 5 and 9 is

a) Finite b) infinite c) {5, 6, 7, 8, 9} d) {6, 7, 8}

24. If X is a set having 6 elements then the numbers in P(x) is

a) 62 b) 6 c) 6(2) d) 26

25. Every set is the ________ of itself

a) Proper subset b) improper subset c) super set d) none

26. The set of real numbers (points) belonging to interval (a, b) is __________
a) Finite set b) empty set c) singleton set d) infinite set

27. The power set of an empty set is ________

a) Null set b) singleton set c) super set d) none

28. Every recurring non-terminating decimal represents

a) Q b) Q’ c) R d) none

MUHAMMAD ALI 28
 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014
29. The set N of natural numbers is closed with respect to
a) Addition b) multiplication c) both a and b d) subtraction

30. The set Z of integers is closed with respect to

a) Addition b) multiplication c) subtraction d) all

31. The set R – {0} of real numbers is closed with respect to

a) Addition b) multiplication c) division d) All

32. In the set = {0, 1} binary operation defined as

a) − b) + c) × d) ÷

33. The set S = {-1, 1, -i , i} is a group with respect to the binary operation
a) ÷ b) × c) + d) –

34. The set S = {1, ω, ω2 } is a group w.r.t. the binary operation

a) × b) ÷ c) + d) –

35. If set is a group w.r.t. addition then the number of identity elements in S is
a) Unique b) two c) three d) none

36. If set S is a group w.r.t addition then each element of S has _________ inverse
a) Unique b) two c) three d) none

37. R – {0} is a group w.r.t. the binary operation

a) + b) × c) ÷ d) –

38. Q − {0} is a group w.r.t the binary operation

a) + b) × c) ÷ d) –

39. R is a group w.r.t. the binary operation

a) + b) × c) ÷ d) –

40. Q is the group w.r.t the binary operation

a) + b) × c) ÷ d) –

41. S = {1, −1} is a group w.r.t the binary operation

a) + b) × c) - d) none

42. A non-empty set S which is closed with a binary operation “*” is called group if
a) The binary operation is associative
b) There exists identity element with respect to the binary operation
c) There exists a unique inverse of each element of S with respect to the binary operaion
d) All

43. In a proportion if p → q then q → p is called

a) Inverse of p → q b) converse of p→q c) contra positive p→q d) none

44. Truth table containing all false values is called

a) Tautology b) self contradiction c) equivalent d) none

MUHAMMAD ALI 29
 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014

45. Truth table containing values is called

a) Tautology b) self contradiction c) equivalent d) none

46. In a proposition if p→q then contra positive of this proposition is denoted by

a) q→q b) ~q→p c) ~q→ ~p d) none

47. in a proposition if p→q then inverse of this proposition is denoted by

a) q→p b) ~q→p c) ~p → ~q d) none

48. If the set A has p elements, B has q elements, then the number of elements in A × B is
a) p + q + 1 b) pq c) p2 d) p + q

49. A = {x: x ≠ x} represents

a) {x} b) {1} c) { } d) {0}

50. A statement which is either true or false is called

a) Induction b) deduction c) proposition d) logic

51. If A and B are two sets then any subset R of A×B is called
a) Relation on A b) relation on B c) relation from A to B d) relation from B to
A

52. If A = {1, 2, 3}, then the relation on A {(x, y)| x, y ∈ A ⋀ x < y} is

a) {(3, 1), (3, 2)} b) {(1, 2), (2, 1), (2, 3)} c) {(1, 2), (1, 3), (2, 3)} d) {(1, 1), (2,
2), (3, 3)}

53. The function f; R→R defined by f = {(x, y)|y = mx + c}

a) A constant function b) linear function c) quadratic function d) none of these

54. The graph of the linear function is

a) A circle b) triangle c) a straight line d) none of these

55. The function defined by equation y = √x, x ≥ 0 is called

a) Square root function b) identify function c) linear function d) quadratic function

56. The set of integers is a group w.r.t.

a) Addition b) subtraction c) multiplication d) division

57. If A is the subset of the universal set U then (A′ )′ =

a) Φ b) A c) U d) none of these

58. Which is the number of elements of the power set of { }?

a) 0 b) 1 c) 2 d) 3

59. {x|x ϵ N and x < 1} is

a) Singular set b) set with two elements c) empty set d) infinite set

60. (Q,∗) is an abelian group if for all a, b ϵ G

a) a + b = b + a b) ab = ba c) a*b = b*a d) none of these

MUHAMMAD ALI 30
 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014

61. If the set A contains 2 elements and the set B contains 3 elements then the number of proper
subset of A× B is
a) 64 b) 63 c) 61 d) 60

62. If the truth value of p^q is T, then the truth value of (~p) is
a) T b) F c) difference to predict d) none of these

63. If p → (q⋁r) is false, then truth values of p, q, r are respectively

a) F, T, T b) T, T, F c) T, F, F d) F, F, F

64. The set G = {1, 2, 3} of non-zero residue classes modulo 4, under multiplication modulo 4 is not
a group since
a) Closure law is not satisfied b) Associative law is not satisfied c) Identity element
does not exist
d) It is finite
65. The set {0, 1, 2, 3, 4} is not a group under the operation multiplication modulo 5 because
a) Closure property is not satisfied b) Associative law is not satisfied
c) The identity element does not exist d) Not every element has inverse
66. The set G = {1, 0, -1} is not a group under multiplication because G
a) Is not closed b) is not associative c) does not contain the identity element
d) Does not satisfy inverse law

67. Which of the following is singleton set?

a) {x: |x| = 5, x ∈ N} b) {x: |x| = 6, x ∈ Z} c) {x: x 2 + 2x + 1 = 0, x ∈ N} d)
2
{x: x = 7, x ∈ N}
68. If the relation R: A → B, where A = {1, 2, 3} and B = {1, 3, 5} is defined by
R = {(x, y): x < y, x ∈ A, y ∈ B}, then
a) R = {(1, 3), (1, 5), (2, 3), (2, 5), (3, 5)} b) R = {(1, 1), (1, 5), (2, 3), (3, 5)}
c) R−1 = {(3, 1), (5, 1), (3, 2), (5, 3)} d) R−1 = {(1, 1), (5, 1), (3, 2), (5, 3)}
69. Which of the following is false?
a) Addition is commutative in N
b) Multiplication is association in N
c) Raising a number to the power of another number is commutative
d) Addition is associative in N

ANSWERS
1. A 11. C 21. C 28. B 38. B 48. B 58. B
2. A 12. (A, 22. B 29. C 39. A 49. C 59. C
3. D C) 23. B 30. D 40. A 50. C 60. C
4. B 13. D 24. D 31. D 41. V 51. C 61. B
5. B 14. B 25. B 32. C 42. D 52. C 62. B
6. C 15. C 26. A 33. B 43. B 53. B 63. C
7. C 16. B 27. B 34. A 44. B 54. C 64. A
8. A 17. D 35. A 45. A 55. D 65. D
9. D 18. A 36. A 46. C 56. A 66. D
10. B 19. D 37. B 47. C 57. B 67. A
20. A 68. A
69. C

MUHAMMAD ALI 31
 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014

SOLUTIONS / HINTS
1. Hint: Number of non-empty sub-set = 2n − 1 a)

3. Solution:
We have
3N = {3, 6, 9, 12, … }
7N = {7, 14, 21, 28, 35, 42, … . }
Hence 3N ∩ 7N = {21, 42, 63, … }
= 21N d)

5. Solution:
n(x ∪ y) = n(x) + n(y) − n(x ∩ y)
38 = 17 + 23 − n(x ∩ y)
=> n(x ∩ y) = 40 − 38 b)

6. Hint: Use n(A ∪ B) = n(A) + n(B) − n(A ∩ B) c)

11. Solution:
We have, bN = the set of positive integral multiples of b and cN = the set of positive integral
multiples of c
Therefore, bN∩cN = the set of positive integral multiple of bc = bcN
d = bc c)

30. Hint: Power set of an empty is not empty, in fact there is on element in it and that is empty set
itself b)

64. Hint: Number of elements in A × B = 6

Number of proper subsets = 26 − 1
= 64 − 1
= 63 b)

65. Hint: p^q = T means p and q both are true

∴ ~p must be false b)

66. Hint: Implication Rule

here q and r must be false c)

MUHAMMAD ALI 32
 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014

Chapter # 3
MATRICES & DETERMINANTS

SYNOPSIS
Matrix
A rectangular array of numbers enclosed by a part of bracket is called a matrix

Rows
The horizontal lines of numbers are called rows of a matrix

Columns
The vertical lines of numbers are called columns of a matrix

Entries or Elements
The number used is rows or columns are said to be the entries or elements of the number

Order of a Matrix
If m = number of rows and n = number of columns then order of matrix = m × n

Types of Matrices

Row Matrix or Row Vector

A matrix which has only one row is said to be a row matrix or row vector. Its order is 1×n
Column Matrix or Column Vector
A matrix which has only one column is said to be a column matrix or column vector
Its order is m×1
Square Matrix
The matrix, which has the same number of rows and columns (m = n), is called a square matrix
Rectangular Matrix
A matrix, whose number of rows is not equal to number of columns (m ≠ n), is called a rectangular
matrix
Diagonal Matrix
Let A be a square matrix of order of n. If aij = 0 for all 𝑖 ≠ 𝑗 and atleast one 𝑎𝑖𝑗 ≠ 0 for i = j, then A is
said to be diagonal matrix. Where a11 , a22 , a33 , … , am is called main, leading or principal diagonal
Scalar Matrix
Let A be a square matrix of order n. If aij = 0 for all 𝑖 ≠ 𝑗 and aij = k for i = j, where k is any non zero
scalar, then A is said to be scalar matrix
Unit Matrix or Identity Matrix
Let A be a square matrix of order n. If aij = 0 for all 𝑖 ≠ 𝑗 and aij = 1 for 𝑖 = 𝑗, then A is said to be
identity matrix. Identity matrix is both diagonal & scalar. It is represented by 1
Null Matrix or Zero Matrix
A square matrix or rectangular matrix whose each element is zero is called a null or zero matrix
Equal Matrices
Two matrices A and B of the same order are said to be equal (A = B) if their corresponding Entries are
equal

MUHAMMAD ALI 33
 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014

Classification of Matrices w.r.t Operations

Transpose of Matrix
If A is a matrix of order m×n then an n×m matrix obtained by interchanging the rows and columns of A,
is called the transpose of A. It is denoted by At

Note
1. (At )t = A
2. (A + B)t = At + B t
3. (AB)t = B t At

Symmetric Matrix
A square matrix A is said to be a symmetric matrix if At =A

Skew-Symmetric Matrix
A square matrix A is said to be a skew symmetric matrix if At = −A

Remark
Elements of main diagonal of a skew-symmetric matrix are all zero, because by definition
aij = −aij
=> 2 aij = 0
=> aij = 0 for all values of 𝑖

Properties of Symmetric and Skew-Symmetric Matrices

1) If A is a square matrix, then
a) A + At is symmetric
b) A − At is skew-symmetric
2) If A and B are two symmetric (or skew-symmetric) matrices of the same order, then so is A + B
3) If A is symmetric (or skew-symmetric) matric and k is any scalar, then kA is also symmetric (or
skew-symmetric)
4) If A and B are symmetric matrices of the same order, then the product AB is symmetric iff AB =
BA
5) If A is symmetric or skew-symmetric, A2 is always symmetric
6) The inverse of a symmetric matrix is symmetric matrix

Conjugate of a Matrix
The matrix obtained from any given matrix A containing complex numbers as its elements, on replacing
̅)
its elements by corresponding conjugate complex numbers is called conjugate of A and is denoted by (A

Hermitian Matrix
̅ )t = A
A square matrix A with complex entries is called hermitian matrix if(A

Skew-hermitian Matrix
̅ )t = −A
A square matrix A with complex entries is called skew-hermitian matrix if (A

Upper Triangular Matrix

A square matrix A of order n is called an upper triangular if aij = 0 for all i > j

MUHAMMAD ALI 34
 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014
Lower Triangular Matrix
A square matrix A of order n is called a lower triangular matrix if aij = 0 for all i < j

Triangular Matrix
A square matrix A is named as triangular matrix whether it is upper or lower triangular

Matrix Operations and their Properties

Multiplication of Two Matrices

Two matrices A and B are said to be comfortable for the product AB if the number of columns of A is
equal to number of rows of B

Note:
1) AB≠ BA
2) AI = IA
3) AB = BA => both A and B are diagonal matrices
Singular Matrix
A square matrix is said to be singular if |A| = 0

Non-Singular Matrix
A square matrix is said to be non-singular if |A| ≠ 0

Inverse of a Matrix
1
If |A| ≠ 0, then A−1 = |A| adj A

Properties of the Inverse of a Matrix

1) The inverse of the inverse is the original matrix itself, i.e., (A−1 )−1 = A
2) The inverse of the transpose of matrix is the transpose of its inverse, i.e., (At )−1 = (A−1 )t
3) If A is a non-singular matrix, then
|A−1 | = |A|−1

Minor of an Element
Given an n × n matrix A, if we delete ith row and jth column of A, we get an (n − 1) × (n − 1) matrix.
The determinant of this matrix is called the minor of element aij and is denoted by Mij

Cofactor of an Element
The cofactor of an element aij of a square matrix A is denoted by Aij and is defined as
Aij = (−1)i+j Mij

Adjoint of a Matrix of Order 𝐧 ≥ 𝟑

If A is a square matrix, then the matrix obtained by taking the cofactor of each element of A, replacing
them correspondingly and then taking transpose of that matrix of cofactors is called adjoint A

Properties of Determinants
➢ For a square matrix |At | = |A|
➢ If the rows and columns of a determinants are interchanged the value of the determinant does not
change
➢ If two rows or any two columns of a determinant are interchanged, the value of determinant is
multiply by – 1

MUHAMMAD ALI 35
 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014
➢ If all the entries in any row or column are zero, the value of the determinant is zero
➢ If any row or columns of a determinant is multiplied by a non-zero number k, the value of the
new determinant becomes equal to k times the value of original determinant
➢ If any row or column of a determinant consists of two terms, it can be written as the sum of the
determinants
➢ The determinants of a triangular matric (upper, lower or diagonal) is equal to the product of the
elements of the main diagonal
➢ |A|. |B| = |A B| provided A and B have the same order

Echelon Form of a Matrix

An m × n matrix A is called in (row) echelon form if
1) In each successive non zero row, the number of zeroes before the leading entry greater than the
number of such zeros in the preceding row
2) Every non-zero row in A precedes every zero row (if any)
3) The first non-zero entry (or leading entry) in each row is 1

Reduced Echelon Form

An m × n matric A is said to be in reduced (row) echelon form if it is in (row) echelon form and if the
first non-zero entry (or leading entry) in R j lies in Cj then all other entries of Cj are zeros

Rank of a Matrix
Let A be a non-zero matrix. If ‘r’ is the number of non-zero rows when it is reduced to reduced echelon
for, then ‘r’ is called the (row) rank of the matrix A

Non-homogeneous System of Linear Equation

The system of the form AX = B is called non-homogeneous system of linear equations where A is said to
be matrix of the coefficients

Solution of Non-Homogeneous System of Linear Equation

If |A| ≠ 0 then the solution of the system exists and is unique, so the system is called consistent
If A| = 0 then the solution of the system does not exists and the system is called inconsistent

The system can be solved by using any one of the following methods
1) Using matrices AX = B
2) Using Crammer’s rule
3) Using echelon & reduced echelon forms

Homogeneous System of Linear Equations

The system of the form AX = O is called homogeneous system of linear equations where A is said to be
matrix of the coefficients
The system has two types of solutions

Trivial Solution
x = 0, y = 0, z = 0, this solution of the system always exists and is called trivial solution
Non-Trivial Solution
Any solution other than x = 0; y = 0, z = 0 is called non-trivial solution. The non-trivial solution exists
only if |A| = 0 or rank of A < 3. The non-trivial solutions are infinite and in the case if non-trivial
solutions exists the system is called consistent. The system can be solved by using the echelon and
reduced echelon forms

MUHAMMAD ALI 36
 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014

MCQs
1. If A and B are square matrices of same order such that (A + B)2 = A2 + B 2 + 2AB, then
a) AB = BA b) A = -B c) A = B t d) none of these

2. adj (AB) =
a) adj(BA) b) (AdjB)(adjA) c) (adj A)( adjB) d) Adj(AB)t

3. Let A be a square matrix, then which of the following is not a symmetric matrix
a) A + A𝑡 b) At A c) AAt d) A − At

4. If In is the unit matrix of order n, then (In )−1

a) Does not exists b) In c) zero d) nIn

5. If A and B are two square matrices of same order and At denote the transpose of A, then
a) (AB)t = B t At b) (AB)t = At B t c) AB = 0 => |A| = 0 or |B| = 0
d) AB = 0 => A = 0 or B = 0

6. If I3 is identity matrix of order 3, then (I3 )−1 equals

a) Zero b) 3I3 c) I3 d) not necessarily exists

7. If A is a 3 ×4 matrix and B is a matrix such that AB and BA are both defined, then B is of the
type
a) 3 × 4 b) 3× 3 c) 4× 4 d) 4× 3

8. If the matrix AB is zero, then

a) 𝐴 = 0 or B= 0 b) it is not necessary that either A = 0 or B = 0 c) A = 0 and B = 0
d) None
9. For a 3× 3 matrix, if |A| = 4 then |adj A| equals
a) – 4 b) 4 c) 16 d) 64

10. If A is a square matrix such that A2 = A, then |A| equals

a) Zero or one b) -2 or 2 c) -3 or 3 d) none of these

11. If A is an invertible matrix, then A(Adj A) is

a) A bb) I c) I |A| d) A−1

12. If every element of a third order determinant of value ∆ is multiplied by 5, then the value of the
new determinant is
a) ∆ b) 5∆ c) 25∆ d) 125∆

13. If the entries in a 3 × 3 determinants are either zero or one, then the greatest value of this
determinant is
a) 1 b) 2 c) 3 d) 9

14. The inverse of a symmetric matrix is

a) Diagonal matrix b) symmetric matrix c) skew-symmetric matrix d) none of
these

MUHAMMAD ALI 37
 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014

15. If A and B are two matrices such that AB = B and BA = A, then A2 + B 2 =

a) 2AB b) 2BA c) A+B d) AB

16. If A is a singular matrix, then ajd A is

a) Non-singular b) singular c) symmetric d) not defined

17. Let A = [aij ] be a square matrix of order n. If aij = 0 for all i ≠ j and aij = 1 for all i = j, then A
is
a) Scalar matrix b) identity matrix c) null matrix d) symmetric matrix

18. If order of A is m× n and order of B is n × p then order of AB is

a) m× m b) n× n c) m× p d) p× m

19. The transpose of a rectangular matrix is a

a) Square matrix b) rectangular matrix c) row matrix d) column matrix

k 4
20. If | | = 0 then k =
4 k
a) ±4 b) 0 c) 16 d) none of these

21. The number of non-zero rows in echelon form of a matrix is called

a) Order of matrix b) rank of matrix c) row operation d) none of these

λ 4
22. If the matrix | | is singular then λ =
3 2
a) 2 b) 6 c) 4 d) 8

23. (A + At )t =
a) A + A b) At + At c) −(A + At ) d) (A + At )

1 3 5
24. The value of determinant of the matrix [ 7 9 11] is
13 15 17
a) 0 b) 1 c) 2 d) 3

a 0 b
25. Value of determinant of matrix [c 0 −d] is
e 0 f
a) 1 b) 2 c) 0 d) 3

26. If A is matrix of order m × n then kA is of order (k is real number)

a) km× n b) m× kn c) km× kn d) m× n

27. The equation x + 2y + 3z, x − y + 4z = 0,2x + y + 7z = 1 have

a) Only two solution b) only one solution c) no solution d) infinitely many
solutions

28. If AB = A and BA = B, then B 2 is equal to

a) B b) A c) 1 d) 0

MUHAMMAD ALI 38
 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014

29. Let A be a non-singular matrix, which of the following is not true?

a) (At )−1 = (A−1 )t b) A−1 = |A|−1 c) (A2 )−1 = (A−1 )2 d) none of these

30. If A, B are two n× n non-singular matrices, then

a) AB is non-singular b) AB is singular c) (AB)−1 = A−1 . B −1 d) (AB)−1 does not
exists

31. If A is 3 × 4 matrix and B is a matrix such that At B and BAt are both defined, then B is of the
type
a) 3× 4 b) 3× 3 c) 4× 4 d) 4× 3

32. If A is a square matrix such that A2 = I, then A−1 is equal to

a) A + I b) A c) O d) 2A

33. If A and B are any 2× 2 matrices, then det(A + B) = 0 implies

a) detA = 0 and det B = 0 b) det A + det B = 0 c) det A = 0 or det B = 0 d)
none of these

34. If A is symmetric as well as skew-symmetric matrix, then A is

a) Diagonal b) null c) triangular d) none of these

35. Rank of identity matrix of order 3 is

a) 0 b) 1 c) 2 d) 3

36. The real value of r for which the system of equation 2rx − 2y + 3z = 0, x + ry + 2z = 0, 2x +
rz = 0 has non-trivial solution is
a) r = 2 b) r = -2 c) r = 0 d) none of these

37. In matrices (A−1 )−1 is equal to

a) A−1 b) I c) A d) 0

38. If in a square matrix A any two rows or columns are identical, then
a) |A| = 0 b) A = 0 c) |A| = I d) none of these

39. The transpose of an identity matrix is

a) Zero matrix b) an identity matrix c) scalar matrix d) column matrix

40. If A and B are two matrices such that A + B and AB are both defined, then A and B are
a) Both identity matrices b) both null matrices c) both matrices of the same order
d) Both square matrices of the same order

41. The transpose of the matrix of cofactors is said to be

a) Matrix of cofactor b) adjoint of the matrix c) rectangular matrix d) none of
these

42. The cofactor of an element aij denoted by Aij is

a) (−1)i−j Mij b) (−1)i+j Mij c) (−1)ij Mij d) none of these

MUHAMMAD ALI 39
 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014

43. An equation of the form ax + by = k is homogenous linear equation when

a) a = 0, b = 0, k = 1 b) a = 0, b = 0, k = 0 c) a ≠ 0, b ≠ 0, k = 0 d) a ≠ 0, b ≠
0, k ≠ 0

1 2 0 0
44. If A = [ ] and A2 = [ ] then A is called
−1/2 −1 0 0
a) Idempotent b) symmetric c) nilpotent d) involuntary

45. Set of all m × n real matrices farm a/an _________ w.r.t “+” defined on matrices
a) Finite b) Abelian c) Non-abelian d) None

1 a b+c
46. The value of |1 b c + a | =__________
1 c a+b
a) a + b + c b) 0 c) – 1 d) ab + bc + ac

47. If ‘A’ is square matrix of order 4 and |A| = 6 then |2A|=?

a) 20 b) 16 cc) 80 d) 96

0 2 − 3𝑖
48. A = [ ] is
−2 − 3𝑖 0
a) Symmetric b) skew symmetric c) hermitian d) none

2x + y + z x + y 12 4
49. In [ ]=[ ], then value of z is
x−y x 2 3
a) 10 b) 5 c) 15 d) 25

5 5+𝑖
50. The matrix [ ] is
5−𝑖 −5
a) Symmetric b) skew-symmetric c) hermitian d) skew-hermitian
2
51. If X = [𝑖 0 ] = then I X 2 is
2
0 𝑖2
2
a) X b) X c) I2 d) both (b) and (c) are correct

1 −1 2 3
52. If A = [ ] and B = [ ] then (AB)−1 =
2 3 −1 −2
1 10 1 1 0 1 1 0 5
a) 5 [ ] b) − 5 [ ] c) 5 [ ] d) none of these
0 −4 −3 5 1 −3

53. Consider the statements –

i. If A is symmetric, then A2 is also symmetric
ii. If A is skew-symmetric, then A3 is also skew-symmetric
iii. If A is skew-symmetric, then A2 is also skew-symmetric
Which among the following is correct?
a) Only i and ii are true b) only i and iii are true c) only ii and iii are true d) all i, ii and
iii are true

1 x+3
54. If A = [ ] is symmetric matrix, then x =
2x + 1 x−1
a) 5 b) 7 c) 3 d) 2

MUHAMMAD ALI 40
 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014

55. The sum of the products of the elements of any row of a determinant A with the corresponding
cofactors of the same row is always equal to
1
a) |A| b) 2 |A| c) 1 d) 0

ANSWERS
1. A 11. C 21. B 31. A 41. B
2. B 12. D 22. B 32. B 42. B
3. D 13. B 23. D 33. D 43. C
4. B 14. B 24. A 34. B 44. C
5. C 15. C 25. C 35. D 45. B
6. C 16. B 26. D 36. A 46. B
7. D 17. B 27. D 37. C 47. D
8. B 18. C 28. A 38. A 48. B
9. C 19. B 29. B 39. D 49. B
10. A 20. A 30. A 40. B 50. C
51. D
52. C
53. A
54. D
55. A

SOLUTIONS / HINTS

4. Hint: Inverse of identity matrix is identity matrix of same order b)

8. Solution:
For example: Take any two non-zero matrices of order 2× 2
1 0 0 0
A=[ ];B = [ ]
0 0 1 0
You can see that AB = 0, but matrices are not zero matrices. Similarly you can check by taking
any two matrices b)

9. Solution:
Given |A| = 4
|A|3 43
Now |adj(A)| = |A|
= 4
= 42 = 16 c)

10. Solution:
If A2 = A
=> A2 − A = 0
=> A(A − 1) = 0
Either A = 0 or A = 1
=> |A| = 0 or |A| = 1 a)

12. Solution:
We will take “5” Common from every row. So we will have 53 or 125 times the determinant
d)

MUHAMMAD ALI 41
 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014

13. Solution:
Greatest value = 2 b)

15. Solution:
A2 + B 2 = AA + BB
= A(BA) + B(AB)
= (AB)A + (BA)A
(∵ AB = B and BA = A)
= BA + AB = A + B c)

27. Hint: Check the determinant, its zero which means system of linear equations has infinitely many
solutions d)

28. Solution:
Since BA = B
=>∴ (BA)B = BB = B 2
=> B(AB) = B 2
=> BA = B 2 because AB = A
=> B = B 2 because BA = B a)

32. Solution: If A2 = I; its means A is an identity matrix. Therefore, inverse of identity matrix is
identity matrix
i.e., A−1 = A
OR since A2 = I => AA = I
=> A−1 = A b)

36. Hint: Put determinant = 0 and solve for the real value of r a)

47. Solution:
If A is a square matrix of order 4; then |2A| = 24 |A|
= 16|A| = 16(6) = 96 d)

54. Hint: Take At = A and simplify

=> x = 2 d)

MUHAMMAD ALI 42
 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014

Chapter # 4
SOLUTIONS OF QUADRATIC EQUATIONS

SYNOPSIS
Equation
An open sentence formed by using the sign of equality ‘=’ is said to be an equation

Linear Equation
An equation of the form ax + by + c = 0, where a, b and c are real numbers and a and b are not
simultaneously zero is said to be a linear equation

Quadratic Equation
An equation of the form ax 2 + by 2 + c = 0, where a ≠ 0 and a. b and c belongs to set of real numbers, is
called a quadratic equation

The numbers a, b, c are called coefficients of the quadratic equation

Methods to solve a Quadratic Equation

1. Factorization
2. Completing the square
3. Quadratic Formula
−b ± √b 2 − 4ac
x=
2𝑎

Exponential Equation
Equations, in which the variable occurs in exponents, are called exponential equations

Reciprocal Equations
1
An equation, which remains unchanged when x is replaced by x, is called a reciprocal equation

Radical Equation
Equations involving radical expressions of the variable are called radical equations

Three Cube Roots of Unity

The three cube roots of unity area
−1+i√3 −1−i√3
1, 2
and 1, 2

Properties of Three Cube Roots of Unity

➢ Each complex cube root of unity is square of the other
➢ The sum of all the three cube roots of unity is zero i.e., 1+ω + ω2 = 0
➢ The product of all the three cube roots of unity is unity i.e. ω3 = 1
➢ For any n ∈ Z, ωn is equivalent to one of the cube roots of unity

Four Fourth Roots of Unity

Four fourth roots of unity are
1, −1, 𝑖, −𝑖

MUHAMMAD ALI 43
 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014
Properties of Four Fourth Roots of Unity
➢ Sum of all the four fourth roots of unity is zero
➢ The real fourth roots of unity are additive inverses of each other
➢ Both the complex / imaginary fourth roots of unity are conjugate of each
➢ Product of all the fourth roots of unity is – 1

Polynomial
An expression of the form
a0 x n + a1 xn−1 + ⋯ + an−1 x + an
Where a0 , a1 , a2 , … an are all constants is said to be a polynomial of degree n in x. The higher power of x
in polynomial in x is called the degree of the polynomial

Polynomial with low Degree have Special Names

Degree zero => Constant Polynomial
Degree one => Linear Polynomial
Degree two => Quadratic Polynomial
Degree four => Quadratic Polynomial

Note:
Zero is a polynomial of arbitrary degree

Monomial
A polynomial having one term is called monomial

Binomial
A polynomial having two terms is called binomial

Trinomial
A polynomial having three terms is called trinomial

Remainder Theorem
If a polynomial f(x) of degree n ≥ 1, n is non-negative integer is divided by x – a till no x-term exists in
the remainder, then f(a) is the remainder

Factor Theorem
The polynomial x – a is a factor of the polynomial f(x) is and only if f(a) = 0 i.e., (x – a) is a factor of f(x)
if and only if x = a is a root of the polynomial equation f(x) = 0

Relation between the Roots and Coefficients of a Quadratic Equations

If α and β are the roots of the quadratic equation ax 2 + by 2 + c = 0, then
Sum of the roots = α + β
Coefficient of x b
= − Coefficient of x2 = − a
Product of the roots = α, β
Coefficient term c
= Coefficient of x2 = a

Formation of Equation with Given Roots

The general form of the equation with given roots is x 2 + Sx + P = 0
Where S = Sum of the roots
And P = Product of the roots

MUHAMMAD ALI 44
 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014

Nature of the Roots of Quadratic Equations

Discriminant
In a quadratic equation, ax 2 + bx + c = 0, the quantity b2 − 4ac is called the discriminant of the
quadratic equations
The roots of the quadratic equations will be
1. Real and distinct iff b2 − 4ac > 0
2. Real and equal iff b2 − 4a = 0
3. Imaginary iff b2 − 4ac < 0
4. Rational iff b2 − 4ac is a perfect square
5. Irrational iff b2 − 4ac is positive but not a perfect square
Key Point to Remember
1. If a and c are of opposite sign, the roots must be of opposite sign
2. If the roots are reciprocal of each other, then c = a
3. The quadratic equations whose roots are reciprocal of the roots of ax 2 + bx + c = 0 is cx 2 +
bx + a = 0

Simultaneous Equation
To determine the value of two variables, we need a pair of equations. Such a pair of equation is called
a system of simultaneous equations

MUHAMMAD ALI 45
 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014

MCQs
1 1
1. If α and βare the roots of the equation 4x 2 + 3x + 7 = 0, then the value of α + β is
3 3 3 7
a) − 4 b) − 7 c) + 4 d) 4

2. The values of k for which 2x 2 − kx + x + 8 = 0 has equal and real roots are
a) -9 and -7 b) 9 and 7 c) -9 and 7 d) 9 and -7

3. If one roots of the equation 5x 2 + 13x + k = 0 is reciprocal of the other, then the value of k is
a) 0 b) 5 c) – 5 d) 6

4. If p and q are the roots of the equation x 2 + px + q = 0

a) p = 1 b) p = 1 or 0 c) p = −2 d) p = −2 or 0

5. If α, β are roots of the equation x 2 − p(x + 1) − c = 0, then (α + 1)(β + 1) = 0

a) C b) c − 1 c) 1 – c d) none of these
1
6. If the equations 5x 2 + 13x + k = 0 has roots α and α, then k is equal to
a) 1 b) 13 c) – 5 d) 5

−i+√3
7. If one roots of the quadratic equation is 2
then the sum of the roots is
√3
a) −𝑖 b) 2
c) +I d) √3

8. The value/s of x satisfying x = √6 + √6 + √6 + ⋯ ∞ is/are

a) 3, -2 b) – 2 c) 3 d) none of these

9. The values of m for which equation (1 + m)x 2 − 2(1 + 3m)x + (1 + 8m) = 0 has equal roots,
is
a) 0 b) 1 c) 2 d) 3

10. If a(b − c)x 2 + b(c − a)x + c(a − b) = 0 has equal roots, then a, b, c are in
a) A.P b) G.P c) H.P d) None of these

11. If the roots of the equation 9x 2 + 4ax + 4 = 0 are imaginary, then

a) a ∈ (−3, 3) b) a ∈ [−3, 3] c) a ∈ (−∞, −3] ∪ [3, ∞) d) none of these

12. The value of p for which the quadratic equation x 2 − px + p + 3 = 0 has reciprocal roots is
a) 1 b) -1 c) 2 d) – 2

13. If f(x) = 2x 3 + mx 2 − 13x + n and 2, 3 are roots of the equation f(x) = 0, then value of m and n
are
a) −5, −30 b) −5,30 c) 5, 30 d) none of these
2
14. For what values of k will the equation x − 2(1 + 3k)x + 7(3 + 2k) = 0 have equal roots
10 10 10 10
a) 1. − 9 b) 2, − 9 c) 3, − 9 d) 4, − 9

MUHAMMAD ALI 46
 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014

15. The numerical difference of the roots of x 2 − 7x − 9 = 0 is

a) √85 b) 9√7 c) 2√85 d) 5

16. The value or values of p for which the equation 2x 2 − √2px + p = 0 has equal roots is or are
a) 0 b) 4 c) 0, 4 d) none of these

17. If the product of the roots of the equation αx 2 + 6x + α2 + 1 = 0 is -2 then α equals

a) – 2 b) -1 c) 2 d) 1

(x+2)(x−5) (x−2)
18. The number of roots of the equation (x−3)(x+6) = x+4
is
a) 0 b) 1 c) 2 d) 3

19. The values of p and q (p ≠ 0, q ≠ 0) for which p, q are the roots of the equations x 2 + px + q =
0 are
a) p = 1, q = −2 b) p = −1, q = −2 c) p = −1, q = 2 d) p = 1, q = 2

20. If (1 − p) is a root of quadratic equation x 2 + px + (1 − p) = 0, then its roots are

a) 0, -1 b) -1, 1 c) 0, 1 d) -1, 2

21. If one root of the equation px 2 − 14x + 8 = 0 is six times the other, then p is equal to
a) 2 b) 3 c) 1 d) none of these
2 2
22. The equation x + =1+ has
1−x 1−x
a) No real roots b) one real roots c) two equal roots d) infinitely many roots

23. The roots of the equation x 2 + 2(3a + 5)x + 2(9a2 + 25) = 0 are real, when ‘a’ equals
a) -5/3 b) 3/5 c) 5/3 d) -3/5

24. The value of k for which 1 + √2 is one of the roots of x 2 − 2x + k = 0 is

a) – 1 b) 1 c) √2 d) -√2

25. 41+x + 41−x = 10 is called

a) Reciprocal equation b) exponential equation c) radical equation d) none of
these

26. w 4 =
a) 0 b) 1 c) w d) w 2

27. If x 3 + ax 2 − a2 x − a3 is divided by x + a, then the remainder is

a) 0 b) a3 c) 2a3 d) −2a3

28. w 28 + w 38 =
a) 0 b) 1 c) w d) – 1

29. Which of the following is a factor of x 3 − 3x 2 + 2x − 6

a) x + 2 b) x + 3 c) x – 3 d) x – 4

MUHAMMAD ALI 47
 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014
1 1
30. If α, β are roots of 2x 2 − 4x + 5 = 0 then + =
α β
5 5 4 4
a) 4
b) − 4 c) 5 d) − 5

31. If α, β are roots of 2x 2 − 4x + 5 = 0 then (α + 1), (β + 1) =

11 11 2 2
a) 2 b) − 2 c) 11 d) − 11

32. If α, β are the roots of 2x 2 − 4x + 5 = 0 then α2 + β2 =

a) – 1 b) 0 c) – 2 d) 1

33. If the polynomial x 3 + 4𝑥 2 − 2𝑥 + 5 is divided by x + 1, then the remainder is

a) 4 b) 6 c) 8 d) 10

34. The quadratic equation with roots 2 − √3, 2 + √3 is

a) x 2 − 4x + 1 = 0 b) x 2 − 3x + 3 = 0 c) x 2 + 4x + 1 = 0 d) x 2 − 4x −
1=0

35. (1 + w − w 2 )8 =
a) 256 b) 256w c) -256 d) -256 w

36. The sum of cube roots of unity is

a) 3 b) 2 c) 1 d) 0

37. The product of cube root of unity is

a) 3 b) 2 c) 1 d) 0

38. The number of real roots in cube roots of unity are

a) 3 b) 2 c) 1 d) 0

39. The roots of quadratic equation ax 2 − bx − c = 0 are real if

a) b2 + 4ac ≤ 0 b) b2 − 4ac < 0 c) b2 + 4ac ≥ 0 d) b2 − 4ac = 0

40. If 4 and – 5 are the roots, then quadratic equation will be

a) x 2 − x − 20 = 0 b) x 2 − x + 20 = 0 c) x 2 + x − 20 = 0 d) x 2 + x +
20 = 0

41. The square of a number when added to the number results in 6 then the number is
a) 2 b) – 2 c) – 3 d) both (a) and (c)

42. If 31+x + 5.3x − 8 = 0, then x =

a) 8 b) 5 c) 3 d) 0

43. If √2x + 1 + √x = 5 then x =

a) 5 b) 4 c) 3 d) 2
44. If √5x − 1 − √2x = 1 then x =
a) 3 b) 2 c) 1 d) 5
2
45. The roots of quadratic equations x − 4x = 0 are
a) Imaginary b) rational & difference c) irrational d) rational & difference

MUHAMMAD ALI 48
 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014

46. If the area of a rectangle is 56 and the length is one more than the breadth then the dimensions are
a) −8, −7 b) 8, 7 c) 14, 4 d) 28, 2

47. If one root of 4x 2 + 7hx − h2 + 9 = 0 is zero then h =

a) 0 b) 3 c) – 3 d) ±3

48. The real quadratic equation whose one root is 2 − √3 is

a) x 2 − 4x + 1 = 0 b) x 2 + 4x − 1 = 0 c) x 2 − 4x − 1 = 0 d) none of these

49. If the roots of the equation ax 2 + bx + c = 0 are reciprocal to each other, then
a) a + c = 0 b) b = 0 c) a − c = 0 d) none of these

50. The cube roots of unity are in

a) G.P b) A.P c) H.P d) none of these

51. The number of roots of the equation

2 2
x − x−1 = 1 − x−1 are
a) 1 b) 2 c) 0 d) infinitely many

52. Two students while solving a quadratic equation in ‘x’ with leading coefficient ‘1’, one copied
the constant term is incorrectly and got the root 3 and 2. The other copied the constant term
correctly -6. The correct roots are
a) -2, 3 b) -3, 2 c) -6, -1 d) -1, 6

53. If α, β are roots of x 2 − 2x + 1 = 0, then (α − β)2 =

a) 8 b) – 8 c) 4 d) 0

54. Solution set of equation x(x − 1) = x is

a) {1} b) {0} c) {0, 1} d) {0, 2}

ANSWERS
1. B 11. A 21. B 31. A 41. A
2. D 12. D 22. A 32. A 42. D
3. B 13. B 23. C 33. D 43. B
4. B 14. B 24. A 34. A 44. B
5. C 15. A 25. B 35. B 45. B
6. D 16. C 26. C 36. D 46. B
7. D 17. B 27. A 37. C 47. D
8. C 18. B 28. D 38. C 48. A
9. (A, D) 19. A 29. C 39. C 49. C
10. C 20. A 30. C 40. C 50. A
51. C
52. D
53. D
54. D

MUHAMMAD ALI 49
 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014

SOLUTIONS / HINTS
2. Hint: First discriminant and put it equal to zero d)

3. Hint: For reciprocal roots in ax 2 + bx + c = 0

The condition is a = c b)

4. Solution:
b
If p and q are the roots of the equation then the sum of roots = − a
=> p + q = −p and pq = q
=> p = 1 or 0 because if q = 0 then p = 0 if q ≠ 0 then p = 1 and q = -2 b)

7. Solution:
√3−𝑖 √3+𝑖
Since one of the root is , then other root will be
2 2
∴ Sum of roots = √3 d)

8. Solution:

Let x = √6 + √6 + √6 + ⋯ ∞
Squaring x 2 = 6 + √6 + √6 + ⋯ ∞
x2 = 6 + x
Only x = 3 satisfies the equation (x ≠ −2) c)

9. Hint: Find discriminant and put it equal to zero (a, d)

10. Hint: Put discriminant equal to zero c)

11. Hint: Given Eq is 9x 2 + 4ax + 4 = 0

Since the roots are imaginary, so b2 − 4ac < 0
=> 16a2 − 26x 4 < 0 => 16(a2 − 9) < 0
=> (a2 − 9) < 0 => (a + 3)(a − 3) < 0
=> −3 < a < 3 a)

12. Solution:
Put a = c
=> 1 = p + 3
=> p = −2 d)

13. Hint: Put x = 2 and x =3 we will be having two equations; solve the equation to find m and n
b)

14. Hint: Find the discriminant and put it equal to zero to find the values of k b)

MUHAMMAD ALI 50
 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014
15. Solution:
Let α and β be the roots of given equation. We have to find α − β
For the equation x 2 − 7x − 9 = 0
α + β = 7 and αβ = −9
(α + β)2 = α2 + β2 − 2αβ
= α2 + β2 + 2αβ − 4αβ
= (α + β)2 − 4αβ
= 49 + 36
2
(α − β) = 85
=> α − β = √85 a)

17. Solution:
For the equation ax 2 + 6x + α2 + 1 = 0
α2 +1
Product of roots = α
α2 +1
=> −2 = α
=> α2 + 2α + 1 = 0
=> (α + 1)2 = 0
=> α = −1 b)

18. Hint: Check the options, such its satisfies the given equation b)

19. Solution:
Here p + q = −p → (1)
And pq = q → (2)
From (1) and (2)
p = 1; q = −2 a)

21. Solution:
Let α and 6α be the roots of given eq.
14 8
The sum of roots = ρ and product of roots = ρ
14 8
=> α + 6a = ρ
; (α)(6α) = ρ
14 8
=> 7α = ρ
… (1); 6α2 = ρ ….(2)
Solve (1) and (2) for the value of p (b)

22. Solution:
Taking LCM and multiply; we have
(x − 1)2 = 0
=> x = 1
Which is not possible a)

24. Hint: Put x = 1+√2 in given equation, and solve for k a)

MUHAMMAD ALI 51
 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014

34. Hint: Use the equation x 2 − Sx + P = 0

Here S = 4; P = 1 a)

43. Hint: Check the options. Option (b) satisfies the given equation b)

47. Hint: Put x = 0, and solve for the values of h d)

Eliminate the options which cannot be the answer. Here the power of h is two; so its quite
understood that two values are possible
Remember!
“Eliminate the options which cannot be the answers”

51. Hint: Simplifying => x = 1; which is not possible

52. Solution:
Eq. solved by first student is
(x − 3)(x − 2) = 0
=> x 2 − 5x + 6 = 0
∴ Correct coefficient term is = - 6
Given constant term is = - 6
=> x 2 − 5x − 6 = 0 is the req. eq
=> x = −1; 6 d)

53. Solution
b
Here α + β = − = 2 and αβ = 1
a
Take (α − β)2 = (α + β)2 − 4αβ
= (2)2 − 4(1)
=4−4=0 d)

54. Solution
x(x − 1) = x
=> x 2 − x = x
=> x 2 − 2x = 0
=> x(x − 2) = 0
=> x = 0 ; x = 2 d)

MUHAMMAD ALI 52
 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014

Chapter # 5
PARTIAL FRACTIONS

SYNOPSIS
Method of Partial Fractions
Expressing a rational fractions as a sum of partial fractions is called partial fraction resolution

The method which converts one or two fractions into a single fraction is known as method or partial
fraction

Equation
An open sentence formed by using the sign of equality ‘=’ is called an equation

Conditional Equation
It is an equation in which two algebraic expressions are equal for particular value/s of the variables e.g.,
7
5x = 7 is a conditional equation and it is true only if x = 5
Identity
It is an equation which holds good for all the values of the variable e.g.,
(x + 3)(x + 4) ≡ x 2 + 7x + 12
Polynomial
An expression of the form
a0 x n + a1 xn−1 + ⋯ + an−1 x + an , a0 ≠ 0
Where a0 , a1 , a2 , … , an are all constant is said to be a polynomial of degree n in x
Fraction
P(x)
An expression of the form Q(x) where P(x) and Q(x) are polynomials in x and Q(x) ≠ 0 is said to be a
fraction
Types of Fractions
1) Proper fraction
2) Improper fraction
Explanation

1) Proper Fraction
A fraction in which the degree of the numerator is less than the degree of denominator is said to be a proper
fraction
Example
3x+5
x2 +9
2) Improper Fraction
A fraction in which the degree of the numerator is greater than or equal to the degree of the
denominator is said to be an improper fraction
Example
3x2 +5 x+5
;
x+9 x−3

MUHAMMAD ALI 53
 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014

MCQs
1. A fraction in which the degree of the numerator is less than the degree of the denominator is
called
a) Polynomial b) equation c) proper fraction d) improper fraction

2. A relation in which the equality is true only for some values of the unknown is called
a) An identity b) an equation c) a polynomial d) none of these

3. Expressing a rational fraction as a sum of partial fraction is called

a) Partial fraction b) partial fraction resolution c) both of above d) none of these

4. When a rational fraction is separated into partial fractions, the result is

a) An equation b) non-equation c) identity d) none of these

5. x 2 + x − 6 = 0 is a conditional equation and it is true for

a) 2, 3 b) 2, -3 c) -2, -3 d) -2, 3

6. The symbol ______ shall be used both for equation and identity
a) ≅ b) = c) ≠ d) ≡

7. There are ________ types of rational fraction

a) Three b) four c) five d) two
1
8. The partial fraction of x2 −1 is
1 1 1 1 1 1
a) − b) c) d) +
2(x−1) 2(x+1) 2(x−1) 2(x+1) 2(x−1) 2(x+1)

xn−2 −an−2
9. Fraction x2 +a2
is improper if
a) n ≥ 2 b) n ≤ 2 c) n < 4 d) n ≥ 4

x3 +y3
10. Fraction is proper if polynomial P(x) =
P(x)
a) x 2 − y 2
b) x 3 − y 3 c) x 4 − y 4 d) x + y

11. If 2x − 1 = Ax − B + Bx is an identity in x, then

a) A = 1, B = 2 b) A = 1 = B c) A = 2 = B d) A = 2, B = 1

12. Domain of a proper rational function

9x2
f(x) = x3 −1 is
a) R b) R – {0} c) R – {1} d) R – {-1}

13. Partial fraction resolution gives a/an

a) Identity b) Equation c) Conditional equation d) None
4 3
14. Conditional equation x+3 = x+4 is true only for x =
a) 1 b) – 1 c) 0 d) – 7

MUHAMMAD ALI 54
Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014

ANSWERS1

1. C
2. B
3. C
4. C
5. B
6. B
7. D
8. A
9. D
10. C
11. B
12. C
13. A
14. D

MUHAMMAD ALI 55
 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014

Chapter # 6
SEQUENCE AND SERIES

SYNOPSIS
Introduction
Progression

Arithmetic Geometric Harmonic

Progression progression progression

Sequence
A succession of numbers a1 , a2 , a3 , … . , an formed according to some definite rule is called a sequence
A sequence is a function whose domain is the set of natural numbers and range is a subset of real numbers
or complex numbers

Real Sequence
A sequence whose range is a subset of real numbers is called a real sequence

Notation
The difference terms of a sequence are usually denoted by a1 , a2 , a3 . The subscript (always a natural
number) denotes the position of the term in the sequence

nth Term of a Sequence

The term at the nth place of sequence, i.e. an is called the general term or the nth term of the sequence

Finite Sequence
A sequence is said to be a finite sequence if its domain is finite or if it has finite number of term

Infinite Sequence
A sequence is said to be an infinite sequence if its domain is infinite or if it has infinite number of terms
An infinite sequence has no last term

Progression
If the terms of a sequence follow certain pattern, then the sequence is called a progression

Arithmetic Progression
Arithmetic progression is that progression in which each term is obtained by adding or subtracting a fixed
number to its previous term
The fixed number is called common difference of the A.P.
Common difference = d = an − an−1
Where n ∈ N and n > 1
Thus an A.P. can be written as
a, a + d, a + 2d, … a + (n − 1)d, …

nth Term of an A.P.

If a is the first term and d is the common difference of an A.P. then its nth term an is given as
an = a + (n − 1)d

MUHAMMAD ALI 56
 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014

Key Points to Remember

1) If all the terms of an arithmetic progression can increased, decreased, multiplied or divided by the
same non-zero quantity then the resulting progression is also an arithmetic progression
2) If the correspondence terms of two arithmetic progressions be added or subtracted, the resulting
progression is also an arithmetic progression
3) i) Three constructive terms of an A.P. are taken as a − d, a, a + d
ii) Four constructive terms of an A.P. are taken as a − 3d, a − d, a + d, a + 3d

Arithmetic Mean (A.M)

Single Arithmetic Mean
A number ‘A’ is said to be the single A.M. between two given number a and b provided a, A, b are in A.P
a+b
A=
2

Note:
Middle term of three consecutive terms in A.P. is the A.M. between the extreme terms
In general, we can say that an is the A.M between an−1 and an+1 i.e.,
an−1 + an+1
an =
2
Where n ∈ N

n A.M.s between Two Number

The number A1 , A2 , A3 , … , An are said to be the n A.Ms between given numbers a and b provided
a, A1 , A2 , A3 , … , An , b are in A.P.

Inserting n-arithmetic Means between Two Given Numbers

A1 = a + d
A2 = a + 2d
A3 = a + 3d
A4 = a + 4d
……………
……………
An = a + nd

Note:
a+nb
An = n+1
The sum of n A.M’s between any two numbers a and b is equal to n-times the A.M. between a and b

Series
By adding or subtracting the terms of a sequence, we obtained a series. A series is finite or infinite
according as the number of terms in the corresponding sequence is finite or infinite

Arithmetic Series
If {an } is an A.p., then sum of n terms, Sn can be written as
Sn = a + (a + d) + (a + 2d) + ⋯ + (an − 2d) + (an − d) + an

Sum of First n Terms of an Arithmetic Progression

The sum of n terms of an A.P., with first term ‘a’ and common difference ‘d’ is given by

MUHAMMAD ALI 57
 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014
n
Sn = (a + an )
2
n
=> Sn = [2a + (n − 1)d]
2

Key Points to Remember

1) If Sn is the sum of n terms of an A.P. whose first term is ‘a’ and the last term is 𝑙, then
n
Sn = [a + 𝑙]
2

2) If common difference d, number of terms n and the last term 𝑙, are given then
n
Sn = [2𝑙 − (n − 1)d]
2

3) t n = Sn − Sn−1 (n ≥ 2)

Geometric Progression
Geometric Progression is that progression, in which each term is obtained by multiplying or dividing
a fixed number to its previous term
The fixed number is called common ratio and is usually denoted by r
a
Common ratio = r = a n where n ∈ N provided an−1 ≠ 0 and n > 1
n−1
General form of a G.P. is a, ar, ar 2 , ar 3m , . ., where a is the first term and r is the common ratio

nth Term of G.P

If a is the first term and r is the common ratio of a G.P., then its nth term an is given as

Key Points to Remember

1) No term of a G.P. can be zero
2) If all the terms of a G.P. be multiplied or divided by the same non-zero quantity, then the
resulting progression is also in G.P.
3) If the corresponding terms of two geometric progression be multiplied or divided, the resulting
progression is also a geometric progression
4) The resulting progression formed by the reciprocals of the corresponding terms of a geometric
progression is also a geometric progression
a
5) Three consecutive terms of a G.P. are taken as , a, ar
r
a a
6) Four consecutive terms of a G.P are taken as r2 , r , ar, ar 2

Geometric Mean
Single Geometric Mean:
A number ‘G’ is said to be the single geometric mean between two given numbers a and b if a, G, b are
in G.P
Let a and b be two given positive numbers and G be the G.M between them, then G = √ab
The numbers G1 , G2 , … . , Gn are said to be the n geometric means between two given positive numbers a
and b if a, G1 , G2 , … . Gn are in G.P
G1 = ar
G2 = ar 2
G3 = ar 3
…………
Gm = ar n

MUHAMMAD ALI 58
 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014
Note
n
b n+1
1) Gn = a (a)
2) If a = b then A.M. = G.M.

Geometric Series
If the sequence {an } is geometric sequence, then Sn = a + ar + ar 2 +. . +ar n−1

Sum of Finite Geometric Progression

The sum of the first n terms of a G.P, with first term a and common ratio r is given by
a(1−rn )
Sn = 1−r
when |r| < 1
a(rn −1)
Sn = r−1
when |r| > 1

Sum of Infinite Geometric Progression

The sum of an infinite G.P., with first term a and common ratio r is
a
S∞ = 1−r when −1 < r < 1

Convergent Series
If for an infinite geometric series |r| > 1, the series is said to be divergent

Harmonic Progression
A sequence of non-zero terms is said to be a harmonic progression if the sequence obtained by reciprocals
of its terms is an A.P.
1 1 1
General form of H.P. is a , a+d , a+2d , …
nth Term of H.P
1
nth term of H.P = term of the corresponding A.P
nth
1
or nth term of H.P =
a+(n−1)d
Key Points to Remember
1) No term of H.P. can be zero
2) There is no general formula for finding the sum of n terms of H.P
3) Reciprocals of terms of H.P are in A.P. and then properties of A.P can be used

Harmonic Mean
Single Harmonic Mean:
A number ‘H’ is said to be the single harmonic mean between two given numbers a and b if a, H, b are in
H.P
Let a and b be two given numbers and H be the H.M. between them, then
2ab
H=
a+b
n-harmonic Means:
The numbers H1 , H2 , H3 , … , Hn are said to be n harmonic means between two given numbers a and b if
a, H1 , H2 , H3 , … , Hn are in H.P.

Note:
(n + 1)ab
Hn =
na + b

MUHAMMAD ALI 59
 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014

Relation between A.M., G.M., and H.M

Let A, G and H be arithmetic, geometric and harmonic means between two numbers a and b. Then
1) G2 = AH
2) A ≥ G ≥ H
3) If two quantities are equal, i.e.
a=b
then A = G = H

Sigma Notation: (Some Special Sequences)

Notation Σ stands for the sum of like terms of a series
1. The sum of first n natural numbers
n(n+1)
Σn = 1 + 2 + 3 + ⋯ + n =
2

2. The sum of sequence of first n natural numbers

Σn2 = 12 + 22 + 32 + ⋯ + n2
n(n+1)(2n+1)
= 6

3. The sum of cubes of first n natural numbers

n(n+1) 2
Σn3 = 13 + 23 + 33 + ⋯ + n3 = ( 2
)

Arithmetic-Geometric Sequence (A.G.S)

A sequence is said to be an arithmetico geometric sequence if its each term is the product of the
corresponding term of an A.P. and a G.P
In other words, if a1 , a2 , a3 , … is an A.P. and b1 , b2 , b3 , … is an arithmetico-geometric sequence

MUHAMMAD ALI 60
 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014

MCQs
1. If the sum of the series 2, 5, 8, 11, ….. is 60100, then n is
a) 100 b) 200 c) 500 d) 150

2. The H.M. of two numbers is 4 and their A.M. ‘A’ and G.M. ‘G’ satisfy the relation
2A + G2 = 27 , the numbers are:
a) (6, 3) b) (5, 4) c) (5, -25) d) (-3, 1)
1 1 1
3. The sum of the series 2 + 3 + 6 + ⋯ to 9 terms is
a) -5/6 b) -1/2 c) 3/10 d) -3/2

H H
4. If H is the harmonic mean between P and Q, then the value of P
+ Q is
PQ P+Q
a) 2 b) P+Q c) PQ
d) none of these

5. ∑𝑛𝑚=1 m2 is equal to
m(m+1) m(m+1)(2m+1) n(n+1)(2n+1) n(n+1)
a) 2
b) 6
c) 6
d) 2

1 1 1
6. If p+q , r+p , q+r are in A.P., then
1 1 1
a) p, q, r will be in A.P b) p2 , q2 , r 2 will be in A.P c) , , will be in A.P. d)
p q r
none of these

7. If A.M. and H.M. of two numbers be 9 and 36, then their G.M, will be equal to
a) 18 b) 12 c) 16 d) none of these

8. The third term of a G.P. is 4. The product of the first five terms is
a) 43 b) 45 c) 44 d) none of these

9. The number of terms of the series 54, 51, 48, …., so that their sum is 513
a) 18, 19 b) 16, 22 c) 25, 36 d) none of these

10. The sum of 40 terms of an A.P. whose first term is 2 and common difference 4, will be
a) 3200 b) 1600 c) 200 d) 2800

11. If a, b, c, d, e, f are in A.P., then e − c is equal to

a) 2(c − a) b) 2(d − c) c) 2(f − d) d) d − b

12. If x + 9, x − 6, 4 are in G.P. then the value of x is

a) 8 b) 12 c) 16 d) 20

13. If x, 2x + 2, 3x + 3 are in G.P., then the fifth term is

a) −81/4 b) 80 c) 16 d) 5

14. In an A.P. of 81 terms and the 41th term is 10. Then the sum of the series is
10×41
a) 10 × 41 b) 2 c) 10 × 81 d) 41 × 81

MUHAMMAD ALI 61
 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014

15. The number of odd numbers between 60 and 360 is

a) 148 b) 150 c) 153 d) none of these
1 2
16. The number of terms in the series 20, 19 3 , 18 3 , … …. of which the sum is 300, is
a) 25 b) 36 c) 31 d) none of these

17. If four members in A.P. are such that their sum is 20 and sum of their square is 120, then the
numbers are
a) 1, 4, 7, 10 b) 3, 5, 7, 9 c) 2, 4, 6, 8 d) none of these

18. If the A.M. between two numbers is 34 and their G.M. is 16, then the two numbers are
a) 64 and 8 b) 64 and 4 c) 8 and 4 d) none of these
1
19. If an = 2𝑛 then first four terms are
1 1 1 1 1 1 1
a) , , , b) 2, 4, 6, 8, 16 c) 1, 2, 4, 8 d) 1, , ,
2 4 8 16 2 4 8

20. −2, 1, 4, 7, … .. is
a) Harmonic sequence b) arithmetic sequence c) geometric sequence d)
arithmetic series

21. Arithmetic mean between 3√5 and 5√5 is

a) 8√5 b) 2√5 c) √5 d) 4√5

22. Write the first four terms of the arithmetic sequence if a1 = 5 and other three consecutive terms
are 23, 26, 29
a) 23, 26, 29, 32 b) 5, 8, 11, 14 c) 8, 11, 14, 17 d) none of these

23. 3, 6, 12, ……… is

a) A.P. b) G.P. c) H.P. d) none of these

24. Find the geometric mean between −2𝑖 and 8i

a) ±4i b) ±4 c) ±8 d) none of these

25. The common ratio of the geometric sequence cannot be

a) 0 b) 1 c) 2 d) 3

26. The first, second and last terms of an A.P. are 4, 7 and 31 respectively. Then
a) The third term is 15 b) the number of terms is 10 c) the sum of the terms is 155
d) none

27. No term of the harmonic sequence

a) 0 b) 1 c) 2 d) 3

a+b b+c
28. If 2 , b, 2
are in H.P. then a, b, c are in
a) A.P. b) G.P. c) H.P. d) none of these

MUHAMMAD ALI 62
 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014
1 1
29. The sum of the infinite sequence 7, −1, , − , ….
7 49
49 49 49
a) 8
b) 6
c) 5
d) none of these

30. The 6th term of the arithmetic sequence whose 1st term is 3 and common difference is zero is
a) 18 b) 16 c) 3 d) 0

31. The fifth term of the sequence an = 2n + 3 is

a) 13 b) – 13 c) 8 d) 3

32. The third term of the sequence an = (−1)n−1 (n − 7) is

a) 8 b) 4 c) – 4 d) – 8

33. A.M. between 1 − x + x 2 and 1 + x + x 2 is

a) 1 + x 2 b) 1 − x 2 c) 1 + x d) 1 − x

34. If Sn → a limits as n → 8 then the series is said to be

a) Divergent b) convergent c) both of above d) none of these
1 1 1
35. , , is called
2 7 12
a) A.P. b) G.P. c) H.P. d) none of these

36. The ratio of A.M. and G.M. of two numbers is 5:3. Then the numbers are in the ratio
a) 3: 5 b) 9:1 c) 9:3 d) none of these

37. If 5 is the harmonic mean between 2 and b then b =

a) 3 b) 8 c) 10 d) – 10

38. The harmonic mean between 3 and 7 is

21
a) 5 b) ±√21 c) d) none of these
5

2 3 4
39. The general term of the sequence 1 , 2 , 3 , … is
n+1 n n n−1
a) n
b) n+1 c) n−1 d) n

2
40. The H.M. between 3 and 3 is
11 12 11
a) 12
b) 11 c) 6
d) none of these

41. If A, G, H are A.M., G.M., and H.M. between two numbers and G>0 then
a) A < G < H b) A < G > H c) A > G > H d) A > G < H

42. The harmonic mean between two numbers a and b is

a+b 2ab 2ab
a) ±√𝑎𝑏 b) 2 c) a+b d) a−b

43. The arithmetic mean between 4 and 6 is

a) √24 b) −√24 c) 24/5 d) 5

MUHAMMAD ALI 63
 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014

44. If a is the first term and r < 1 is common ratio of G.P., then Sn =
a(1−rn ) a(1+rn ) a(1−rn )
a) 1−r
b) 1+r
c) ar n d) 1+r

45. An infinite geometric series is convergent if

a) |r| < 1 b) r > 1 c) r = 1 d) both b and c are correct

46. If a is the first term and r is the common ratio of G.P., then an =
a(1−rn ) a(1+rn )
a) ar n−1 b) ar n+1 c) d)
1−r 1+r

1 1 1
47. The 10th term of the progression 3 , 5 , 7 , …. Is
1 55
a) 21 b) 21 c) 3
d) none of these

48. If a is the first term and r is the common ratio such that r < 1, then S∞ =
1 a a(1−rn ) a(1+rn )
a) 1−r
b) 1+r c) 1−𝑟
d) 1+r

49. The harmonic mean between 9 and 11 is

99
a) 10 b) ±√99 c) −√99 d)
5

50. −1,1, −1, 1,…. Is

a) Arithmetic sequence b) geometric sequence c) alternating sequence d) harmonic
sequence

51. The geometric mean between 8/9, 9/8 is

8
a) +1 b) -1 c) ±1 d) 17

52. A sequence is a function whose domain is

a) The set of rational number b) the set of irrational number c) the set of integers d) the
set of natural no

53. Given a, b, c, d are in G.P., which of the sequence below in A.P?

1 1 a 1
a) a , b , c , d b) a2 , b2 , c 2 , d2 c) log 𝑒 𝑎 , log 𝑒 𝑏 , log 𝑒 𝑐 , log 𝑒 𝑑 d)
ea , eb , ec , ed

54. If a = 3, r = 2/3, then sum of infinite S∞ =

9 2 3
a) 9 b) c) d)
2 9 2

55. If k, 2k + 4, 7k + 18 are in G.P., then k is

a) 2 b) 3 c) 1 d) none of these

56. The two arithmetic means between 5 and 35 are

a) 15, 25 b) 10, 20 c) 10, 15 d) 10, 25

57. The general term of the sequence 3, 6, 9, 12, …….. is

a) 𝑛 b) 2n c) 3n d) n2

MUHAMMAD ALI 64
 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014
58. Which of the following is harmonic sequence?
1 1 1 1 1 1
a) 3, 5, 7, ….. b) 2 , 4 , 8 , …. C) 2 , 3 , 4 , …. D) 3, 9, 27, ….

59. If the second term of a G.P. is 2 and the sum to infinity is 8, then the first term is
a) 6 b) 1 c) 4 d) none of these
8 16
60. The sum of 4 + 3 + 9
+ ⋯. to ∞ is
11 8
a) 12 b) 4
c) 3 d) none of these

1 1
61. The sixth term of a H.P. is and the 10th term is . Then the first term of the H.P. is
61 105
1
a) 17
b) 1/6 c) 1/39 d) 1/28

62. The cube roots of unity are in

a) G.P. b) A.P. c) H.P. d) none of these

63. a, g, h are arithmetic mean, geometric and harmonic mean between two positive number x and y
respectively. Then identify the correct statement among the following
a) a is the arithmetic mean between g and h b) g is the geometric mean between a and h
c) No such relation exists between a, g and h d) h is the harmonic mean between a and g

64. The sum of first 13 terms of an A.P. of which 7th term is 40 is

a) 520 b) 502 c) 250 d) 255

65. The 4th term and 5th term of an A.P. are 0.2 and 0.25 respectively, then the 20th term is
19 1
a) b) 1 c) 0 d)
20 10

66. If the fifth term of an A.P. is 11 and the twenty-first term is 41, then the first term is
7 2
a) b) c) 3 d) none of these
2 7

67. Let two numbers have A.M. 9 and G.M. 4. Then these numbers are the roots of the equation
a) x 2 + 18x + 16 = 0 b) x 2 − 18x + 16 = 0 c) x 2 + 18x − 16 = 0 d) x 2 −
18x − 16 = 0

b−a b−a
68. If a, b and c are in G.P., then b−c + b+c is equal to
a) b2 − c 2 b) ac c) ab d) zero

69. If a, b and c are in A.P. as well as in G.P, then

a) a = b ≠ c b) a ≠ b = c c) a ≠ b ≠ c d) a = b = c

70. Four numbers are in arithmetic progression. The sum of first and last terms is 8 and the product of
both middle terms is 15. The least number of the series is
a) 4 b) 3 c) 2 d) 1
1 1
71. If the first three terms of a sequence , a, b, are in G.P. and the last three are in H.P., then the
16 6
values of ‘a’ and ‘b’ are
1 1 1
a) − 4 , 1 b) 12 , 9 c) a and b are both true d) none of these

MUHAMMAD ALI 65
 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014

1 3 7 15
72. The sum of first ‘n’ terms of the series 2 + 4 + 8 + 16 + ⋯ is
a) 2n − 1 b) 1 − 2−n c) 2−n − n + 1 d) 2−n + n − 1

ANSWERS
1. B 11. D 21. D 31. A 41. C 51. C 61. B
2. A 12. C 22. B 32. C 42. C 52. D 62. A
3. D 13. A 23. B 33. A 43. D 53. C 63. B
4. A 14. C 24. B 34. B 44. A 54. A 64. A
5. C 15. B 25. A 35. C 45. A 55. A 65. B
6. B 16. (A,B) 26. B 36. B 46. A 56. A 66. A
7. A 17. C 27. A 37. D 47. B 57. C 67. B
8. B 18. B 28. B 38. C 48. A 58. C 68. D
9. A 19. A 29. A 39. A 49. D 59. C 69. D
10. A 20. B 30. C 40. B 50. B 60. C 70. D
71. C
72. D

SOLUTIONS / HINTS
1. Hint: Here a1 = 2 and d = 3, Sn = 60,100, n =?
n
Use Sn = 2 [2a1 + (n − 1)d]
=> n = 200 b)

2. Hint: Find A.M. and G.M. and check the equation

2A + G2 = 27
OR Only option (a) represents the correct two numbers such that their H.M. is 4
OR Find numbers by using H.M. is equal to 4 and given equation a)

3. Solution:
The series is in A.P.
1 1 1 1
Here a1 = 2 , d = 3 − 2 = − 6 ; n = 9
n
Use Sum = [2a1 + (n − 1)d]
2
9 1 1 3
= 2 [2 (2) + 8 (− 6)] = − 2 d)

4. Solution: Given
2PQ
H = P+Q
H H H(P+Q)
Now P + Q = PQ
2PQ P+Q
= × (Put values of H)
P+Q PQ
=2 a)

7. Hint: Use the result G2 = AH a)

MUHAMMAD ALI 66
 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014

8. Solution: Given a1 r 2 = 4
Product of five terms
= (a1 )(a1 r)(a1 r 2 )(a1 r 3 )(a1 r 4 )
= a51 r10 = a51 (r 2 )5
4 5
= (a1 )5 (a )
1
= 45 b)

n
9. Hint: Use Sn = [2a1 + (n − 1)d]
2
Here a1 = 54; d = −3, Sn = 513
=> n = 18, 19 a)

x−6 4
12. Hint: Take = (x−6) solve for x
x+9
OR check the options c)

13. Hint: If x, 2x + 2, 3x + 3 are in G.P.

Then (2x + 2)2 = x(3x + 3) => x = −4
2x+2 3
Common ratio = x = 2
a 5 = a1 r 4
3 4 81
= (−4) ( ) = − a)
2 4

14. Hint: Given

a41 = a1 + 40d = 10
81
S81 = [2a1 + (81 − 1)d]
2
81
= [2a1 + 80d]
2
= 81[a1 + 40d]
= 81 × 10 c)

15. Hint: Let the number of odd number between 60 and 360 be ‘n’
Here a1 = 61; d = 2; an = 359
Use an = a1 + (n − 1)d
=> 359 = 61 + (n − 1)(2)
n = 150 b)

2
16. Hint: Here a1 = 20; d = − ; Sn = 300
3
n
Use Sn = 2 [2a1 + (n − 1)d]
=> n = 25 or 36 (a, b)

17. Hint: Check the options so that sum of numbers is 20 and sum of their square is 120 c)

MUHAMMAD ALI 67
 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014

18. Hint: Here, A.M. = 34, G.M. = 16

a+b
=> 2
= 34 √ab = 16
=> a + b = 68 ….(1) => ab = 256 ….(2)
Solve (1) and (2) to find a and b
OR check the options b)

2 1 2
28. Hint: Here a+b , b , b+c are in A.P.
1 2 2 1
=> b − a+b = b+c − b
=> b2 = ac b)

36. Solution: Option (b) satisfies the given ratio between A.H. and G.M. b)

2K+4 7K+18
55. Hint: Here =
K 2K+4
=> K = 2 a)

67. Solution:
Let a and b are the numbers
a+b
Given 2
= 9 => a + b = 18 …..(1)
Also √ab = 4 => ab = 16 ……(2)
=> x 2 − 18x + 16 = 0 b)

68. Solution: Given b2 = ac

b−a b+a 2b2 −2ac 2ac−2ac
b−c
+ b+c = b2 −c2
= b2 −c2
=0 d)

a+c
69. Hint: Given b = 2
and b2 = ac
a=b=c d)

70. Solution:
Suppose numbers are a − 3d, a − d, a + d, a + 3d
Given sum of first and last = 8
=> a − 4d + a + 3d = 8
=> 2a = 8
a=4
Product of middle terms = 15
(a − d)(a + d) = 15
d = +1
where d = −1; Numbers are 7, 5, 3, 1
when d = 1; Numbers are 1, 3, 5, 7
least number = 1 d)

MUHAMMAD ALI 68
 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014
71. Solution:
Given a7 = 8 and a8 = 7 in H.P
1 1
=> = 8; => =7
a1 +6d a1 +7d
1 1
=> a1 = 56 ; d = 56
1 1 56
=> a15 = a +14d = 1 1 = 15 c)
1 +14( )
56 56

72. Solution:
1 3 7 15
2
+ 4 + 8 + 16 + ⋯ n terms
1 1 1 1
= (1 − 2) + (1 − 4) + (1 − 8) + (1 − 16) + ⋯ n terms
1 1 1 1
= (1 + 1 + 1 + 1 … n terms) − [ + + + + ⋯ . n terms]
2 4 8 16
1 1
( )(1−( n ))
2 2
=n−[ 1 ]
1−
2

= 2−n + n − 1 d)

MUHAMMAD ALI 69
 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014

Chapter # 7
PERMUTATION, COMBINATION AND PROBABILITY

SYNOPSIS
Factorial
Let n be a positive integer then its factorial, denoted by n! is given as the product of the first n natural
numbers, that is
n! = n(n − 1)(n − 2) … 4.3.2.1
We read n! as ‘n factorial’

Key Results to Remember

1) 0! = 1
2) 1! = 1
3) m! = n! if and only if m = n
4) The factorial is defined only for whole numbers we don’t define the factorial of proper fraction
5) (a + b)! ≠ a!. b!
6) (ab)! ≠ a! . b!

Fundamental Principle of Counting

Multiplication Principle
If there are m ways of doing a work A and after doing this work by all these m methods another work B
be done in n ways, then both the works A and B can be done together in m × n ways

Addition Principle:
If there are m ways of doing a work A and another work B, which is independent of the first work, can be
done in n ways, then either of the two works can be performed in (m + n) ways

Note: The above two principles can be extended for any finite number of works

Permutation
If arrangement be done according to order then that arrangement is called permutation

The word arrangement is used if order of things is taken into account. Thus, if order of different things
changes, then their arrangement also changes

Definition
Let r and n be positive integers such that 1 ≤ r ≤ n. Then, the number of permutations of n different
things, taken r at a time, is denoted by the symbol nPr or P(n, r) and is given as
n!
nPr = (n−r)! where 0 ≤ r ≤ n

Key Results on Permutation

1) Number of permutations of n different things taken all at a time is nPr = n!
2) The number of permutations of n things, taken all at a time, out of which p are alike are of one
n!
type, q are alike and are of second type and rest are all different is p!.q!
3) The number of permutations of n different things taken r at a time when each thing may be
repeated any number of times is nr

MUHAMMAD ALI 70
 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014

Permutation under Restriction

1. Number of permutations of n different things, taken r at a time, when a particular thing is to be
always included in each arrangement, is
r.n−1 Pr−1

2. Number of permutations of n different things, taken r at a time, when a particular thing is never
taken in each arrangement, is
(n − 1)Pr

Circular Permutation
Definition
The permutation of things which can be represented by the points on a circle are called Circular
Permutation

Key Points to Remember

a) Number of circular arrangements (permutations) of n different things is (n − 1)!
b) Number of circular arrangement (permutations) of n different things when clockwise and
anticlockwise arrangement are not different, i.e., when observation can be made from both sides
1
is 2 (n − 1)!

Combination
Each of the different groups or selections which can be made by taking some or all of a number of things
(irrespective of order) is called a combination

Note: Combination of things means selection of things. Obviously, in selection of things order of things
has no importance. Thus, with the change of order of things selection of things does not change

Definition:
The number of combination of n different things taken r at a time is denoted by nCr or C(n , r)
Thus,
n!
nCr = r!.(n−r)! where 0 ≤ r ≤ n
nPr
or nCr = where 0 ≤ r ≤ n
r!

Note: If r > n, then nCr = 0

Key Results on Combination

1. nCr = nC(n − r)
2. nC0 = nCn = 1, nC1 = n
3. nCr + nC(r − 1) = (n + 1)Cr
4. The number of combination of n different things taken r at a time
a) When p particular things are always included =n−p Cr−p
b) When p particular things are never included =n−p Cr

Key Results to Remember

1. If n distinct points are given in the plane such that no three of which are collinear, then the
number of line segment formed =n C2
2. The number of diagonals in an n-sided closed polygon =n C2 − n

MUHAMMAD ALI 71
 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014
3. If n distinct points are given in the plane such that no three of which are collinear, then the
number of triangles formed =n C3
4. If n distinct points are given on the circumference of a circle, then
a) Number of straight lines =n C2
b) Number of triangles =n C3
c) Number of quadrilaterals =n C4 and so on

Note:
In most of the cases, given problems cannot be determined whether it belongs to permutation or
combination. On the bases of few words or on the assumption in expressing of language given in the
problem, we can identify that problem

Permutation
• Arrangements
• Standing or sitting in a row or in a circle
• Formation of words, number etc

Combination
• Selection, choice, draw etc
• Distribution, formation of a group, committee, team etc
• Problems regarding geometry

Probability
The probability when defined in simplest way is the chance of occurring of a certain event when
expressed quantitatively i.e., probability is a quantitative measurement of the certainty

The following remarks may be important for learning the concept of probability

Die
A die is a small cube used in games of chances.

Plural of die is dice. The outcomes of throwing (or tossing) a die is the number of dots on its uppermost
face. An ace on a die means one dot.

Cards
A pack (or deck) of playing cards has 52 cards, divided into four suits
i) Spades ii) Clubs iii) Hearts iv) Diamonds

10, an Ace, a King; Queen and a Jack. Spades and Clubs are black-faced cards while Hearts and
Diamonds are red-faced cards
The Aces, Kings, Queens and Jacks are called face cards and other cards are called number cards
The Kings, Queens and Jacks are called court cards

Sample Space
The set of all possible outcomes of an experiment is called a sample space. We generally denote it by S

Event
A particular outcome is called an event and usually denoted by E. An event E is a subset of the sample
space S

MUHAMMAD ALI 72
 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014

Equally Likely Events

Events are said to be equally likely if there is no reason to expect any one in preferences to other. Thus,
equally likely events mean outcome is as likely to occurs as any other outcome

Mutually Exclusive Event

Two events are said to be mutually exclusive if occurrence of one precludes or rules out the happening of
other

Independent Events
Two events A and B are said to be independent if the occurrence (or non-occurrence) of one does not
affect the probability of the occurrence (and hence non-occurrence) of the other

Probability of an Event
The probability of an event is defined in the following two ways
1) Mathematical (or a prior) definition
2) Statistical (or empirical) definition

Mathematical Definition of Probability

Probability of an event E, denoted as P(E), is defined as
Number of cases favorable to E
P(E) =
Number of possible outcomes
If S be the sample space and E be an event, then probability of E denoted by P(E) is defined as P(E) =
n(E)
n(S)
, where n(E) is the number of elements of event E and n(S) is the number of elements of samples
space S and outcomes are equally likely.
Key Points to Remember
1. The probability of occurrence of an event is always non-negative and less than 1, i.e.
0 ≤ P(E) ≤ 1

2. The probability of occurrence of an impossible event ϕ is 0, i.e., P(ϕ) = 0

3. The probability of occurrence of a sure event is 1, i.e., P(S) = 1

Probability that an Event does not Occur

The non-occurrence of the event E is denoted as ̅ ̅) = 1 − P(E)
E and is defined as P(E

Disjoint Event
Two events A and B are said to be disjoint events if and only if A ∩ B = ϕ

Addition of Probabilities
Case 1: When A and B are disjoint events
P(A ∪ B) = P(A) + P(B)

Case 2: When A and B are overlapping or B ⊆ A

P(A ∪ B) = P(A) + P(B) − P(A ∩ B)

Multiplication of Probabilities
If A and B are two independent events, the probability that both of them occur is equal to the probability
of the occurrence of A multiplied by the probability of the occurrence of B. Symbolically, it is denoted as
P(A ∩ B) = P(A). P(B)

MUHAMMAD ALI 73
 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014
Note:
The above result holds well even if the sample spaces of A and B are the same
Similarly, if A1 , A2 , A3 , … . , An are independent events then
P(A1 ∩ A2 ∩ A3 ∩ … .∩ An )
= P(A1 ). P(A2 ). P(A3 ) … … P(An )

MUHAMMAD ALI 74
 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014

MCQs

1. The value n n−1 Pr−1 is

a) nPr b) n+1 Pr+1 c) n−1
Pr−1 d) n−1
Pr

2. If n P4 =12. n P2 , then the value of n is

a) 0 b) – 1 c) 6 d) 7

3. If n P3 = 13. n P2 then n is equal to

a) 120 b) 18 c) 15 d) 20

4. If 20 Cr + 20
C18 = 21 C18 then r is equal to
a) 17 b)18 c) 19 d) 20
10
5. C5 + 10 C4 is equal to
a) 10 C6 b) 11 C8 c) 11
C5 d) 11
C4

6. The value of n Cr−1 + n Cr is equal to

a) n Cr+1 b) n+1 Cr c) n+1
Cr+1 d) n−1
Cr−1

7. If n C3 = 56, then n P3 equals

a) 168 b) 224 c) 280 d) 336

8. If n C2 = n C3, then the value of n C4 is

a) 2 b) 3 c) 4 d) 5

9. If n C5 = n C11 , then the value of 18 Cn is

a) 1 b) 18 c) 153 d) 305

10. The number of ways in which a man can post 8 different letters in 4 letters-boxes is
a) 48 b) 84 c) 8 × 4 d) 8 P4

11. The number of different four digits numbers that can be formed with the digits 2, 3, 4, 5, 7 using
each digit only once is
a) 120 b) 96 c) 24 d) none of these

12. Two passengers get into a railway compartment in which there are six vacant seats. The total
number of different ways in which they can seat themselves is
a) 11 b) 12 c) 15 d) 30

13. The total number of 5 digits telephone numbers that can be composed with distinct digits, is
a) 10 P2 b) 10 P5 c) 10 C5 d) none of these

14. In a football championship, there were played 153 matches. Every two team played one match
with each other. The number of teams participating in the championship is
a) 9 b) 11 c) 13 d) 18

MUHAMMAD ALI 75
 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014

15. The number of diagonals of a polygon of 20 sides is

a) 25 b) 150 c) 170 d) 210

16. Twenty eight matches were played in a football tournament. Each team met its opponent only
once. The number of teams that took part in the tournament is
a) 7 b) 8 c) 14 d) none of these

17. Total number of numbers greater than 1000 but less than 4000 that can be formed by using the
digits 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 when repetition is allowed is
a) 125 b) 105 c) 375 d) 625

18. How many ways are there to arrange the letters the word GARDEN with the vowels in the
alphabetical order?
a) 120 b) 240 c) 360 d) 480

19. If there are 12 persons in a party and if each of them shakes hands with each other, then number
of handshakes happen in the party is
a) 66 b) 48 c) 72 d) none of these

20. The number of ways in which 7 people can be arranged in a round table so that 2 particular
persons may be together is
a) 132 b) 148 c) 240 d) none of these

21. The number of diagonals that can be drawn by forming the vertices of an octagon is
a) 28 b) 48 c) 20 d) none of these

22. From 3 mangoes, 4 apples and 2 oranges. The number of selection of fruits that can be made,
taking at least one of each kind is
a) 24 b) 36 c) 42 d) none of these

23. The maximum number of points of intersection of 8 straight lines is

a) 56 b) 28 c) 16 d) 8

24. In a cricket championship there are 36 matches. The number of teams, if each plays one match
with other are
a) 9 b) 10 c) 8 d) none of these

25. There are 5 roads leading to a town from a village. The number of different ways in which a
villagers can go to the town and return back, is
a) 25 b) 20 c) 10 d) 5

26. What is the probability of drawing a “king” from a well-shuffled deck of 52 cards?
1 1 2 2
a) 26 b) 13 c) 52 d) 13

27. For a positive integers n

a) n! = n(n + 1) b) n! = n(n + 1)! c) n! = n(n − 1) d) n! (n − 1)!

28. n different objects can be arranged taken all at a time in

a) (n + 1)! Ways b) (n − 1)! Ways c) n! ways d) n ways

MUHAMMAD ALI 76
 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014

29. The letters of the word TREASON are arranged in a row in all possible ways. How many of them
begin with T and ends with N?
a) 60 b) 120 c) 240 d) 720

30. How many triangles can be formed by joining 12 points in a plane, or which 4 are collinear?
a) 621 b) 612 c) 216 d) 261
n−1
31. Cr + n−1 Cr−1 =
a) n Cr−1 b) n+1
Cr c) n−1
Cr d) n Cr

32. How many diagonals can be drawn in a polygon of n sides?

n(n−1) n(n+1) n(n−3) n(n+3)
a) 2
b) 2
c) 2
d) 2

33. A dice is rolled. The probability that the dots on the top are greater than 4 is
1 1 1
a) 6 b) 3 c) 2 d) 1

34. If n is negative integer then n! is

a) 1 b) 0 c) unique d) not defined
1
35. (n+2)(n+1)n
=
(n−1)! (n+2)!
a) n! b) (n + 2)! C) (n+2)! d) (n−1)!

36. The number of ways the letter of the word MISSISSIPPI be arranged so that 4S’s are not together
is
a) 33810 b) 44810 c) 54130 d) 28850

37. If 2n P3 = 2. n P4 , then n =
a) 4 b) 6 c) 8 d) 10

38. The number of words which can be formed out of the word ‘ASSASSINATION’, when all the
letters are used in each word are
13 4! 13!
a) ( ) b) 13! C) 13! d) 4!
4,3,2,2,1,1

39. The number of diagonals in ten sided figure is

a) 10 b) 10 C2 c) 10 C2 − 10 d) 45

40. The number of ways a hockey team of eleven can be selected out of 15 players if it includes a
particular player
a) 15 C11 b) 14 C11 c) 14 C10 d) 15 C10

41. The number of possible permutations of the letters of the word, “ADDING” having two D’s
together
a) 5! b) 3! c) 4! D) 25

42. For any event A:

a) 0 ≤ P(A) ≤ 1 b) −1 ≤ P(A) ≤ 1 c) −2 ≤ P(A) ≤ 2 d) 0 ≤ P(A) ≤ 2

MUHAMMAD ALI 77
 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014

43. The number of words that can be formed from the letters of the word, ‘PAKPATTAN’ are
9!
a) 9! b) 9 C7 c) 9 P7 d) 3!2!2!

44. The number of words that can be formed from the letters of the word, “COMMITTEE” are
9!
a) 9 P9 b) 9 C9 c) 2!2!2! d) 9

45. The events A and B are said to be disjoint if A ∩ B is

a) Φ b) A c) B d) A ∪ B

46. A dice is thrown then the probability to get an even number is

a) 4/5 b) 3/5 c) 2/3 d) ½

47. A slip is picked out of 8 slips numbered from 1 to 8 then the probability to get number 4 is
a) 8 b) 1/8 cc) ½ d) 3/8

48. How many even numbers can be formed by using all the digits 2, 3, 4, 5, 6?
a) 120 b) 72 c) 48 d) 24

49. There are three copies of 4 different books. In how many ways can they be arranged on a shelf?
12
a) 3+4 b) 369,600 c) 369,000 d) 12

50. A and B are mutually exclusive events the P(A ∪ B) =

a) P(A) ∪ P(B) b) P(A) + P(B) c) P(A) + P(B) − P(A ∩ B) d) P(A) − P(B)

51. The number of arrangement of the letters of the word BANANA in which two Ns do not appear
adjacently is
a) 40 b) 60 c) 80 d) 100

52. The number of ways in which 6 different beads can be string into a necklace is
a) 60 b) 48 c) 72 d) none of these

53. Seven women and seven men are to sit around a circular table such that there is a man on either
side of every women, the number of seating arrangement are
a) (7!)2 b) (6!)2 c) 6! × 7! d) 7!

54. The number of lines drawn through 6 points lying on a circle is

a) 12 b) 15 c) 24 d) 30

55. There are 10 true-false questions. The number of ways, in which they can be answered is
a) 102 b) 210 c) 10 d) 30

56. How many committee of 5 members can be formed from 6 gentlemen and 4 ladies?
a) 252 b) 120 c) 210 d) 10 P5

57. If n P4 = n
P5 = 1: 2, then n is equal to
a) 6 b) 5 c) 4 d) 2

MUHAMMAD ALI 78
 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014

58. The number of words which can be formed by using all letters of the word MISSISIPI is
a) 2520 b) 1520 c) 6705 d) 5067
59. The probability of getting the sum as a prime number when two dice are thrown together, is
1 7 5
a) 2 b) 12 c) 12 d) none of these

11(𝑛−1) n+2
60. If n+5 Pn+1 = 2
. Pn , then the value of ‘n’ is
a) 2 or 6 b) 2 or 11 c) 7 or 11 d) 6 or 11

61. If n P4 = 24 n C5 then the value of n =

a) 5 b) 9 c) 15 d) 10
15 15
62. If C3r = Cr+3, then r =
1 3
a) 3
b) 2 c) 2 d) 3

63. If out of p + q + r things ‘p’ are alike, ‘q’ are alike, then the number of arrangement equals
a) (p + q + r)!/p! q! b) (p + 1)(q + r)r − 1 c) 2p+q + 2r − 1 d)
(p + q + 1)(r + 1) − 1

64. If 8 Cr − 7 C3 = 7 C2, then the values of ‘r’ is

a) 2 or 6 b) 3 or 5 c) 3 or 4 d) 4 or 5

65. All the letters of the word EMACET are arranged in all possible ways. The number of such
arrangement in which no two vowels are adjacent to each other is
a) 360 b) 144 c) 72 d) 54

66. 12 persons are to be arranged on a round table. If two particular persons among them are not to sit
side by side. The number of arrangement is
a) 9(10!) B) 2(10!) C) 45(8!) D) 10!

67. A box contains 2 white balls, 3 black balls and 4 red balls. The number of ways in which three
balls can be drawn from the box so that at least one of the balls is back is
a) 74 b) 84 c) 64 d) 20

68. Eight chairs are numbered 1 to 8. Two women and three men wish to occupy one chain each.
First the women choose the chairs from amongst the chairs marked 1 to 4 and then the men select
the chairs from amongst the remaining. the number of possible arrangement is
a) 4 C3 ×4 C2 b) 4 C2 × 4 C3 c) 4 P2 × 4 P2 d) none of these

MUHAMMAD ALI 79
 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014

ANSWERS
1. A 11. D 21. C 31. D 41. A 51. A 61. B
2. C 12. D 22. A 32. C 42. A 52. A 62. B
3. C 13. B 23. B 33. B 43. D 53. C 63. A
4. A 14. D 24. A 34. D 44. C 54. B 64. B
5. C 15. C 25. A 35. C 45. A 55. B 65. C
6. B 16. B 26. B 36. A 46. D 56. A 66. A
7. D 17. C 27. D 37. C 47. B 57. A 67. C
8. D 18. C 28. C 38. A 48. B 58. A 68. D
9. C 19. A 29. B 39. C 49. B 59. C
10. A 20. C 30. C 40. C 50. B 60. D

SOLUTIONS / HINTS
10. Solution:
The required number of ways
= 4 × 4 × 4 × …. To 8 factors
= 48 a)

11. Solution:
The four places can be filled by any one of the 5 digits in 5 P4 ways
That is 5 P4 = 120 a)

12. Solution:
The required number of ways
6
P2 = 30 d)

13. Solution:
A telephone number can be started with zero
Required number = 10 P5 b)

14. Solution:
Let number of teams = n
Then n C2 = 153
=> n = 18 d)

16. Solution:
Here
n
C2 = 28
=> n = 8 b)

17. Solution:
Total number of digits = 3 × 5 × 5 × 5
= 375 c)

18. Solution:
The letters are G, A, R, D, E, N
Vowels = A, E; Consonants = G, R, D, N

MUHAMMAD ALI 80
 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014
Total number of arrangements = 6! = 720
There are two vowels. In half of the words, A is before E and in the other half words, E is before
A, (i.e., EA or AE)
720
Required number of words = 2 = 360 c)

19. Solution:
Here 12 C2 = n => n = 66 a)

20. Solution:
Required number of ways = 5! × 2!
= 120 × 2
= 240 c)

22. Solution: No. of selection = 3 × 4 × 2 = 24 a)

23. Solution:
Max. Points of intersection = 8 C2 = 28 b)

24. Hint: Here n C2 = 36

=> n(n − 1) = 72
=> n = 9 a)

25. Solution:
No. of ways to go to a town = 5
No. of ways to return back = 5
Total number of ways in which villagers can go to town and return back = 5 × 5 = 25 a)

29. Solution:
No. of permutations = 5!
= 120 b)

36. Solution:
No. of permutation when there is no restriction
11!
= (4!)(4!)(2!) = 34650
No. of permutations when S are together
8!
= (4!)(2!) = 840
No. of permutations when S are ‘not’ together
= 34650 − 840 = 33810 a)

40. Solution:
14
No. of ways = C10 c)

41. Solution:
Take “DD” as a single object
No. of permutation = 5!

MUHAMMAD ALI 81
 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014

44. Solution:
Total letters = 9. Here E, T and M comes 2 times
=> No. permutations = 9!/(2!)(2!)(2!) c)

47. Solution:
No. of permutations without any restriction = 120. Req. number will not be an even number if 3
or 5 is the last number
∴ Total even numbers = 120 – 24 – 24
= 72 b)

51. Solution:
6! 5!
No. of arrangements = 3!2! − 3!
= 60 − 20 = 40 a)

54. Solution:
No. of lines = 6 C2 = 15 b)

55. Solution:
Here each questions can be answered in two ways, either True or False
∴ Req. No. ways = 2 × 2 × 2 × 2 × 2 × 2 × 2 × 2 × 2 × 2
= 210 b)

59. Solution
Total outcomes = 36
Favorable outcomes in which sum is prime are
(1,1), (1, 2), (1, 4), (1, 6), (2, 1), (2, 3), (2, 5), (3, 2), (3, 4), (4, 1), (4, 3), (5, 2), (6, 6), (6, 1), (6, 5)
Favorable outcomes = 15
15 5
Required probability = 36 = 12 c)

60. Solution:
n+5 11(n−1) n+3
Given Pn+1 = 2
Pn
(n+5)! 11(n−1) (n+3)!
=> (n+5−n−1)! = 2
. (n+3−n)!
=> n2 − 13n + 42 = 0
=> n = 6; 7 d)

64. Solution:
Given 8 Cr − 7 C3 = 7 C2
=> 8 Cr = 7 C2 + 7 C3
=> 8 Cr = 8 C3
=> r = 3 or r + 3 = 8
=> r = 3 or r = 5 b)

MUHAMMAD ALI 82
 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014
65. Solution:
Vowels = E, A, E; Consonants = M, C, T
Number of ways arranging Consonants = 3! = 6
1
Number of ways arranging vowels = 4 P3 1 × 2 = 12
(E is replaced twice)
Req. arrangements = 12 × 6
= 72 c)

66. Solution:
No. of arrangements without any condition = (12 – 1) = 11!
In case of condition => (11 − 1)! × 2! = 10! × 2!
∴ if two persons are not together
=> 11! − 10! × 2!
=> 11 × 10! − 10! × 2!
=> 10! (11 − 2)
=> 9 × 10! A)

67. Solution:
No. of ways of choosing 3 balls
= 9 C3 = 84
No. of ways of choosing 3 balls with no black balls
= 6 C3 × 3 C0 = 20
∴ No. of ways of choosing 3 balls with at least one black ball
= 84 − 20 = 64 c)

68. Solution:
No. of arrangements = 4 P2 × 6 P3 d)

MUHAMMAD ALI 83
 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014

Chapter # 8
MATHEMATICAL INDUCTION AND
BINOMIAL THEOREM

SYNOPSIS
Principle of Mathematical Induction
The principle of mathematical induction is stated as follows

A statement or proposition S(n) is said to be true for all positive integers n, if and only if the following
conditions are satisfied
1) S(n) is true for n = 1
2) Suppose the statement S(n) is true for n = k
3) If the statement is true for n = k, it is also true for n = k + 1

Key Results to Remember

1) Sum of the first n odd positive integers equals n2
2) There is no integer n for which 3n is even

Binomial Expression
An algebraic expression consisting of only two terms is called a binomial expression. For examples,
expression such as
4
x + a, 4x + 3y, 2x −
y
are all binomial expressions

Binomial Theorem
This theorem gives a formula by which any power of a binomial expression can be expanded. It was first
given by Sir Isaac Newton.

Binomial Theorem for Positive Integer Index

If a and b are real numbers, then for all n ∈ N,
(a + b)n = n C0 ab0 + n C1 an−1 b1 + n C2 an−2 b2 + ⋯ + n Cn−1 a1 bn−1 + n Cn a0 bn
Or
n n n n n
(a + b)n = ( ) an b0 + ( ) an−1 b1 + ( ) an−2 b2 + ⋯ + ( ) a1 bn−1 + ( ) a0 bn
0 1 2 n−1 n

Key Points to Remember

n n n n
1) ( ) , ( ) , ( ) , … . ( ) are called binomial coefficients
0 1 2 𝑛
2) The positive integers n is called the index of the binomial
3) Number of terms in the expansion of (a + b)n is n + 1 i.e., one more than the index n
4) In the expansion of (a + b)n , the power of a goes on decreasing by 1 and that of b goes on
increasing by 1 so that the sum of powers of a and b in any term is n
5) The binomial coefficients of the terms equidistant from the beginning and the end are equal
6) Students are advised to remember the following values
n n n n n(n − 1)
( ) = ( ) = 1, ( ) = n, ( ) =
0 n 1 2 2!
7) n Cr = n Cn−r for 1 ≤ r ≤ n

MUHAMMAD ALI 84
 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014

General Term in the Expansion of (𝐚 + 𝐛)𝐧

In the binomial expansion of (a + b)n , the (r + 1)th term from the beginning is usually called the general
term and it is denoted by Tr+1 , i.e.,
Tr+1 = n Cr an−1 br

Middle Term in the Binomial Expansion

The middle term in the binomial expansion of (a + b)n depends upon the value of n
n
1) If n is even, then there is only one middle term i.e., (2 + 1)th term
n+1 n+3
2) If n is odd, then there are two middle terms i.e., ( 2
)th and ( 2
)th terms

Binomial Theorem When the Index is a Negative Integer or a Fraction

When n is a negative integer or a fraction, then
n(n−1) 2 n(n−1)(n−2) 3
(1 + x)n = 1 + nx + x + x +⋯
2! 3!
Provided |x| < 1

Key Points to Remember

1) The sum of coefficients in the binomial expansion equals to 2n i.e.
n n n n n
( )+ ( ) + ( )+ ⋯+( ) + ( ) = 2n
0 1 2 n−1 n

2) Sum of odd coefficients of a binomial expansion equals to the sum of its even coefficients, and is
equal to 2n−1 i.e.,
n n n n n n
( ) + ( ) + ⋯+ ( ) = ( ) + ( ) + ⋯+ ( ) = 2n−1
0 2 n 1 3 n−1

MUHAMMAD ALI 85
 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014

MCQs
1. The sum of the binomial coefficients in the expansion of (1 + x)7 is
a) 256 b) 64 c) 128 d) 0

2. In the expansion of (3x + 2)4 , the coefficient of middle terms is

a) 36 b) 216 c) 54 d) 81

1 9
3. The term independent of x in (x 2 − x) is
a) 1 b) 49 c) – 1 d) none of these

4. If n is any positive integer then n2 > n + 3 for

a) n ≥ 2 b) n ≥ 3 c) n ≤ 2 d) none of these

5. The sum of the odd coefficients in the (a + x)4 is

a) 14 b) 12 c) 8 d) 4

6. If n is any positive integer then 3 + 6 + 9 + ⋯ + 3n =

3n(n+1) 2n(n+1) n2 (n+1)2
a) 2
b) 3
c) 4
d) 3n(n + 1)

7. The expansion of (1 + 2x)−2 is valid if

1
a) |x| < b) |x| < 1 c) |x| < 2 d) |x| < 3
2

n n n n
8. ( ) , ( ) , ( ) , … . , ( ) are called
0 1 2 n
a) Trinomial coefficients b) binomial coefficients c) monomial coefficients d) none
of these

9. The coefficient of the equidistant from beginning and end of the binomial expansion are
a) Equal b) unique c) zero d) none of these

10. The sum of the expansion of a and x in every term of the expansion of (a + x)n is
a) n + r b) r c) n d) none of these

11. When n is a negative integer then

n n n n
( ) , ( ) , ( ) , … . , ( ) are
0 1 2 n
a) negative b) positive c) zero d) meaningless

12. The exponential of (1 − 3x)−1 is valid if

1
a) |x| < 1 b) |x| < 3 c) |x| < 3 d) all of the above

13. The sum of the coefficients in the expansion (a + x)5 is

a) 32 b) 16 c) 8 d) 4

MUHAMMAD ALI 86
 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014

14. If n is any positive integers then n! > n2 for

a) n > 4 b) n ≥ 4 c) 8 d) 4

15. 1 + 2 + 3 + ⋯ + n =
n2 (n+1)2 n(n+1) n(n+1)(2n+1) n2
a) 4
b) 2
c) 6
d) 2

16. 13 + 23 + 33 + ⋯ + n3 =
n2 n(n+1)(2n+1) n(n+1) n2 (n+1)2
a) 2
b) 6
c) 2
d) 4

17. If x is so small that its square and higher powers be neglected then (1 + 3x)−2 =
a) 1 + 9x b) 1 − 9x c) 1 + 6x d) 1 − 6x

18. Number of terms in the expansion of (a + x)n is

a) n − 1 b) n + 1 c) n + 2 d) n + 3
n
19. C2 = exists when n is ……..
a) n > 2 b) n ≤ 2 c) n < 2 d) n ≥ 2

20. the expansion of (1 + x)−3 holds when

a) |x| > 1 b) |x| < 1 c) |x| > 0 d) x < 1

21. The middle term of the expansion (1 + 2x)6 is_______

a) 1st term b) 4th term c) 2nd term d) 3rd term

2 1 9
22. Which term of (3 x 2 − 3x) is independent of x?
a) Sixth b) seventh c) eighth d) ninth

23. In the binomial expansion (1 + x)n with n ∈ Z+ and the sum of odd coefficients is 64, then n = ?
a) 5 b) 6 c) 7 d) 8

24. If n is odd expansion (a + x)n has __________ middle terms

a) 2 b) 3 c) 4 d) 5

25. The general term of expansion (a + x)n is

n n
a) an−r b) ( ) c) ( ) an−r x r d) none of these
r r

26. If the 21st and 22nd terms in the expansion of (1 − x)44 are equal, then x =
8 7 7 8
a) b) − c) d) −
7 8 8 7

27. The sum of the coefficients in the expansion of (6a − 5b)n , where n is a positive integer, is
a) 1 b) -1 c) 2n d) 2n−1

1 10
28. In the expansion of (3x − x2 ) , the 5th term from the end is
16486 17010 13486
a) 𝑥8
b) 𝑥8
c) 𝑥8
d) none of these

MUHAMMAD ALI 87
 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014

1 18
29. The 13th term of (9x − 3 𝑥) is
√
a) 17682 b) 18564 c) 18564x 6 d) none of these

30. The fourteenth term of (3 − a)15 is equal to

a) 15 C14 3(−a)14 b) 15 C13 32 (−a)13
15 14
b) C14 3 (−a) d) 15 C13 ( − a)3 312

1 10
31. The middle term in the expansion of (x + x) is
10 1 10 10 10
a) C6 . x b) C5 c) C6 d) C7 x 4

15
32. C1 + 15 C3 + 15
C5 + ⋯ + 15 C15 is
a) 15 16 b) 15.28 c) 214 d) 215

1 9
33. The term independent of x in the expansion of (x 2 − ) is equal to
3x
28 28 28 28
a) b) c) − d) −
81 243 243 81

34. For all integers values of ‘n’ such that 5n − 2n is divisible by

a) 2 b) 3 c) 4 d) 5

35. In the expansion of (1 + x)50 , the sum of the coefficient of odd power of x is
a) 0 b) 249 c) 250 d) 251

36. The coefficient of x 5 in (1 + 2x + 3x 2 + ⋯ )−3/2 is

a) 21 b) 25 c) 26 d) none of these

x 2 10
37. If the rth term in the expansion of (3 − x2 ) contains x 4 , then r is equal to
a) 2 b) 3 c) 4 d) 5

38. The sum of coefficients in the expansion of (7x − 8y)149 is

a) 1 b) – 1 c) 0 d) none of these
1
39. If the binomial expansion of (a + bx)−2 is 4 − 3𝑥 + ⋯, then the values of a and b are
a) 2, 12 b) 2, 10 c) 1, 12 d) none of these

40. The binomial coefficient of the 4th term in the expansion of (x − q)5 is
a) 15 b) 20 c) 10 d) 5

41. The sum of the binomial coefficient in the expansion of (1 − x)7 is

a) 256 b) 64 c) 128 d) 0

5 −2/3
42. The expansion of (1 − 8 x) is valid when
8 8 2
a) |x| = b) |x| < c) |x| < d) none of these
5 5 3

MUHAMMAD ALI 88
 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014

1 1 1
43. + + ⋯+ 𝑛 =?
3 32 3
1 1 1 1 1 1
a) 2
[1 + 3n ] b) 2 [1 − 3n ] c) 3 [1 − 3n ] d) none of these

44. If x is positive, the first negative term in the expansion of (1 + x)27/5 is

a) 7th term b) 5th term c) 8th term d) 6th term
4 4
45. (√3 + 1) + (√3 − 1) is equal to
a) A rational number b) a negative integer c) an irrational number d) none of
these
10
√x 3
46. The term independent of x in the expansion of ( 3 + 2𝑥2 ) is
9 1 3 1 5 1 7 1
a) × b) × c) × 4 d) ×
4 34 4 35 4 3 4 33

a 12
47. The middle term in ( − bx) is
x
a) 12 C6 a6 b6 b) 12 C6 a6 c) 12
C6 a6 /b6 d) none of these
1
48. If the third term in the binomial expansion of (1 + x)m is − x 2 , then the rational values of ‘m’ is
8
1
a) 2 b) 2 c) 3 d) 4

49. If the coefficient of x 2 and x 3 in the expansion of (3 + kx)9 are equal, then the value of ‘k’ is
9 9 7
a) − 7 b) 7 c) 9 d) none of these

50. Euler discovered that S(n) = n2 − n + 41 is not prime for n = ?

a) 7 b) 41 c) 11 d) 47
n n n n n n
51. ( ) + ( ) + ( ) + ( ) + ⋯ + ( )+( ) =?
1 2 3 4 n−2 n−1
n−1 n n
a) 2 b) 2 − 1 c) 2 d) 2(2n−1 − 1)

ANSWERS
1. C 11. D 21. B 31. B 41. C
2. B 12. C 22. B 32. C 42. B
3. D 13. A 23. C 33. B 43. B
4. B 14. B 24. A 34. B 44. C
5. C 15. B 25. C 35. B 45. A
6. A 16. B 26. B 36. D 46. C
7. A 17. D 27. A 37. B 47. A
8. B 18. B 28. B 38. B 48. B
9. A 19. D 29. B 39. A 49. B
10. C 20. B 30. B 40. C 50. B
51. D

MUHAMMAD ALI 89
 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014

SOLUTIONS / HINTS

1. Solution:
Sum of binomial coefficients = 2n
= 27
= 128 c)

2. Hint: Here 3rd term is the middle term

Use Tr+1 = n Cr an−r . br
T3 = 4 C2 (3𝑥)2 . (2)2 = 216𝑥 2
∴ coefficient = 216 b)
5. Hint: Sum of odd coefficient = 2n−1
= 24−1 = 23 = 8 c)
1
7. Hint: Put |2x| < 1 => |x| < 2 a)

23. Solution:
Sum of odd coefficients = 64
=> 2𝑛−1 = 64
=> 𝑛 = 7 c)

26. Hint: Use Tr+1 = n Cr an−r . br Put T21 = T22 and solve for x
7
=> 𝑥 = − b)
8

27. Solution: Putting a = b = 1 in (6a − 5b)n

Required sum of coefficients = (6 − 5)n
= 1n = 1 a)

28. Hint: Find seventh term by using

Tr+1 = n Cr an−r . br b)

36. Solution:
We have
(1 + 2x + 3x 2 + ⋯ )−3/2 = [(1 − x)−2 ]−3/2 = (1 − x)3
So coefficient of x 5 in (1 + 2x + 3x 2 + ⋯ )−3/2
= Coefficient of x 5 in (1 − x)3
=0 d)

38. Solution:
(7x − 8y)147 = a0 x149 + a1 x148 y + a2 x147 y 2 + ⋯ + a149 y149
Put x = y = 1, we get
a0 + a1 + a2 + ⋯ + a149 = (7 − 8)149 = −1 b)

39. Solution:
1
(a + bx)−2 = − 3x + ⋯ given
4
bx −2 2
Also (a + bx)−2 = a−2 (1 + a
) = a−2 (1 − a bx)

MUHAMMAD ALI 90
 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014
Neglecting x 2 and higher power of x
1 2bx
= 2− 3
a a
1 1 2b
By comparing = 4 and a3 = 3
a2
=> a = 2; b = 12 a)

40. Hint: Binomial coefficient in T4 = T3+1 = 5 C3 = 10 c)

41. Hint: Sum of binomial coefficients = (1 + 1)7

= 27
= 128 c)

44. Solution:
Expand by using Binomial series
27
Here 5 − 6 is negative i.e. 8th term is negative in the expansion of (1 + x)27/5 c)

45. Hint: Expand by using Binomial theorem and simplify, we have

4 4
(√3 + 1) + (√3 − 1) = 56
= a rational number a)

48. Solution:
m(m−1) 2
(1 + x)m = 1 + mx + x +⋯
2!
m(m−1)x2 1x2 1
So we can write = => m = b)
2! 8 2

49. Hint: Find Coeff. of x 2 and x 3 and put them equal

50. Hint: For n = 7, 11 and 47 it is a prime number b)

51. Solution: As we know that

n n n n n n n
( ) + ( ) + ( ) + ( ) + ( ) + ⋯+ ( ) + ( ) = 2n
0 1 2 3 4 n−1 n
n n n n n
=> 1 + ( ) + ( ) + ( ) + ( ) + ⋯ + ( ) + 1 = 2n
1 2 3 4 n−1
n n n n n
=> ( ) + ( ) + ( ) + ( ) + ⋯ + ( ) = 2n − 2
1 2 3 4 n−1
= (2n−1 − 1) d)

MUHAMMAD ALI 91
 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014

Chapter # 9
FUNDAMENTALS OF TRIGONOMETRY

SYNOPSIS
INTRIDUCTION
The literal meaning of the word trigonometry is the ‘science of triangle measurement’. The word
‘trigonometry’ is derived from three Greek words: Trie (three), Goni (angles) and Metron (measurement)
which means measuring the sides of a triangle

Triangle
A closed plane figure having three sides is said to be a triangle

Classification of Triangles
1) Classification with respect to angle
a) Acute-angled triangle
b) Right-angled triangle
c) Obtuse angled triangle

2) Classification with respect to sides

a) Equilateral triangle
b) Isosceles triangle
c) Oblique triangle

Angles
Two rays with a common starting point from an angle. One of the rays of angle is called initial side and
the other as terminal side. Showing the direction of rotation from the initial to the terminal side identifies
the angle
OR
In elementary geometry an angle is defined as the union of two non-collinear rays, which have a common
end point

Note
An angle is said to be positive/negative if the rotation is anti-clock wise/clockwise

System of Measurement of Angles

In trigonometry, following three systems are used for measuring an angle according to different units
employed
1) Sexagesimal (or English or F.P.S) system
2) Centesimal (or French or C.G.S) system and
3) Circular system

MUHAMMAD ALI 92
 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014

1) Sexagesimal System
In this system of measurement, a right angle is divided into 90 equal parts called degree. Each degree
is then divided into 60 equal parts called minute and each minute is further divided into 60 equal
parts called second
We know that there are 4 right angles in a complete revolution and one complete revolution = 360
degrees (360o ). Thus we have
1 right angles = 90 degree (90o )
1 degree = 60 minutes (60′)
1 minute = 60 seconds (60′′ )

2) Centesimal System
In this system of measurement, a right-angle is divided into 100 equal parts called grades. Each grade
is then divided into 100 equals parts called minutes and each minute is further divided into 100 equal
parts called second.
Thus 1 right angle = 100′′
18 = 100′
1′ = 100′′

3) Circular System
In this system, the angle is measured in radians.

Radian
Radian is the angle sub-tended at the centre of circle by an arc, whose length
is equal to the radius. Let O be the centre of a circle of radius r, cut off an arc
AB = r, then ∠AOB = 1 radian and is written as 1c

Notes
1. ‘c’ used in the notation of radian is the first letter of the word circular system. For example
1 radian = 1c
2. When no unit is mentioned with an angle, it is always understood to be in radians
3. Radian is a constant angle

Relation between the Length of an Arc of a Circle and the Circular Measure of its Central
Angle
If r = radius of the circle
l = length of arc
and θ = circular measurement of the central angle
then l = rθ

Conversion of Radian into Degree and Vice Versa

2π radian = 360o
Π radian = 180o
180o
1 radian = π
= 57.296o

π
Further 1o = 180 radian = 0.0175 radian

MUHAMMAD ALI 93
 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014
The symbol π (read as pie) is the ratio of the circumference of the circle to its diameter. Π is an irrational
22
number and its values is generally taken as 7 unless otherwise mentioned.

1
Note: Area of a sector region of radius r = 2 rθ2 where θ is the circular measure of the central angle of the
sector

Coterminal Angles
The angles with the same initial and terminal sides are said to be coterminal angles
General angle θ = q + 2Kπ, K ∈ Z

Angle in the Standard Position

An angle is said to be in standard position if its vertex lies at the origin of a rectangular coordinate system
and its initial side along the positive x-axis

Quadrilateral Angle
If the terminal side of an angle falls on x-axis or y-axis, it is called a quadrilateral angle
e.g., 90o , 1800 , 270o and 360o

Trigonometric Ratios of any Angles

Consider a right-angled triangle ABC such that m∠C = 90o and m∠A = θ

Perp
sin θ =
Hyp
Base
cos θ = Hyp
Perp
tan θ =
Base
Further
1
cosec θ =
sin θ
1
sec θ = cos θ
1
cot θ = tan θ
sin θ
tan θ =
cos θ

Trigonometric Identity
An equation involving trigonometric functions which is true for all those angles for which the functions are
defined is called a trigonometric identity.

Fundamental Identities
For any real number θ, we have
sin2 θ + cos 2 θ = 1; 1 + tan2 θ = sec 2 θ ; 1 + cot 2 θ = cosec 2 θ

Key Points to Remember

1) In the first quadrant, all are positive
2) In the second quadrant, sine and cosec are positive
3) In the third quadrant, tangent and cotangent are positive
4) In the fourth quadrant, cosine and secant are positive

MUHAMMAD ALI 94
 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014
Trigonometric Ratio of Standard Angles

Key Points to Remember

sin(−θ) = − sin θ ; cosec(−θ) = −cosec θ
cos(−θ) =; sec(−θ) = sec θ
tan(−θ) = − tan θ ; cot(−θ) = − cot θ

Domain and Range of Trigonometric Ratios

MUHAMMAD ALI 95
 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014

MCQs
1. sin nπ =
a) 1 b) – 1 c) 0 d) (−1)n
1
2. If tan θ = − and θ lies in the fourth quadrant, then the values of cos θ is
√5
√5 2 1 1
a) b) c) 2 d)
√6 √6 √6

3. The value of cos2 θ + sec 2 θ is always

a) Equal to 1 b) less than 1 c) greater than or equal to 2 d) greater than 1 but
less than 2

4. The values of cos 1o , cos 2o , cos 3o … cos 179o is

1
a) b) 0 c) 1 d) none of these
√2

5. Which of the following is correct?

a) sin 1o > sin 1 b) sin 1𝑜 < sin 1 c) sin 1o = sin 1 d) none of these

6. The value of cot 5o , cot 10o , … , cot 85o is

1 1
a) 1 b) c) d) 0
√2 2

7. Which of the following is a rational number?

a) sin 15o b) cos 15o c) sin 15o , cos 15o d) sin 15o . cos 75o

8. Which of the following is correct?

2
a) tan 1 = tan 2 b) tan 1 > tan 2 c) tan 1 = tan 2 d) tan 1 < sin 2
3

9. sin 200o + cos 200o is

a) Positive b) negative c) zero d) zero or positive

10. The value of cos 20𝑜 − sin 20o is

a) Positive b) negative c) 0 d) 1
π
11. In a ∆ABC, ∠A = 2 , then cos 2 B + cos2 C equals
a) – 2 b) – 1 c) 1 d) zero

12. Incorrect statement is

1 1
a) sin θ = − 5 b) cos θ = 1 c) sec θ = 2 d) tan θ = 20

13. cos nπ =?
a) (−1)n b) (1)n c) 0 d) none of these
1 1
14. The expression tan 3A−tan A − cot 3A−cot A is equal to
a) cot 2A b) tan 2A c) cot 3A d) tan 3A

MUHAMMAD ALI 96
 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014
4
15. If tan x = − , then sin x is
3
4 4 4 4 4 4
a) − but not b) − or c) but not − d) none of these
5 5 5 5 5 5

π
16. In a triangle ABC, α = 2 then cos 2 β + cos 2 γ is equal to
a) – 2 b) – 1 c) 1 d) 0

17. The value of tan 56o − tan 11o − tan 56o , tan 11o is
a) 0 b) 1 c) – 1 d) none of these

1+tan2 x
18. If x = 60o , then 2 tan x
is equal to
1
1 2 (3)2
a) 1 b) (3)1/2 c) 1 d)
(3)2 (3)2 2

(x2 +y2 +1)

19. If sin2 θ = 2x
, then x must be
a) – 3 b) – 2 c) 1 d) none of these

20. If sin θ1 + sin θ2 + sin θ3 = 3, then cos θ1 + cos θ2 + cos θ3 =

a) 0 b) 1 c) 2 d) 3

21. If sin θ < 0 and tan θ > 0, then terminal side of angle lies in …….. quadrant
a) I b) II c) III d) IV

22. Through how many radians does the minute hand of a clock turn in 20 minutes?
π π 2π
a) 3 b) 2 c) 2π d) 3

23. The sign of tan 2140o is

a) Positive b) negative c) may be any d) none of these

24. If tan θ =a then sin θ =?

1 a √a a
a) b) 1+a2 c) 1−a2 d)
a √1+a2

25. Which one is true? (I) sin(−x) = sin x (II) cos(−x) = cos x (III) tan(−x) = tan x
a) I only b) II only c) I and & II only d) II and III only

26. The 3600th part of the degree is called

a) Degree b) minute c) second d) none of these

27. What is the circular measure of the angle between the hands of a watch at 4 O’clock?
2 3 π
a) 3 π radians b) 2 π radians c) 2 radians d) none of these

28. If θ is an acute angle then sin θ + cos θ is

a) > 1 b) < 1 c) insufficient data d) cannot be determined

MUHAMMAD ALI 97
 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014

tan 245o +tan 335o

29. If tan 25o = a, then the value of tan 205o −tan 115o
1−a2 1+a2 1+a2 1−a2
a) 1+a
b) 1−a2 c) 2a
d) 2a

5π cos A−sin A
30. If A = 5
, then the value of tan A+cot A is
1 1
a) 1 b) 0 c) 2 d) 4

31. The value of sin 75o is

√3+1 √3−1 √3−1 √3+1
a) b) c) d)
2√2 2√2 2 2

32. The value of tan 15o is

a) 2 - √3 b) 2 + √3 c) √2 − 1 d) √2 + 1

33. cos 20o , cos 40o . cos 60o . cos 80o =

1 1
a) 2 b) 4 c) 16 d) 32

34. If A and B are two points on a circle of radius r with centre at the point O and AOB = θ (in radians)
then the area of sector AOB is
1
a) 2πr b) πr 2 c) 2 r 2 θ d) rθ

4 3 cos θ+2 cosecθ

35. If cos θ = 5 and 0 < θ < 90𝑜 , then the value of 4 sin θ−cot θ
=
43 43 21 21
a) b) − c) d) −
2 2 2 2

3π
36. ( 8 ) radians are equal to
1o 1o
a) 67 2
b) 72 2
c) 75o d) none of these

37. cot θ . cosec θ. sin θ . tan θ =

a) 2 cos θ b) 3 sin θ c) 1 d) none of these

7 (1+sin θ)(1−sin θ)
38. If cos θ = 8 and 0 < θ < 90𝑜 , then (1+cos θ)(1−cos θ) is
8 7 49
a) 7
b) 8 c) 15 d) none of these

39. Which of the following is correct?

a) cos 1o > cos 1 b) cos 1o = cos 1 c) cos 1𝑜 < cos 1 d) sin 1o > sin 1

40. Which of the following is not true when θ lies in first quadrant?
θ θ θ θ θ θ θ
a) 2 < tan 2 b) 2 < sin 2 c) θ cos 2 2 < sin θ d) θ sin 2 < 2 sin 2

41. If θ increases from 90o to 180o , tan θ cot θ

a) Increases b) decreases c) remain same d) none

MUHAMMAD ALI 98
 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014

42. If tan A + cot A = 2, then the value of sec A is

a) 3√2 b) 2√2 c) √2 d) 1

ANSWERS
1. C 11. C 21. C 31. A
2. A 12. C 22. D 32. A
3. C 13. A 23. B 33. C
4. B 14. A 24. D 34. C
5. B 15. B 25. B 35. B
6. A 16. C 26. C 36. A
7. C 17. B 27. A 37. C
8. B 18. C 28. A 38. C
9. B 19. D 29. A 39. A
10. A 20. A 30. B 40. B
41. C
42. C

SOLUTIONS / HINTS
3. Solution:
cos2 θ + sec 2 θ = (cos θ − sec θ)2 + 2 ≥ 2 c)

4. Solution:
One of the factors of the given expression is cos 90o which has the value zero b)

6. Solution:
The given expression
= (cot 5o + cot 85o ). (cot 10o . cot 80o )
= (cot 5o . tan 5o ). (cot 10o . tan 10o )
= 1.1 … = 1 a)

7. Solution:
1
sin 15o . cos 15o = 2 sin 30o
1
= 4 rational c)

8. Hint: Since 1 radian = 57o (nearly)

∴ 2 radian = 114o (nearly) this lies in 2nd quad.
∴ tan 1 > 0 and tan 2 < 0 (-ve)
∴ tan 1 > tan 2 b)

9. Hint: 200o lies in 3rd quadrant

∴ sin 200o and cos 200o both are negative
=> their sum is also negative b)

10. Hint: cos θ > sin θ for 0 ≤ θ ≤ 45o

∴ cos 20o − sin 20o > 0 (+ve) a)

MUHAMMAD ALI 99
 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014

11. Solution:
π
cos2 B + cos 2 C = cos 2 B + cos2 ( 2 − B)
= cos 2 B + sin2 B
=1 c)
1
12. Hint: sec θ = 2 => cos θ = 2; which is not possible as −1 ≤ cos θ ≤ 1 c)

14. Solution:
First simplify by writing
sin 3A
tan 3A = cos 3A then take LCM a)

16. Solution:
We have
π
cos2 β + cos 2 γ = cos 2 β + cos 2 ( − β)
2
= cos 2 β + sin2 β
=1 c)

17. Solution:
As tan 45o = 1
=> tan(56o − 11) = 1
tan 56o −tan 11o
=> 1+tan 56o tan 11o = 1
=> tan 56o − tan 11o − tan 56o . tan 11o = 1 b)

19. Solution:
Since we have one equation and two variables, therefore, it is impossible to find the value of x
d)

20. Solution:
If sin θ1 + sin θ2 + sin θ3 = 3
θ1 = θ2 + θ3 = 90o
=> cos θ1 + cos θ2 + cos θ3 = 0 a)

28. Solution:
sin θ increases in first quadrant and cos θ decreases from 0o to 90𝑜
Hence sin θ + cos θ > 0

29. Solution:
Here tan(245o ) = tan(270𝑜 − 25𝑜 )
= cot 25o etc
Similarly reduce others and the simplify a)

38. Solution:
Here θ lies in first quadrant
7 √15
Given cos θ = 8 => sin θ = 8
Put the values and simplify
OR Given expression reduce to cot 2 θ

MUHAMMAD ALI 100

 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014
√15
Here tan θ = 7
49
∴ cot 2 θ = 15 c)

39. Solution:
cos 1 means cos of 1 radian which lies between 45o and 90o a)

40. Solution:
If θ lies in first quadrant then
sin θ < θ < tan θ (Sandwitch theorem)
θ θ θ
∴ sin 2 < 2 tan 2 b)

42. Solution:
If tan A + cot A = 2 => A = 45o
Therefore sec A = sec 45o = √2 c)

MUHAMMAD ALI 101

 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014

Chapter # 10
TRIGONOMETRIC IDENTITIES OF SUM AND
DIFFERENCE OF ANGLES

SYNOPSIS
Distance Formula
Let P(x1 , y1 ) and Q((x2 , y2 ) be two points. If “d” denotes the distance between them
Then d = |PQ| = √((x1 − x2 )2 + (y1 − y2 )2
= √((x2 − x1 )2 + (y2 − y1 )2

Fundamental Law of Trigonometry

Let α and β any two angles (real numbers), then
cos(α − β) = cos α cos β + sin α sin β

Note: Although we have proved this law for α > β > 0, is true for all values of α and β
cos(α + β) = cos α cos β − sin α sin β
sin(α − β) = sin α cos β − cos α sin β
tan α+tan β
tan(α + β) =
1−tan α tan β
tan α−tan β
tan(α − β) =
1+tan α tan β

Trigonometric Ratios of Allied Angles

The angles associated with basic angles of measure θ to a right angle or its multiple are called allied
angles. So, the angles of measure 90o ± θ, 180o ± θ, 270o ± θ, 360o ± θ, are known as allied angles
Using Fundamental law,
cos(α − β) = cos α cos β + sin α sin β and its deduction, we derive the following identities

π cos(π − θ) = − cos θ 3π
sin ( 2 − θ) = cos θ sin ( 2 − θ) = − cos θ
π tan(π − θ) = − tan θ 3π
cos ( 2 − θ) = sin θ sin(π + θ) = − sin θ cos ( 2 + θ) = sin θ
π
tan ( 2 − θ) = cot θ cos(π + θ) = − cos θ 3π
tan ( 2 + θ) = − cot θ
π
tan(π + θ) = tan θ
sin ( 2 + θ) = cos θ 3π sin(2π − θ) = − sin θ
sin ( 2 − θ) = − cos θ cos(2π − θ) = cos θ
π
cos ( 2 + θ) = − sin θ cos (
3π
− θ) = − sin θ tan(2π − θ) = − tan θ
2
π
tan ( 2 + θ) = − cot θ 3π sin(2π + θ) = sin θ
tan ( 2 − θ) = cot θ cos(2π + θ) = cos θ
sin(π − θ) = sin θ tan(2π + θ) = tan θ

1) If θ is added to or subtracted from odd multiple of right angle, the trigonometric ratio changes
into co-ratios and vice versa
π
2) If θ is added to or subtracted from an even multiple of 2 , the trigonometric ratios shall remain the
same

MUHAMMAD ALI 102

 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014

Note:
The greatest and least values of sin θ + bcos θ are √𝑎2 + 𝑏 2 and −√𝑎2 + 𝑏 2

Double Angle Identities

sin 2α = sin α cos α
cos 2α = cos2 α − sin2 α
2 tan α
tan 2α = 1−tan2 α

Half Angle Identities

α 1+cos α
cos 2 = ±√ 2
α 1−cos α
sin = ±√
2 2
α 1−cos α
tan = ±√
2 1+cos α

Triple Angle Identities

sin 3α = 3 sin α − 4 sin3 α
cos 3α = 4 cos3 α − 3 cos α
3 tan α−tan3 α
tan 3α =
1−3 tan2 α

Product to Sum/ Difference Formula

2 sin α cos β = sin(α + β) + sin(α − β)
2 cos α sin β = sin(α + β) − sin(α − β)
2 cos α cos β = cos(α + β) + cos(α − β)
−2 sin α sin β = cos(α + β) − cos(α − β)

Sum Difference to Product Formula

P+Q P−Q
sin P + sin Q = 2 sin cos
2 2
P+Q P−Q
sin P − sin Q = 2 cos sin
2 2
P+Q P−Q
cos P + cos Q = 2 cos 2 cos 2
P+Q P−Q
cos P − cos Q = −2 sin 2 sin 2

MUHAMMAD ALI 103

 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014

MCQs
1. sin4 θ − cos4 θ =?
1
a) 1 b) − sin 2θ c) cos 2θ d) − sec 2θ

2. If sin θ + cos θ = 1, then sin 2θ equals to

a) 0 b) ½ c) 1 d) 2

3. cos(α + β) cos(α − β) = ?
a) cos2 α − sin2 β b) cos 2 β − sin2 α c) both (a) and (b) are true d) none of
these

4. cosec(−1110o ) =
a) – 1 b) – 2 c) 1 d) 2

5. sin x sin 2x + sin x sin 4x + sin x sin 6x =

a) sin x cos 4x b) sin 3x sin 4x c) cos x sin 4x d) sin 3x cos 4x
1
6. If sin A = 2 then sin 3A is
3 √3 1
a) 2
b) 2
c) 2 d) 1

7. cos 1o cos 2o cos 3o … . cos179o =

1
a) 2 b) 1 c) 0 d) 2

8. If ∆ABC is right angled at C, then tan A + tan B =

a2 c2 b2
a) a + b2 b) c) d)
bc ab ab

cot 54𝑜 tan 20o

9. The value of tan 36o + cot 70o =
a) 1 b) 0 c) 2 d) 3

tan α−cot β
10. tan β−cot α
=
tan α 1+tan α 1−tan α
a) b) c) d) none of these
tan β 1+tan β 1−tan β

3
11. If tan θ = and 0 < θ < 90o, then sin θ. cos θ is
4
3 4 12
a) 5
b) 5 c) 25 d) none of these

5
12. If sin A = 13 and A is acute, then cos 2A is
119 119 10
a) 196
b) 169 c) 26 d) none of these

1
13. If cos 2A = 2, then cos 3A is
a) 1 b) – 1 c) 0 d) none of these

MUHAMMAD ALI 104

 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014

1+tan 2A.tan 3A
14. can be written as
tan 3A−tan 2A
a) tan A b) cot A c) tan 5A d) cot 5A

15. sin 4A + sin 2A can be written as

a) 2 sin 3A cos A b) 2 cos 3A sin A c) 2 sin2 A cos 2 A d) none of these

π π 1
16. 2 cos ( 6 + A) cos(( 6 − A) − 2 is equal to
a) 1 b) – 1 c) cos 2A d) sin 2A

1−cos 2A
17. √1+cos 2A can be written as
a) cos A b) sin A c) tan A d) cot A

18. Distance between A(3, 8) and B(5, 6) is

1 1 1
a) 62 b) 72 c) 82 d) 3

19. cos4 q − sin4 q =?

1 1
a) cosec 2q b) sec 2 q c) sec 2q d) cosec2q

20. cosec 2x − cot 2x =?

a) tan 2 𝑥 b) cos 2𝑥 c) tan 𝑥 d) cos 𝑥

21. If A + B + C = 180o , then

sec A(cos B. cos C − sin B. sin C) is equal to
a) 0 b) – 1 c) 1 d) none of these

22. In a triangle ABC, cosec A(sin B. cos C + cos B. sin C) is equal to

a) c/a b) a/c c) 1 d) none of these

23. if α, β and γ are the angles of a triangle ABC, then sin(α + β) =

a) sin γ b) − sin γ c) cos γ d) − cos γ

24. tan(270o − θ) =?
a) tan θ b) − tan θ c) cot θ d) − cot θ

25. cot 315o =?

1 1 1
a) b) c) d) 0
2 √2 √3

26. In any triangle ABC, tan(α + β) + tan γ =?

a) 1 b) 0 c) – 1 d) none of these

1 β 1
27. If tan α = 3 and tan 2 = 2, then tan(α + β) =
a) 1 b) – 1 c) 2 d) 3
4 5 π
28. If cos(α + β) = 5, sin(α − β) = 13 and α, β lies between 0 and 4 , then tan 2 α =

MUHAMMAD ALI 105

 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014
56 33 33
a) 33
b) 56 c) 48 d) none of these

29. If sin 𝑥 + sin2 𝑥 = 1, then value of cos2 𝑥 + cos4 𝑥 is

a) 1 b) 2 c) 1.5 d) none of these

1−cos x
30. √1+cos x is equal to
1−cos x sin x
a) 1+cos x
b) 1+cos x c) sec x − tan 𝑥 d) cot 𝑥 + cosec 𝑥

31. cos P + cos Q = 0, if

a) P + Q = 90o b) P + Q = 45o c) P + Q = 270o d) P + Q = 180o

ANSWERS
1. D 11. C 21. B
2. A 12. B 22. C
3. C 13. C 23. A
4. B 14. B 24. C
5. B 15. A 25. B
6. D 16. C 26. B
7. C 17. C 27. D
8. C 18. C 28. A
9. C 19. C 29. A
10. A 20. C 30. B
31. D

SOLUTIONS / HINTS
2. Solution:
sin θ + cos θ = 1
Squaring on both sides
(sin θ)2 + (cos θ)2 + 2 sin θ cos θ = 1
=> 1 + 2 sin θ cos θ = 1
=> sin 2θ = 0 a)

7. Solution:
One of the factor of given expression is cos 90o which has the value zero c)

8. Solution:
If ∆ABC is right angled triangle at C,
a b
Then tan A = b, tan B = a
a2 +b2
∴ tan A + tan B = ab
Since a2 + b2 = c 2
c2
=> tan A + tan B = ab c)

9. Solution:

MUHAMMAD ALI 106

 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014
Take tan 36o = tan(90o − 54o ) = cot 54o
Similarly tan 20o = tan(90o − 70o ) = cot 70o
cot 54o tan 20o
Hence + =1+1=2 c)
tan 36o cot 70o

13. Solution:
Use formula cos 3α = 4 cos 3 α − 3 cos α
Here 2A = 60o => A = 30o
=> cos 3A = cos 90o = 0 c)

14. Hint:
tan 3A−tan 2A
tan(3A − 2A) =
1+tan 3A.tan 2A
tan 3A−tan 2A
=> tan A = 1+tan 3A.tan 2A
1+tan 3A.tan 2A
=> cot A = tan 3A−tan 2A b)

21. Solution:
See
A(cos B. cos C − sin B sin C) = sec A. cos(B + C)
= sec A. cos(180o − A)
= sec A. (− cos A)
= −1 b)

22. Solution:
cosec A(sin B cos C + cos B sin C)
= cosec A. sin(B + C)
= cosecA. sin(π − A)
= cosecA. sin A
=1 c)

27. Hint:
1
Given tan α =
3
β
2 tan 4
3
tan β = β =3
1−tan2
2
tan α−tan β
Use tan(α + β) = 1−tan α tan β d)

28. Solution:
3
Here tan(α + β) = 4 and
5
tan(α − β) = 12
Now tan 2α = tan(α + β + α − β)
tan(α+β)+tan(α−β)
= 1−tan(α−β).tan(α−β)
56
= a)
33

29. Solution:
Given
sin x + sin2 x = 1

MUHAMMAD ALI 107

 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014
=> sin x = 1 − sin2 x
=> sin x = cos 2 x
=> sin2 x = cos4 x
=> 1 − cos2 x = cos 4 x
=> 1 = cos4 x + cos 2 x a)

30. Hint: Multiplying and dividing by (1 + cos x) and simplify b)

31. Hint:
P+Q P−Q
As cos P + cos Q = 2 cos 2 . cos 2
P+Q
=> P + Q = 180o so that 2
= 90o d)

MUHAMMAD ALI 108

 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014

Chapter # 11
TRIGONOMETRIC FUNCTIONS
AND THEIR GRAPHS

SYNOPSIS
Introduction
The general form of a trigonometric function is y = A. f(Bx + C)

Amplitude
The amplitude is the one-half the vertical distance between the lowest and the highest point of the graph.
The amplitude of a function is |A|

Phase Shift
The phase shift is the distance to the right or left that the graph is charged from its normal position
C
The phase shift of a function = −
B

Frequency
1
𝑓𝑟𝑒𝑞𝑢𝑒𝑛𝑐𝑒 =
𝑝𝑒𝑟𝑖𝑜𝑑
The following table summarizes the domain and ranges of the trigonometric functions

Period of Trigonometric Functions

All the six trigonometric functions repeat their values for each increase or decrease of 2π in θ i.e., the
values of trigonometric function for θ and θ ± 2nπ are the same

Period of trigonometric function is the smallest +ve number which, when added to the original circular
measure of the angle, gives the same value of the function

Periods of Trigonometric Function

• 2π is the period of sin θ
• Π is the period of tan θ
• 2π is the period of csc θ
• 2π is the period of sec θ
• Π is the period of cot θ

MUHAMMAD ALI 109

 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014
Key Points to Remember
P
1) Period of any function = B, where p is the normal period of the function
2) This behavior of trigonometric functions is called the periodicity
3) The graphs of trigonometric functions are smooth curves and none of them has line segments or
sharp corners or breaks within their domains. This behavior of the curve is called continuity. It
means that the trigonometric functions are continuous, wherever they are defined. Moreover, as
the trigonometric functions are periodic so their curves repeat after a fixed intervals
4) The dashes lines are vertical asymptotes in the graph of tan x , cot x , sec x and csc x

MCQs
1. Period of cotangent function is
a) Π b) 2π c) 0 d) none of these

2. The range of the function 2 sin 7x is

7 7
a) [−1, 1] b) [-7, 7] c) [-2, 2] d) [− , ]
2 2

3. Amplitude of – 17 sin 14x is

a) 14 b) – 14 c) 17 d) – 17

4. Period of cos(3x + 7) is
2π 2π π
a) 2π b) 3 c) 7
d) 3

x
5. The range of the function cos 3 is
1 1
a) [−1, 1] b) [− , ] c) [-3, 3] d) None of these
3 3

6. All the trigonometric functions are

a) 1-1 b) continuous c) periodic d) non-periodic

7. Number of solutions of the equation 𝑦 = cos 𝑥 = 𝑥 is

a) One solution b) two solution c) no solution d) infinitely many solution

ANSWERS

1. A
2. C
3. C
4. B
5. A
6. C
7. A

SOLUTIONS / HINTS
7. Hint:
Graph of 𝑦 = 𝑥 and 𝑦 = cos 𝑥 intersects at only one point
=> One solution a)

MUHAMMAD ALI 110

 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014

Chapter # 12
APPLICATION OF TRIGONOMTERY

SYNOPSIS
Introduction
We shall apply the theory of trigonometric functions to discuss the properties of triangle, that is the
relation among sides, angles, circum-radius etc of a triangle. We shall also use the properties obtained by
use to solution of triangles.

Elements of the Triangle ABC

For a given triangle ABC, we shall use a, b and c to denote the measure of the sides and α, β and γ to
denote the measure of the angles.
Three sides and three angles are known as elements of the triangle ABC

Types of Triangles
Triangle Sides Angles
Equilateral 3 sides are same 3 angles are same
Isosceles 2 sides are same 2 angles are same
Scalene 3 sides are different 3 angles are different
Acute May be scalene or isosceles of equilateral 3 angles are acute
Right May be scalene or isosceles but not equilateral 1 angle is of 90o
Obtuse May be scalene or isosceles but not equilateral 1 angle is obtuse
Oblique May be scalene or isosceles or equilateral No angle is of 90o

Angles of Elevation and Depression

⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗ is the horizontal ray through the eye of the observer at point O, and there are two objects B and C
If OA
such that B is above and C is below the horizontal ray ⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗
OA, then,

i) For looking at B the horizontal ray we have to raise our eye, and ∠AOB is called the angle of
elevation
ii) For looking at C below the horizontal ray, ∠AOC is called the angle of depression

Oblique Triangles
A triangle, which is not right, is called an oblique Triangle

MUHAMMAD ALI 111

 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014

Methods to Solve Oblique Triangles

The Law of Cosine
In any triangle ABC, with usual notation, we have
i) a2 = b2 + c 2 − 2bc cos α
ii) b2 = c 2 + a2 − 2ca cos β
iii) c 2 = a2 + b2 − 2ab cos γ

Note:
If ∆ABC is right, then
Law of cosine reduces to Pythagoras Theorem i.e.,
If α = 90o then b2 + c 2 = a2
If β = 90o then c 2 + a2 = b2
If γ = 90o then −a2 + b2 = c 2
Use the law of cosine when two sides and included angle is given

The Law of Sines

In any triangle ABC, with usual notations, we have
a b c
sin α
= sin β = sin γ
Use the law of sine when one side and two angles are given

The law of Tangents:

In any triangle ABC, with usual notation, we have
α−β
a−b tan
2
i) = α+β ,a > b
a+b tan
2
β−γ
b−c tan
2
ii) b+c
= β+γ ,b > c
tan
2
γ−α
c−a tan
2
iii) c+a
= γ+α ,c>a
tan
2

Half Angle Formula

a) The sine of half the angle in terms of the sides

α (s−b)(s−c)
i) sin 2 = √ bc
β (s−c)(s−a)
ii) sin 2 = √ ca
where 2s = a + b + c
γ (s−a)(s−b)
iii) sin = √
2 ab

b) The cosine of half the angle in terms of the sides

α s(s−a)
i) cos 2 = √ bc
β s(s−b)
ii) cos 2 = √ ac
where 2s = a + b + c
γ s(s−c)
iii) cos 2 = √ ab

MUHAMMAD ALI 112

 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014

c) The Tangent to half the angle in terms of the sides

α (s−b)(s−c)
i) tan 2 = √ s(s−a)
β (s−c)(s−a)
ii) tan 2 =√ s(s−b)
where 2S = a + b + c
γ (s−a)(s−b)
iii) tan 2 = √ s(s−c)
Use half angle formula to solve triangle when only three sides are given

Area of Triangle

Case-I: Area of triangle in terms of the measures of two sides and their included angle
1
Area of triangle ABC = bc sin α
2
1
= 2 ca sin β
1
= 2 ab sin γ

Case-II: Area of triangle in terms of the measures of one side and two angles
In a triangle ∆ABC, with usual notations, we have
a2 sin β sin γ
Area of triangle = 2 sin γ
b2 sin γ sin α
= 2 sin β
(c2 sin α sin β)
=
2 sin γ
Case-III: Area of triangle in terms of the Measures of its sides
In a triangle ABC, with usual notation, we have
Area of Triangle = √s(s − a)(s − b)(s − c)
This is called Hero’s formula

Circles Connected with Triangle

Circum-Circle
The circle passing through the three vertices of a triangle is called a circum-circle. Its centre is called the
circum-circle, which is the point of intersection of right bisectors of the sides of the triangle. Its radius is
called circum-radius and is denoted by R.
a b c
R= = =
2 sin α 2 sin β 2 sin γ
abc a+b+c
R = , where s =
4∆ 2
And ∆= √s(s − a)(s − b)(s − c)

Cyclic Quadrilateral
A quadrilateral is a cyclic quadrilateral if its vertices lie on circle. Sum of opposite angle of cyclic
quadrilateral = 180o

MUHAMMAD ALI 113

 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014
In-Circle
The circle drawn inside a triangle touching its three sides is called inscribed circle or in-circle

Its centre, known as the in-centre, is the point of intersection of the angle bisector of the triangle. Its
radius is called in-radius and is denoted by ‘r’

∆
r=
s
Escribed Circles
A circle, which touches one side of the triangle externally and the other two produced sides, is called an
escribed circle or ex-circle or e-circle. Obviously, there could be only three such circles of a triangle,
one opposite to each angle of the triangle

Centre of a escribed circle is called ex-centre and radius is called ex-radius

∆
r1 =
s−a
∆
r2 =
s−b
∆
r3 =
s−c

Relation between r, R 𝐫𝟏 , 𝐫𝟐 , 𝐫𝟑 and ∆

1) r1 . r2 + r2 . r3 + r3 . r1 = s 2
2) r. r1 . r. r3 = ∆2
3) r1 + r2 + r3 = 4R + r
4) r1 . r2 . r3 = rs 2
1 1 1 1
5) r = r + r + r
1 2 3

For equilateral triangle, we have

6) r: R: r1 = 1: 2: 3
7) r: R: r1 : r2 : r3 = 1: 2: 3: 3: 3

MUHAMMAD ALI 114

 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014

MCQs
1. If the sides of a triangle are 13, 14, 15 then radius of its circle is
65 67
a) 4 b) 8 c) 24 d) 4

2. If the lengths of the sides of a triangle are 3, 4 and 5 exists then R is

a) 3.5 b) 3.0 c) 2.0 d) 2.5

3. If R is the radius of the circumcircle of the ∆ABC, and ∆ is its area then
a+b+c a+b+c abc abc
a) R = ∆ b) R = 4∆ c) R = 4∆ d) R = ∆

4. If ∆ABC, a = 18, b = 24, c = 30, then sin A =

1 3 2
a) b) c) d) none of these
5 5 5

5. The area of the triangle ABC, where a = 18, b = 24 and c = 30 is

a) 196 b) 216 c) 64 d) none of these

6. In any ∆ABC, 2R2 sin A. sin B. sin C =

a) 2∆ b) 3∆ c) ∆ d) none of these

A B C
7. In any ∆ABC, 4R. sin . cos . cos =
2 2 2
a) r1 b) 2r1 c) 3r1 d) none of these

8. In any ∆ABC, rr1 + r2 r3 =

a) ab b) ac c) bc d) none of these

9. If the radius of the incircle of a triangle with its sides 5k, 6k and 5k is 6, then k is equal to
a) 3 b) 4 c) 5 d) 6

10. If c 2 = a2 + b2 , then 4s(s − a)(s − b)(s − c) =

a) a2 b2 b) c 2 a2 c) b2 c 2 d) 54

11. In a triangle ABC, a = 4, b = 3, ∠A = 60o , then c is the root of the equation

a) c 2 − 3c − 7 = 0 b) c 2 + 3c + 7 = 0 c) c 2 − 3c + 7 = 0 d) c 2 + 3c − 7 = 0

12. The area of the triangle ABC, where a = √2, b = √3, c = √5 is

1 1 1
a) 2 √6 b) 2 √9 c) 2 √7 d) none of these

13. If the area of triangle is 75 square makes and two of its sides are 20 and 15 metres, then the included
angle is
a) 30o b) 60o c) 180o d) none of these

14. In any ∆ABC, if a = 18, b = 24, c = 30, then r =

a) 6 b) 9 c) 12 d) none of these

MUHAMMAD ALI 115

 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014
1 1 1
15. In any ∆ABC, + + =
ab bc ca
1 1 1
a) Rr
b) 2rR
c) 3rR d) none of these

16. If a = 13, b = 14 and c = 15, then R =

1 1 1
a) 7 8 b) 8 8 c) 6 8 d) none of these

1 1 1
17. If any ∆ABC, r + r + r =
1 2 3
3 1 2
a) b) c) d) none of these
r r r

18. If the lengths of the sides of a triangle are 3, 5, 7 then the largest angle of the triangle is
π 5π 2π 3π
a) 2 b) 6 c) 3 d) 4

19. If 6, 9, 5 are the sides of a triangle ABC, then area of the triangle is
a) 2√241 b) 3√195 c) 2√195 d) none of these

20. The area of the triangle ABC, when a = 121, b = 606 and c = 725 cm in sq cm is
a) 2670 b) 7260 c) 8770 d) 5440
A
21. cos 2 =
(s−b)(s−c) (s−b)(s−c) s(s−a)
a) √ bc
b) √ s(s−a)
c) √ bc
d) none of these

22. If C = 60o , a = 2(√3 + 1) and b = 4 cm, then the area of the triangle in sq cm is
a) 3 + 2√3 b) 6 + 2√3 c) 6 − 2√3 d) 3 − 2√3

23. If the sides of a triangle are 119, 111 and 92 m then, its area in sq. m is
a) 2340 b) 4020 c) 4830 d) 5840

24. If in a ∆ABC, a2 , b2 , c 2 are in A.P, then cot A, cot B, cot C are in

a) A.P., b) G.P., c) H.P., d) A.G.P.,

25. The area of ∆ABC is given by

1 1 1
a) ∆= ca sin B b) ∆= ab sin C c) ∆= bc sin A d) all of these
2 2 2

A B C
26. If in a ∆ABC, a, b, c, are in A.P., then tan 2 , tan 2 , tan 2 are in
a) A.P. b) G.P. c) H.P. d) A.G.P

27. If s is the semiperimeter of a ∆ABC then ∆=

a) √s(s + a)(s + b)(s + c) b) 2√s(s + a)(sb )(s + c) c) √s(s − a)(s − b)(s − c)
d) 2√s(s − a)(s − b)(s − c)

28. If a = √3 + 1, b = 2, c = √2, then B is

a) 45o b) 60o c) 90o d) 15o

MUHAMMAD ALI 116

 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014
29. If A = 60o , b = 2, c = 4, then a =
a) 2√2 b) 2√3 c) √3 d) √6

30. If b = √3, c = 1, A = 30o , then B =

a) 30o b) 120o c) 45o d) 38o

B
31. If a = 5, b = 13, c = 12 in ∆ABC, then tan ( 4 ) is
a) √2 + 1 b) √2 − 1 c) √3 − 1 d) √3 + 1

32. In a ∆ABC, if A = 120o , b = 2, C = 30o then a =

3
a) 2√3 b) 2 c) √2 d) ½

33. In ∆ABC, if a = 2, b = √2, c = √3 + 1, then A =

a) 30o b) 45o c) 60o d) 90o

34. In a ∆ABC, if A = 75o , B = 45o , c = √3, then b =

a) 2 b) 3 c) √6 d) √2

35. In a ∆ABC, if A = 30o , C = 105o , b = 3√2, then a =

a) √2 b) 3 c) 3√2 d) 2

36. In a ∆ABC, if a = 5, B = 45o , c = 2√2, then b =

a) √3 b) 6 c) 2√13 d) √13

37. In a ∆ABC, if B = 45o , C = 105o and a = 3√2, then b =

a) 3√2 b) 3 c) 6√2 d) 6

38. In a ∆ABC, if b = 6, c = 2√3, A = 30o then a =

a) 2√3 b) 6 c) 3√6 d) none of these

39. In a ∆ABC, a = 2, b = 1 + √3, C = 60o , then c =

a) √3 − 1 b) √2 + 1 c) √6 d) none of these
C
40. In a ∆ABC, a = 13, b = 14, c = 15, then cos 2 =
1 2 3 4
a) b) c) d)
√13 √13 √13 √13

41. Two sides of a triangle are 2√3 and 2 and the included angle is 30o . Then the angle opposite to the
‘side 2’ is
a) 120o b) 60o c) 30o d) none of these
π
42. In a ∆ABC, if B = C = 4 and C = 4, then a =
a) 4 b) 2√2 c) √2 d) 4√2

MUHAMMAD ALI 117

 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014

43. Two boys are on opposite sides of a tower of 100 m height. If they measure the elevation of top of
tower as 30o and 45o respectively, then the distance in between the two boys is
a) 100√3 + 1 b) 100(√3 − 1) c) 100(√3 + 1) d) 100(√3 − 1)

44. If the sides of a triangle are in the ratio of 2: √6: (√3 + 1) then the largest angle of the triangle will
be
a) 60o b) 75o c) 90o d) 120o
a 𝑏 𝑐
45. If cos 𝐴 = cos 𝐵 = cos 𝐶, then the triangle is
a) Right angled b) isosceles c) obtuse angled d) equilateral

46. At a point 15 meter away from the base of a 15 meter high house, the angle of elevation of the top is
a) 45o b) 30o c) 60o d) 90o

47. A tree is broken by wind, its upper part touches the ground at a point 10 m from the foot of the tree
and makes an angle of 45o with the ground. The entire length of the tree is
√3
a) 15 m b) 20 m c) 10(1 + √2)m d) 10(1 + 2
)

ANSWERS
1. D 11. A 21. C 31. B 41. C
2. D 12. A 22. B 32. A 42. D
3. C 13. A 23. C 33. B 43. C
4. B 14. A 24. A 34. D 44. B
5. B 15. B 25. D 35. B 45. D
6. C 16. B 26. C 36. D 46. A
7. A 17. B 27. C 37. D 47. C
8. C 18. C 28. A 38. A
9. B 19. D 29. B 39. C
10. A 20. B 30. B 40. C

SOLUTIONS / HINTS
6. Solution:
2R2 sin A . sin B. sin C
a b c abc
= 2R2 . 2R . 2R . 2R = 4R = ∆ c)

9. Solution:
∆
Use r = s
5k+6k+5k
Here s = 2
=> s = 8k
Use ∆= √s(s − a)(s − b)(s − c)
= √8k(8k − 5k)(8k − 6k)(8k − 5k)
= √8k(3k)(2k)(3k)
=> ∆= 12k 2

MUHAMMAD ALI 118

 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014
∆ 12𝑘 2
∴ r = => 6 =
s 8𝑘
=> k = 4 b)

10. Solution:
Since a2 = a2 + b2
∴ ∆ABC is right angled with ∠C = 90o
1
∴ Area = 2ab
1
=> √s(s − a)(s − b)(s − c) = 2 ab ; squaring
=> 4s(s − a)(s − b)(s − c) = a2 b2 a)

11. Solution:
b2 +c2 −a2
cos A = 2bc
o 9+c2 −16
=> cos 60 = 6c
2
=> c − 3c − 7 = 0 a)
1
13. Hint: A = 2 ab sin γ
1
75 = 2 (20)(15). sin γ
2(75) 1
=> sin γ = (20)(15) => sin γ = 2
=> γ = 30o c)

18. Hint: Let a = 3; b = 5; c = 7; find γ by using

a2 +b2 −c2
cos γ = c)
2ab

45. Hint:
a 𝑏 𝑐
= = => tan 𝐴 = tan 𝐵 = tan 𝐶
cos A cos 𝐵 cos 𝐶
=> A = B = C = 60o d)

MUHAMMAD ALI 119

 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014

Chapter # 13
INVERSE TRIGONOMETRIC FUNCTIONS

SYNOPSIS
Introduction
Normally we have to find the values of trigonometric functions for given measures of the angles. But in
the application of trigonometry the problem has also been the other way round and we are required to find
measure of the angle when the values of its trigonometric functions is given. For this purpose, we need to
find inverse trigonometric functions.

To find the inverse of a function, function must be a one-to-one function, but all the trigonometric
functions are not one-to-one because horizontal line test fails to hold. But if we restrict the domains of
trigonometric functions to specify intervals, then they become one-to-one and we can find their inverse.

Horizontal Line Test

Horizontal line is test is used to check whether the function is one to one or not. We draw a horizontal
line, if this line cuts the graph at more than one points then the graph is not representing a one to one
function. If horizontal line cuts the graph only at one point then the graph is representing a one to one
function.

Restricted function are called principle functions

1) It must be remembered that sin−1 x ≠ (sin x)−1
2) It must be remembered that cos−1 x ≠ (cos x)−1
3) It must be remembered that tan−1 x ≠ (tan x)−1

Domains & Ranges of Principal Trigonometric Function and Inverse Trigonometric Function

TABLE

Relation between Inverse Trigonometric Functions

π π
i) sin−1 x = 2 − cos −1 x and cos −1 x = 2 − sin−1 x
π π
ii) tan−1 x = − cot −1 x and cot −1 x = − tan−1 x
2 2
π π
iii) sec −1 x = 2 − csc −1 x and csc −1 x = 2
− sec −1 x
1
iv) csc −1 x = sin−1 ( )
x
1
v) sec −1 x = cos−1 (x)
1
vi) cot −1 x = tan−1 ( )
x
vii) sin−1 x = cos−1 √1 − x 2
viii) 2 cos−1 x = sin−1(2x√1 − x 2 )
ix) 2 sin−1 x = cos−1(1 − 2x 2 )
x
x) sin−1 x = tan−1 ( 2
)
√1−x

MUHAMMAD ALI 120

 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014
Key Results to Remember
i) sin−1(−x) = − sin−1 x
ii) cos−1(−x) = π − sin−1 x
iii) tan−1 (−x) = − tan−1 x

Addition and Subtraction Formula

sin−1 A + sin−1 B = sin−1(A√1 − B 2 + B√1 − A2
sin−1 A − sin−1 B = sin−1(A√1 − B 2 − B√1 − A2
cos−1 A + cos−1 B = cos−1 (AB − √(1 − A2 )(1 − B 2 ))
cos−1 A − cos−1 B = cos−1 (AB + √(1 − A2 )(1 − B 2 ))
A+B
tan−1 A + tan−1 B = tan−1 1−AB
A−B
tan−1 A − tan−1 B = tan−1 1+AB
2A
2 tan−1 A = tan−1 1−A2

MUHAMMAD ALI 121

 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014

MCQs
4 2
1. The value of tan [cos−1 (5) + tan−1 (3)]
6 7 17
a) 17
b) 16 c) 6
d) none of these

3
2. The value of sin (2 cos −1 (5)) is
24 24 7
a) b) − c) d) none of these
25 25 25

3π
3. If x ∈ [−1, 1] and sin−1 x = 13
, then cos−1 x is equal to
10π 7π 19π
a) 13
b) 26 c) 26
d) None of these

4. The value of cos01(−1) − sin−1(1) is

3π 3π π
a) − 2 b) 2 c) 2 d) π

1 π
5. The value of tan {2 tan−1 − } is
2 4
7
a) 0 b) 1 c) − d) none of these
17

π
6. A solution of the equation tan−1 (1 + x) + tan−1(1 − x) = 2 is
a) 𝑥 = 1 b) x = -1 c) x = 0 d) x = p

4
7. sin [sin−1 − tan−1 2] =
5
2 2 3 3
a) b) − c) d) −
2√5 5√5 5√5 5√5

π 1
8. If tan−1 x = − tan−1 ( ), then x =
4 3
1 1 1
a) 4
b) 7 c) 2 d) none of these

3 12
9. sin−1 (5) − cos−1 (13) =
π π 2 π
a) 4
b) 2 c) 7 d) 2

7
10. cot [cos−1 (25)] =
25 25 7 24
a) b) c) d)
24 7 24 25

1 1
11. The most general value of θ which will satisfy both the equations sin θ = − and tan θ = is
2 √3
π 7π 11π 7π
a) nπ + b) 2n π + c) 2nπ + d) nπ + (−1)n
6 6 6 6

12. tan(cot −1 x) =
π
a) 2 − x b) cot(tan−1 x) c) tan x d) none of these

MUHAMMAD ALI 122

 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014
1 1
13. The value of tan−1 + tan−1 is
2 3
π π π
a) 4
b) 6 c) 3 d) 0

1
14. The value of sin [arc. cos (− 2)] is
1 √3
a) b) 1 c) d) none of these
√2 2

1 1
15. cos−1 2 + 2 sin−1 2 =
π π π 2π
a) 4
b) 6 c) 3 d) 3

1 2
16. tan−1 (4) + tan−1 (9) equal to
1 3 1 3 1 3 1
a) 2
cos−1 (5) b) 2 sin−1 (5) c) 2 tan−1 (5) d) tan−1 (2)

√3
17. The principal value of sin−1 (− 2
) is
2π π 4π 5π
a) − b) − c) d)
3 3 3 3

3
18. The value of sin (cos −1 5) is
3 4 1
a) 5
b) 5 c) 5 d) none of these

π
19. If sin−1 x = 5 for some x ∈ [−1,1], then the value of cos −1 x is
9π 7π 5π 3π
a) 10
b) 10 c) 10 d) 10

1 1
20. 4 tan−1 5 − tan−1 239 is equal to
π π π
a) Π b) c) d)
2 3 4

ANSWERS
1. C 11. B
2. B 12. B
3. B 13. A
4. C 14. C
5. C 15. D
6. C 16. D
7. B 17. B
8. D 18. B
9. B 19. D
10. C 20. D

MUHAMMAD ALI 123

 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014

SOLUTIONS / HINTS
1. Solution:
4 4
Let x = cos−1 5 => cos x = 5
3
∴ sin x = √1 − cos 2 x =
5
sin x 3 3
∴ tan x = = => x = tan−1
cos x 4 4
4 2
∴ tan [cos−1 (5) + tan−1 (3)]
3 2
= tan [tan−1 4 + tan−1 3]
3 2
+
= tan [tan−1 4 3 3 2 ]
1−( )( )
4 3
−1 17 17
= tan [tan 6 ] = 6 c)

π
3. Hint: Use sin−1 x + cos−1 x = 2
c)

6. Hint: Here
(1+x)+(1−x) π
tan−1 1−(1+x)(1−x) = 2
2 π
=> tan−1 1−1+x2 = 2
2 π
=> tan−1 x2 = 2
=> x = 0 c)

7. Solution:
Let x = tan−1 2 => tan x = 2
2 2
∴ sin x = 5 => x = sin−1 5
√ √
Take
4 4 2
sin [sin−1 5 − tan−1 2] = sin [sin−1 5 − sin−1 ]
√5
2
= sin [sin−1 (− 5 5)]
√
2
= −5 b)
√5

11. Solution:
7π
2nπ + 6
By giving simple Values of “n” in the options; we find that only (b) satisfies the given equations

1 1
14. Hint: Put x = cos−1 (− 2) => cos x = − 2
1
sin [arc. cos (− 2)] = sin x
= √1 − cos 2 x
1 √3
= √1 − 4 = 2
c)

MUHAMMAD ALI 124

 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014

17. Solution:
√3
Let sin−1 (− 2
)=θ
√3 π π
=> sin θ = − 2 and − 2 ≤ sin θ ≤ 2
π
Therefore θ =− b)
3

21. Solution:
y
x x−y x 1−
tan−1 − tan−1 = tan−1 − tan−1 x
y
y x+y y 1+
x
x y
= tan−1 y − (tan−1 1 − tan−1 x)
π π π
=2−4= 4
c)

MUHAMMAD ALI 125

 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014

Chapter # 14
SOLUTIONS OF TRIGONOMETRIC EQUATIONS

SYNOPSIS’'
Introduction
The equations, containing at least one trigonometric function, are called trigonometric equations

Trigonometric equations have an infinite number of solutions due to the periodicity of trigonometric
functions

Solutions or Roots of Trigonometric Equations

A value of the unknown angle which satisfies the given equation is called a solution or root of the
trigonometric equation

General solution
The solution consisting of all possible solutions of a trigonometric equation is called its general solution

Thus, a solution generalized by means of periodicity is known as the General Solution

By solving a trigonometric equation, we mean to find the set of all values of the unknown angle
which satisfies the given equation

Key Points to Remember

Trigonometric Equation Principal Solution General solution
sin x = 0 x=0 x = nπ
cos x = 0 π π
x= x = (2n + 1)
2 2
tan x = 0 x=0 x = nπ

MUHAMMAD ALI 126

 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014

MCQs
1. The value of θ lying between 0o and 360o and satisfying the equation tan θ + √3 = 0 is
a) 330o b) 300𝑜 c) 135o d) 225o

2. If sin θ + cos θ = √2 and θ is acute, then θ is

π π π
a) b) c) d) none of these
4 2 3

3. The solution of the equation cos 2 θ + sin θ + 1 = 0 lies interval

5π 7π 3π 5π π 3π
a) ( 4 , 4 ) b) ( 4 , 4 ) c) ( 4 , 4 ) d) none of these

4. The smallest positive angle which satisfies the equation 2 sin2 θ + √3 cos θ + 1 = 0 is
5π 2π π π
a) 6 b) 3 c) 3 d) 6

5. If 4 sin2 θ = 1, then the values of θ are

π π π π
a) 2nπ ± 3 b) nπ ± 3 c) nπ ± 6 d) 2nπ ± 6

6. cot θ = sin 2θ (θ ≠ nπ, n integer), if θ equals

a) 45o or 90o b) 45o or 60𝑜 c) 90𝑜 only d) 45𝑜 only

7. The value of θ satisfying cos θ + √3 sin θ = 2 is

5π 4π 2π π
a) b) c) d)
3 3 3 3

7π
8. If sin θ = k for exactly one value of θ, θ ∈ [0, 3
], then the value of k is
1
a) 1 b) – 1 c) d) 0
√2

1
9. The smallest positive angle satisfying the equation sin2 θ − 2 cos θ + 4 = 0 is
π π π π
a) 2
b) 3 c) 4 d) 6

10. The quadratic equation 8 sec 2 θ − 6 sec θ + 1 = 0 has

a) Exactly two roots b) exactly four roots c) infinite many roots d) no roots

11. The general solution of tan x = sin x is

nπ
a) nπ b) 2nπ c) 2 d) None of these

12. Number of solutions of the equation tan x + sec x = 2 cos x lying in the interval [0,2π] is
a) 0 b) 1 c) 2 d) 3

MUHAMMAD ALI 127

 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014

ANSWERS

1. B 7. D
2. A 8. (A, B)
3. A 9. B
4. A 10. D
5. C 11. A
6. A 12. D

SOLUTIONS / HINTS
1. Hint: Check the options. Option (b) satisfies the given equation
OR take tan θ = −√3 and discuss in 2nd and 4th quadrant with reference angle 60o b)
π
2. Hint: If θ = 4
then
π π
L.H.S = sin 4 + cos 4
1 1 2
= 2+ 2= 2 = √2 a)
√ √ √

3. Solution:
Check option. OR we have
cos2 θ + sin2 θ = 1
1 − sin2 θ + sin θ = 1
=> (1 + sin θ)(2 − sin θ) = 0 but sin θ ≠ 2
3π
=> sin θ = − 1 => θ =
2
5π 7π
∴θ∈ (4 , 4) a)

4. Solution:
Check the options. OR we have
2 sin2 θ + √3 cos θ = 1
=> 2(1 − cos 2 θ) + √3 cos θ = 1
√3 5π
=> cos θ = − => θ = a)
2 6
6. Hint:
1
We have sin2 θ = 4
π
=> sin2 θ = sin2
6
π
∴ θ = nπ ± 6 c)

8. Solution:
Clearly −1 ≤ k ≤ 1. For any value of k other than 1 and -1, sin θ has two values (in quadrant, I,
II OR III, IV)
∴ k = 1 or − 1 (a, b)

MUHAMMAD ALI 128

 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014
12. Solution:
tan x + sec x = 2 cos x
sin x 1
=> cos x + cos x = 2 cos x
=> 1 + sin x = 2 cos 2 x
=> 1 + sin x = 2(1 − sin2 x)
1 + sin x = 2 − 2 sin2 x
=> 2 sin2 x + sin x − 1 = 0
1
=> sin x = 2 or − 1
π 7π π
=> x = ; ;x =−
6 6 2

MUHAMMAD ALI 129

 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014

Chapter # 15
FUNCTIONS AND LIMITS

SYNOPSIS
Introduction
The concept of a function plays an important role in mathematics. A function is a special type of
relation that expresses how one quantity depends on another quantity.

Function or Mapping
Let X and Y be any two non-empty sets and there be correspondence or association between the
element of X and Y such that for every element x ∈ X, there exists a unique element y ∈ Y, written as y =
f(x). Then we say that f is a mapping or function from X to Y, and is written as
f: X → Y such that y = f(x), x ∈ X, y ∈ Y

Real Function
If f: X → Y be a function from a non-empty set X to another non-empty set Y where X, Y⊆ R (set of
all real numbers), then we say that f is a real valued function or in short a real function

Features of a Mapping 𝐟: 𝐗 → 𝐘
1) For each element x ∈ X, there exists a unique element y ∈Y
2) The element y ∈ Y is called image of x under the mapping f
3) If there is an element in X which has more than one thing in Y, then f: X → Y is not a function.
But distinct elements of X may be associated to the same element of Y
4) If there is an element in X which does not have an image in Y, then f: X → Y is not a function.

Note:
Throughout this chapter a ‘function’ will mean a ‘real function’

Value of a Function
The value of a function y = f(x) at x = a is denoted by f(a). It is obtained by putting x = a in f(x)

Domain and Range of a Function

If f: X → Y be a function, then the set X is said to be the domain of f
and range of f.
= set of all image points in Y under the map f.
= f(x) = {f(x) : f(x) ∈ Y; x ∈ X}
The set Y is also called the co-domain of f’. Clearly f(x) ⊆ Y

MUHAMMAD ALI 130

 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014
Key Point to Remember
If X and Y are any two finite sets having the same number of elements, say n, then the number of
bijective functions from X to Y is n!

Function
Consider two non-empty sets A and B. Function f from set A to set B is a rule or a correspondence
that assigns to each element x in A a unique value y in B

Notation for a Function

The term function was recognized by a German Mathematician Leibniz (1646-1716)
Eular introduced the symbol y = f(x) for a function. We read it as ‘f’ is a function of x’ or ‘y is equal
to f of x’. We write f: A → B

Domain or Input of a Function

Set of independent values x belongs to A is called domain of a function. Set A is called the domain
of the function. The domain of a function always belongs to the set of real numbers unless stated.
Domain is the set of all those values where the functions is defined.

Range
The set of corresponding values y in B is called the range of the function f.

Graph of a Function: (Vertical Line Test)

If a vertical line intersect a graph in the most one point, then the graph is said to be a graph of function,
otherwise not

Place-wise Function
The functions which are defined by two or more rules are called piece-wise defined functions
Such functions are also known as Hybrid Functions or Step-wise defined functions

Types of Functions
Type-1: Algebraic Functions
a) Polynomial Functions
The function of the form
P(x) = an x n + an−1 x n−1 + an−2 x n−2 + ⋯ + a2 x 2 + ax + a0
is called polynomial function of degree n, where an ≠ 0 and n is any non-negative integer
Domain and range is real numbers

b) Linear Function
If the degree of the polynomial function is one, then it is called linear function. The general form
a linear function is f(x) = ax + b, where a ≠ 0 and a and b are real numbers
Domain and range of linear function is real numbers. The graph of a linear function is a
straight line.

c) Identity Function
For any non-empty set A, a function I: 𝐴 → A of the form I(x) = x for all x ∈ A is called an
identity function. Domain and range of identity function is same set A. For example y = x is an
identity function

MUHAMMAD ALI 131

 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014

d) Constant Function
Let two non-empty sets A and B of real numbers. A function C: A → B defined as C(x) = a for all
x∈A and y ∈B is called a constant function
Domain is all real numbers and the range is a singleton set consisting of only any constant ‘a’

e) Rational Function
P(x)
A function of the form where both P(x) and Q(x) are polynomial functions and Q(x) ≠0, is
Q(x)
called a rational function. The domain of a rational function is the set of real numbers for which
Q(x) ≠0.
The range is the set of real numbers.

Type-2: Trigonometric Functions

The functions in which trigonometric ratio are being used are called trigonometric function
y = sin x , y = cos x , y = tan x, y = cot x, y = sec x and y = cosec x are six trigonometric
fucntions.

Note:
Domain and range will be discussed later on. You have also studied domain and range of trigonometric
function in first year class in chapter 11.

Type-3: Inverse Trigonometric Functions

y = sin−1 x ⇔ x = sin y , y = cos−1 x ⇔ x = cos y , y = tan−1 x ⇔ x = tan y are called inverse
trigonometric functions

Note:
Domain and range will be discussed later on. You have also studied domain and range of trigonometric
function in first year class in chapter 13.

Type-4: Exponential Functions

A function in which the independent variable x appears as exponent is called an exponential
function. For example, y = ex , y = ax are exponential functions.
Domain and range of these is the set of real numbers
Range of exponential function (ex , 2x ) is always non-negative real numbers

Type-5: Logarithmic Function

The functions involving logarithmic expressions are called logarithmic function
We know that if x = ay then y = log a x, where a > 0 and a ≠ 1

Common Logarithmic Functions

If a = 10 then we have y = log10 x, which is called common logarithmic function

Natural Logarithmic Function

If a = e (e≈ 2.718) then we have y = log e x, which is called natural logarithmic function
It is also written as y = ln x. Domain is positive real numbers and range is all real numbers

Type-6: Hyperbolic Functions

ex −e−x
sinh x = , its domain and range is set of all real numbers
2
x
e +e −x
cosh x = 2 , its domain is set of real numbers and range is [1,∞)

MUHAMMAD ALI 132

 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014
ex −e−x
tanh x =
ex +e−x
Similarly,
ex +e−x
coth x = ex −e−x
2
sech x = 𝑒 x +e−x
2
cosech x = ex −e−x

Type-7: Inverse Hyperbolic Functions

Inverse hyperbolic functions are expressed in terms of natural logarithmic functions
For example, sinh−1 x = [ln(x + √x 2 + 1)] for all x. Similarly others.

Type-8: Explicit Functions

If y is easily expressed in terms of independent variable x, then y is called an explicit functions

Type-9: Implicit Functions

If y and x are se mixed up and y cannot be expressed in terms of independent variable x, then y is
called an implicit function.

Type-10: Parametric Functions

If y and x depend upon any third variable, then such types of functions are called parametric
functions, and the third variable is called parameter.
For example, x = at 2 and y = 2at are parametric functions and t is the parameter. It represent parabola

Type-11: Even Functions

A function f(x) is said to be an even function if f(−x) = f(x)
For example, y = cos x and y = x 2

Type-12: Odd Functions

A function f(x) is said to be an odd function if f(−x) = −f(x)
For example, y = sin x and y = x 3

Note
• Sum, difference and quotient of even (odd) functions are even (odd)
• Product of an even and odd functions is odd
• f(x) = 0 is the only function which is even and odd

Modulus Function or Absolute Value Function

The function f: R → R, defined as
x, if x > 0
f(x) = |x|= 0, if x = 0
-x, if x < 0
is called the absolute value function or modulus function. Its domain is R and its range is [0, ∞). The
graph of the modulus function is as shown in the figure below

MUHAMMAD ALI 133

 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014
Trigonometric Functions

Function Domain Range

y = sin x R [-1,1]
y = cos x R [-1,1]
y = tan x π R
R\ {(2n + 1) 2 | nϵ1}
y = cot x R\ {nπ|n ϵ 1} R
y = sec x π (∞, −1] ∪ [1, ∞)
R\ {(2n + 1) 2 | nϵ1}
y = cosec x R\ {nπ|n ϵ 1} (−∞, −1] ∪ [1, ∞)

Inverse Trigonometric Functions:

Function Domain Range

y = sin−1 x -1 ≤ x ≤ 1 π π
[− 2 , 2 ]
y = cos−1 x -1≤ x ≤ 1 [0, π]
y = tan−1 x -∞ < x < ∞ π π
(− , )
2 2
y = cot −1 x −∞ < x < ∞ (0, π)
y = sec −1 x (−∞, −1] ∪ [1, ∞) π
[− 2 , 0) ∪ (0, 2 ]
π

y = cosec −1 x (−∞, −1] ∪ [1, ∞) π π

[0, 2 ) ∪ ( 2 , π]

Two Ways of Defining a Function

i) Uniform Definition
If a function is defined as y = f(x), x ∈ [a, b], we say that it is
uniformly defined

ii) Piecewise Definition

If a function y = f(x), x ∈ [a, b] assumes different forms in
different subsets of [a, b], we say that it is piecewise defined.

Composition of Functions
Consider three non-empty sets X, Y and Z
Let f is a function from X to Y and g be a function from Y to Z then their composition g o f is a function
from X to Z and is defined as
(g ∘ f)x = g(f(x))∀ x ∈ X
OR Let: fX → Y
g: Y → Z
then g ∘ f: X → Z and is defined as
(g ∘ f)x = g(f(x))∀ x ∈ X

Note: In general g ∘ f ≠ f ∘ g

MUHAMMAD ALI 134

 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014

Key Points to Remember

Let f: X → Y and g: Y → Z be two functions
1) If both f and g are one-one, then so is g ∘ f
2) If both f and g are onto, then is also onto g ∘ f
3) If g ∘ f is one-one, then f is one-one but g may not be one-one
4) If g ∘ f is onto, then g is onto but f may not be onto
5) If f and g in onto, then g but f may not be onto
6) If f and g are bijective, then is also bijective g ∘ f
7) It may happen that g ∘ f may exist and f ∘ g may not exist. Moreover, even if both g ∘ f and f ∘ g
exist, they may not be equal

Inverse Functions
If the function f: X → Y is both one-one and onto, then we define
inverse functions f −1 : Y → X by the rule
y = f(x) ⇔ f −1 (y) = x, ∀ x ∈ X, y ∈ Y as shown in the figure
below

key Points to Remembers

1) The graph of an odd function is symmetric about origin and it is placed either in the first and third
quadrant or in the second and fourth quadrant
2) The graph of an even function is symmetric about the y-axis
3) f(x) = 0 is the only function which is both even and odd
4) If f(x) is an odd function, then f’(x) is an even function provided f(x) is differentiable on R
5) If f(x) is an even function, then f’(x) is an odd function provided f(x) is differentiable in R
6) If f and g are even function, then f ∘ g is also an even function, provided f ∘ g is defined
7) If f and g are odd function, then f ∘ g is also an off function, provided f ∘ g is defined
8) If f is an even function and g is an odd function, then f ∘ g is an even function
9) If f is an odd function and g is an even function, then f ∘ g is an even function
10) For a real domain, even function are not one –one

Key Point To Remember

Constant function is periodic with no fundamental period.

Short-Cut Method to Find the Domain of a Function

Algebraic Functions
• Denominator should be non-zero
• Expression under the square root should be non-negative
Trigonometric Functions
• sin x and cos x are defined for real values of x
π
• tan x and sec x are defined for all real values of x except x = (2n + 1) 2 , where n ∈ Z
• cot x and cosec x are defined for all real values of x except x = nπ, where n ∈ Z

Inverse Trigonometric Functions

• sin−1 x and cos−1 x are defined for −1 ≤ x ≤ 1
• tan−1 x and cot −1 x are defined for all real values of x
• sec −1 x and cosec −1 x are defined for x ≤ −1 or x ≥ 1

MUHAMMAD ALI 135

 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014

Logarithmic Functions
• log b a is defined when a > 0, b > 0 and b≠1

Exponential Functions
• ax is defined for all real values of x, where a > 0

LIMITS

Introduction
We say that lim f(x) = 𝑙, if the value of f(x) get closer and closer to the number 𝑙 as x gets nearer and
x→a
nearer to a but not equal to a

Note: We are not concerned with what happens to f(x) when x equals a, but only what happens to it when
x is close to a. We emphasize that the limit must be the same as x approaches a from the left or from the
right

Right Hand Limit

We say that right hand limit of f(x) as x tends to ‘a’ exists and is equal to 𝑙1 if as x approaches ‘a’ through
values greater than ‘a’, the values of f(x) approach a definite unique real number 𝑙1 and we write
lim f(x) = 𝑙1 or f(a + 0) = 𝑙1
𝑥→𝑎

Left Hand Limit

We say that left hand limit of f(x) as x tends to ‘a’ exists and is equal to 𝑙2 if as x approaches ‘a’ through
values less than ‘a’, the values of f(x) approach a definite unique real number 𝑙2 and we write
lim f(x) = 𝑙2 or f(a-0) = 𝑙2
x→a

Properties of Limits

Sandwich Theorem (or Squeeze Principle)

If f, g and h are functions such that f(x) ≤ g(x) ≤ h(x) for all x in some neighborhood of the point a
(except possibly at x = a) and if lim f(x) = 𝑙 = lim h, then lim g(x) = 𝑙
x→a x→a x→a

Evaluation of Limit
The problems on limits can be divided into the following categories

Limits

Algebraic Trigonometric Exponential

Limits Limits Limits

Algebraic Limits
The following methods are useful for evaluating limits of algebraic functions

Methods of Factorization
If f(x) and g(x) are polynomials and g(a) ≠ 0, then we have,
lim f(x)

MUHAMMAD ALI 136

 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014
f(x) lim f(x) f(a)
x→a
lim = =
x→a g(x) lim g(x)
x→a
g(a)
Now, if f(a) = 0 = g(a), then (x − a) is a factor of both f(x) and g(x). We cancel this common factor (x-a)
from both the numerator and denominator and again put x = a in the given expression. If we get a
meaningful number then than number is the limit of the given expression otherwise we repeat this process
till we get a meaningful number.

Example 1:
x2 −3x+2
lim
x→2 x2 +x−6

Solution
x2 −3x+2 (x−2)(x−1)
lim = lim (x−2)(x+3)
x→2 x2 +x−6 𝑥→2
2−1 1
= =
2+3 5

A standard limit involving Rational Fucntion.

xn −an
lim = nan−1
x→a x−a
Where n is any positive integer
The formula remains true when n is a rational number but not a positive integer, provided a is positive

Example 2:
x7 −128
Evaluate lim
x→2 x−2
Solution
x7 −128 x7 −27
lim = lim = 7 × 27−1
x→2 x−2 𝑥→2 x−2
xn −an
[∵ lim x−a = nan−1 , here n = 7, a = 2]
x→a
= 7 × 64 = 448

Limits of an Algebraic Function when 𝐱 → ∞

f(x)
In order to find the limit of a function of the type g(x)
as x → ∞, where f(x) and g(x) are algebraic
function of x, it is convenient to divide all the terms of f(x) and g(x) by the highest power of x in
numerator and dominator both and use the following standard limits
1
1) lim =0
x→∞ x
1
2) lim = 0 if p > 0
x→∞ xp

Trigonometric Limits
For finding the limits of trigonometric functions, we use trigonometric transformations and simplify. The
following results are quite useful

sin x tan x sin−1 x

1) i) lim =1 ii) lim cos x = 1 iii) lim =1 iv) lim =1 v)
x→0 x x→0 x→0 x x→0 x
−1
tan x sin x0 π
lim =1 vi) lim =
x→0 x x→0 x 180

2) lim f(x) = lim f(a + h) , where a ≠ 0, on taking x = a + h

x→a h→0

MUHAMMAD ALI 137

 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014
Example 3:
sin 3x tan 3x tan−1 2x
i) lim ii) lim tan 5x iiii) lim
x→0 5x x→0 x→0 sin 3x

Solution
sin 3x 3 sin 3x
i) lim 5x
= lim 5 . 3x
x→0 x→0
3 sin 3x
= . lim
5 3x→0 3x
[∵ As x → 0, 3x → 0]
3 3
= 5×1 = 5
sin θ
[∵ lim θ
= 1]
θ→0

tan 3x tan 3x 5x 3
ii) lim tan 5x = lim ( 3x
. tan 5x . 5)
x→0 x→0
3 tan 3x 5x
= lim
5 x→0 3x
. lim tan 5x
x→0
3 1 tan θ
= . 1. [Using lim = 1]
5 1 θ→0 θ
3
=
5

tan−1 2x tan−1 2x 3x 2
iii) lim = lim × ×
x→0 sin 3x x→0 2x sin 3x 3
2 2
=1×1× =
3 3

Exponential and Logarithmic Limits

For finding the limits of exponential and logarithmic functions, the following results are useful
ex −1
1) lim =1
x→0 x
ax −1
2) lim = log e a a > 0
x→0 x
1 n
3) lim(1 + x)1/x = lim (1 + n) = e
x→0 n→∞
a x a
4) lim (1 + ) =e
x→∞ x
1/f(x)
5) lim(1 + f(x)) =e
x→a

Continuity of a Function at a Point

A function f(x) is said to be continuous at an interior point x = a of its domain if lim f(x) = f(a). In other
x→a
words, a function f(x) is said to be continuous at a point x = a provided left and hand limit, right hand
limit and value of the function are equal
A function f(x) is continuous at a point x = a if
lim f(a − h) = lim f(a + h) = f(a)
h→0 h→0

Continuity of a Function on an Interval:

Continuity on an Open Interval
A function f(x) is said to be continuous on an open interval (a, b) if it is continuous at each point of (a, b)

MUHAMMAD ALI 138

 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014

Continuity on a Closed Interval

A function f(x) is said to be continuous on a closed interval [a, b] if:
1) f(x) is continuous from right at x = a, i.e.
lim f(a + h) = f(a)
h→0
2) f(x) is continuous from left at x = b i.e.
lim f(b − h) = f(b)
x→0

3) f(x) is continuous at each point of the open interval (a, b)

Discontinuous of a Function
A function f(x), which is not continuous at a point x = a, is said to be discontinuous at that point

Types of Discontinuous
Removal Discontinuity
If lim f (a − h) and lim f(a + h) exists and are equal, but are not equal to f(a), then the function f(x) is
h→0 h→0
said to have a removable discontinuity at x = a. However, by suitably defining the function at x = a, f(x)
can be made continuous at x = a

Geometrical Meaning of Continuity

1) A function f(x) will be continuous at a point x = a, if there is
no break or cut or gap in the graph of the function y = f(x) at
the point (a, f(a)). Otherwise, it is discontinuous at that point
2) A function f(x) will be continuous on the closed interval [a, b]
if the graph of the function y = f(x) is an unbroken line
(curved or straight) form the point (a, f(a)) to the point (b,
f(b))

Key Points on Continuous Functions

1) If f and g are continuous at x = a, then
a) f + g is continuous at x = a
b) f − g is continuous at x = a
c) fg is continuous at x = a
d) f/g is continuous at x = a, provided g(a) ≠ 0
e) kf is continuous at x = a, where k is any real constant
2) If f is continuous at a and g is continuous at f(a) then gof is
continuous at a
3) Every polynomial is continuous at every point of the real life
4) Every rational function is continuous at every point where its
denominator is different from zero
5) Logarithmic functions, exponential functions, Trigonometric function, Inverse circular functions
and Absolute value functions are continuous in their domain

Differentiability of a Function at a Point

Let f be a function defined on an interval I ⊆ R we say that f is differentiable at an interior point c ∈ I
provided
f(x)−f(c)
lim exists and is finite
x→c x−c
We denote this limit by f′(c), called the derivative of f at c

MUHAMMAD ALI 139

 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014

Key Points on Differentiability

1) Every polynomial function, exponential function and constant function is differentiable at each
point of the real line
2) Logarithmic functions, Trigonometric functions and Inverse Trigonometric functions are
differentiable in their domain
3) The sum, difference, product and quotient of two differentiable functions is differentiable
4) The composition of differentiable function is a differentiable function

Relation between Continuity and Differentiability

1) If a function f(x) is differentiable at a point x = a then it is a continuous at x = a
2) If f(x) is only continuous at a point x =a, there is no guarantee that f(x) is differentiable there

MUHAMMAD ALI 140

 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014

MCQs
1
1. The domain of the function y = f(x) = x−1 is
√
a) (−∞, 1) b) (0, ∞) c) (1, ∞) d) (0, 1)
1
2. The domain of the function f(x) = 2 is
√x −3x+2
a) (−∞, 1) b) (−∞, 1) ∪ (2, ∞) c) (−∞, 1] ∪ [2, ∞) d) (2, ∞)

3. If f is an even function and g is an odd function, then the function f ∘ g is

a) An even function b) an odd function c) neither even nor odd d) a periodic
function

4. If f is an odd function and g is an even function then the function f ∘ g is

a) An even function b) an odd function c) neither even nor odd d) a periodic
function

5. Let f and g be two odd functions, then the function fog is

a) An even function b) an odd function c) neither even nor odd d) a periodic
function

6. The number of bijective function from a set A to itself when A contain 106 elements is
a) 106 b) (106)2 c) (106)! d) 2106

7. If R → R is given by f(x) = 3x – 5, then f −1 (x)

1 x+5
a) is given by 3x−5 b) is given by 3 c) does not exist because f is not one-one d)
does not exist because f is not onto

8. If f(x) = (3 − x 7 )1/7 ∀ x ∈ R, then (fof) (x) is equal to

a) x b) 0 c) 3 − x 7 d) none of these

9. The function f(x) = log(x + √x 2 + 1) is

a) An even function b) an odd function c) a periodic function d) neither an
event nor an odd function

10. Let f: R → R be a mapping defined by

f(x) = x 3 + 5, then f −1 (x) is equal to
1 1 1
a) (5 − 3)3 b) (x + 5)3 c) 5 – x d) (x − 5)3

11. Let f: R → R, g: R → R be two function given by f(x) = 2x − 3, g(x) = x 3 + 5. Then (fog)−1 (x)
is equal to
x−7 1/3 x+7 1/3 7 1/3 x−2 1/3
a) ( 2
) b) ( 2
) c) (x − 2) d) ( 7
)

12. The composite mapping fog of the maps f: R → R,

f(x) =sin x , g: R → R, g(x) = x 2 is
x
a) sin x + x 2 b) (sin x)2 c) sin x 2 d) sin
x2

MUHAMMAD ALI 141

 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014

1
13. The number of points at which the function f(x) = is discontinuous, is
log|x|
a) 4 b) 3 c) 2 d) 1

14. The function f(x) = 0 is __________ Function

a) Even b) Odd c) both even and odd d) Neither even nor odd

15. If f(x) is an odd function, then its derivative is __________ Function, provided f(x) is
differentiable on R
a) Even b) Odd c) Neither even nor odd d) None of these

16. The graph of an even function is symmetric about _____________

a) x-axis b) y-axis c) origin d) None of these

17. The graph of an odd function is symmetric about ________

a) x-axis b) y-axis c) origin d) Neither even nor odd

18. If f is an odd function and g is an even function, then fog is ________ function
a) Even b) Odd c) Both even and odd d) Neither even nor odd

19. The set of points of discontinuity of the function f(x) = log|x| is

a) {0} b) Φ c) {1, -1} d) None of these

sin x
20. The set of points of discontinuity of the function f(x) = |sin x| is
a) {0} b) {nπ; n integer} c) Φ d) None of these
x
21. Inverse function of y = is
x+5
x x x 5x
a) x+5
b) (x−5)
c) (1−x) d) (1−x)

22. The values of b and c for which

f(x + 1) − f(x) = 8x + 3 holds true, where
f(x) = bx 2 + cx + d, are
a) b = 2, c = −1 b) b = 4, c = −1 c) b = −1, c = 4 d) None of these
1
23. If f(x) = x 2 − x2 then f(x) =?
1 1
a) −f (x) b) f (x) c) f(x) d) f(x 2 )

24. For a function if right hand limit is equal to left hand limit, then which of the following must be
true
a) Function is continuous b) its limits exists c) Function is defined d) Both b)
& c)

25. The graph of the parametric equations x = t 2 and y = t, when -2≤ t ≥ 2 represents
a) Circle b) Parabola c) Ellipse d) Straight line

26. If f(x) = 4x + 5 and g(x) =3x + 7, then f(g(x)) is

a) 12x + 28 b) 12x + 33 c) 4x − 31 d) 25x + 34

MUHAMMAD ALI 142

 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014

27. The domain for the function with the rule

1
y = 2−x is
√
a) R\{2} b) (−∞, 2) c) (2, ∞) d) (−∞, 2]

x 1
28. If f(x) = x−1 then f(− a), in simplified form, is equal to
1 1 a2
a) b) -1 c) (a+1) d) (1−a)
−1−a

29. If f(x) = 3x + 2 and g(x) = 2x 2 then f (g(3)) equals

a) 36 b) 20 c) 56 d) 144

30. Which one of the following is an even function of x?

a) f(x) = 3x + 1 b) f(x) = x 3 − x c) f(x) = (1 − x)2 d) f(x) = −x 2

31. If f(x) ≤ g(x) ≤ h(x) and value of limit of f(x) and h(x) as x tends to c are 2 then value of the limit
of g(x) as x tends to c is
a) < 2 b) > 2 c) = 2 d) Nothing can be said

32. The inverse hyperbolic functions are expressed in the term of

a) Exponent b) Common logarithm c) Natural logarithm d) None of these

33. A function in which variable appears as power is called

a) Implicit function b) Explicit function c) Exponential function d) Logarithmic
function

34. If the degree of polynomial function is one then the function is said to be
a) Quadratic function b) Unit function c) Linear function d) Identity function

35. Area of square depends upon its

a) Vertices b) Diagonals c) Mid points d) sides

36. If y is easily expressed in terms of the independent variable, then y is called

a) Implicit function b) explicit function c) even function d) odd function

37. The term function was recognized by

a) Leibniz b) Eular c) Adam Smith d) None of these

38. Derivative of a constant is always equal to

a) One b) Zero c) Negative d) Positive

39. The derivatives of a variable with respect to the same variable is

a) One b) Zero c) Negative d) Positive

40. Sir Isaac Newton was

a) English Mathematician b) Swiss Mathematician c) Greek Mathematician d)
German Mathematician

41. If the slope of the function is positive then the function is

a) Increasing b) Decreasing c) Linear Function d) Unit Function

MUHAMMAD ALI 143

 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014

1
42. If f(x) = 4x + 2 for all x, then f −1 (2) =
1 1 3
a) 4 b) c) d) −
16 4 8

43. If f(x) = 3 and g(x) = 2, then f(g(x)) =

a) 2 b) 3 c) 6 d) 5
1−x
44. If f(x) = then f ′ (f(cos x)) equal
1+x
1−cos x x
a) x b) 1+cos x c) tan2 2 d) cos x

x−2
45. the range of the function f(x) = 2−x is
a) R b) R − {1} c) {-1} d) R – {-1}

1 1
46. If f(x) = 1 − , then f (f ( )) is
x x
1 1 x 1
a) x
b) 1+x c) x−1 d) x−1

x−1
47. Let f(x) = x+1 then f(f(x)) is
1 1 1 1
a) x
b) − x c) x+1 d) x−1

1+x2
48. The range of the function f(x) = x2
is equal to
a) [0, 1] b) (0, 1) c) (1, ∞) d) none of these

49. If f(x) = x 5 + cos x, then f(x) is

a) An even function b) an odd function c) neither even nor odd function d) a
constant function

50. The function f(x) = cos 𝑥, x ∈ R is

a) An even function b) an odd function c) a power function d) none of these
1
51. If ‘f’ is any function, then 2 [𝑓(𝑥) + 𝑓(−𝑥)] is always
a) Even b) odd c) neither even nor odd d) none of these
1
52. If y = x−2 , x ≠ 2, then for what value, if any, of ‘x’ is y 2 = −2 = −2 𝑦 3 ?
1
a) -4 b) − 2 c) 0 d) no value

53. If f(x) = x 2 + 1 then value of (fof)(x) is equal to

a) x 4 + 2x 2 + 2 b) x 4 + 2x 2 + 2 c) x 4 + x 2 + 1 d) None of these

1 1
54. Let f (x + ) = x 2 + ,x ∈ R − {0}, then f(x) is equal to
x x2
2 2
a) x b) x − 1 c) x 2 − 2 d) none of these

MUHAMMAD ALI 144

 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014

x f(a)
55. If f(x) = x−1, then f(a+1) is equal to
1 a
a) f(−a) b) f (a) c) f(a2 ) d) f (− a−1)

56. If f: R → R is defined by f(x) = x 2 + 1, then the value of f −1 (17) and f −1 (−3) respectively are
a) ϕ, {−4, 4} b) {−3, 3}, ϕ c) ϕ, {−3,3} d) {−4,4}, ϕ

57. 𝑓: 𝑅 → 𝑅 is function defined by 𝑓(𝑥) = 10𝑥 − 7, if g = f −1 , the g(x) is equal to

1 1 𝑥+7 𝑥−7
a) 10𝑥−7 b) 10𝑥+7 c) 10 d) 10

58. Let 𝑓(𝑥) = 𝑥 2 and g(x) = 2x then the solution set of (fog)(x) = (gof)(x) is
a) R b) {0} c) {0, -2} d) none of these

2x−1 3
59. Let 𝑓: 𝑁 → 𝑅: 𝑓(𝑥) = 2
and g: θ → R: g(x) = x + 2 be two functions. Then (gof) (2) is equal
to
7
a) 3 b) 1 c) 2 d) none of these

60. If 𝑓: 𝑅 → 𝑅 be a mapping defined by 𝑓(𝑥) = 𝑥 3 + 5, then 𝑓 −1 (𝑥) is equal to

a) (x + 5)1/3 b) (x − 5)1/3 c) (5 − x)1/3 d) 5 – x
x−1
61. If f(x) = x+1 , xϵR − {−1}, then f −1 (𝑥) is equal to
x−1 x+1 2 1
a) x+1
b) 1−x c) 1+𝑥 d) 1−𝑥

62. Two functions f and g are said to commute if (fog)(x) = (gof)(x) for all x, then which one of the
following functions commute? (I is the set of integers)
a) 𝑓(𝑥) = x 3 , g(x) = x + 1 b) f(x) = √x, g(x) = cos x c) f(x) = x m , g(x) = x n , m ≠
n, m, n ∈ I
d) f(x) = x − 1, g(x) = x 2 + 1

63. f(x) = 4x − x 2 , x ∈ R then

f(a+1) – f(a -1) is equal to
a) 2(4 − 𝑎) b) 4(2 – a) c) 4(2 + a) d) 2(4 + a)
𝑎𝑥
64. Let f(x) = 𝑥+1 , 𝑥 ≠ −1, then for what value of a is 𝑓[𝑓(𝑥)] = 𝑥?
a) √2 b) -√2 c) 1 d) -1
x−1
65. If f(x) = , then f(2x) is equal to
x+1
3f(x)+1 f(x)+1 f(x)+3
a) f(x)+3
b) f(x)+3 c) f(x)+1 d) none of these

MUHAMMAD ALI 145

 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014

ANSWERS
1. C 11. A 21. D 31. C 41. A 51. A
2. B 12. C 22. B 32. C 42. D 52. C
3. A 13. B 23. A 33. C 43. B 53. A
4. A 14. C 24. B 34. C 44. D 54. C
5. B 15. A 25. B 35. D 45. C 55. C
6. C 16. B 26. B 36. B 46. C 56. D
7. B 17. C 27. B 37. A 47. B 57. C
8. A 18. A 28. C 38. B 48. C 58. C
9. B 19. A 29. C 39. A 49. C 59. D
10. D 20. B 30. D 40. C 50. A 60. B
61. B
62. C
63. B
64. D
65. A

SOLUTIONS / HINTS
1. Solution:
Domain is the set of all those value of independent variable where the function is defined
Here the given expression is not defined at x = 1 and for all value of x less than one

2. Solution:
1 1
f(x) = 2 =
√𝑥 −3𝑥+2 √(𝑥−1)(𝑥−2)
Here the given expression is not defined at x = 1 and at x = 2
For f(x) to be defined (x – 1)(x – 2) > 0
 x < 1 or x > 2

6. Solution:
The total number of bijective function from a set A to itself when A contains 106 elements is
(106)!

9. Solution:
f(x) = log(x + √𝑥 2 + 1)
=> f(−x) = log [−𝑥 + √(−𝑥)2 + 1]
=> f(x) + f(−x) = log(x + √𝑥 2 + 1) + log(−𝑥 + √𝑥 2 + 1)
= log(1) = 0
=> f(−x) = −f(x); odd function

12. Solution:
f(x) = sin x ; 𝑔(𝑥) = x 2
(fog)(x) = f(g(x))
= f(x 2 )
= sin x 2

MUHAMMAD ALI 146

 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014

13. Solution:
F(s) is not continuous at x = 0, 1and -1 at all other points f(x) is continuous
∴ At three points, function is discontinuous. (b)

19. Hint:
As the function Log|x| is not defined at x = 0, therefore the set of points of discontinuity is {0}

20. Hint:
The function is not defined for x = nπ. Hence the set of points of discontinuity is {nπ: n integer}

27. Solution:
The function is not defined at x = 2 and values greater than 2

44. Solution:
1−cos x
f(f(cos 𝑥)) = f ( ) = cos x (d)
1+cos x

45. Solution:
x−2 x−2
f(x) = 2−x = −(x−2) = −1 if x ≠ 2 c)

46. Solution:
1 1
f (f (x)) = f [1 − 1 ]
𝑥
x
= f(1 − x) = c)
x−1

47. Solution:
x−1
−1 1
f(f(x)) = x+1
x−1 = −x (b)
+1
x+1

48. Solution:
1
f(f(x)) = x2 + 1 > 1∀x ≠ 0 c)

51. Solution:
Replace x by –x we have
1 1
[f(x) + f(−x)] = [f(−x) + f(x)] (a)
2 2

52. Solution:
1
Given y = x−2
Take 2y 3 + y 2 = 0
1
y 2 (2𝑦 + 1) = 0 => − (𝑦 ≠ 0)
2
1
So y =
x−2
1 1
=> − 2 = 𝑥−2 => 𝑥 = 0 c)

MUHAMMAD ALI 147

 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014

53. Solution:
Given f(x) = x 2 + 1
(fof)(x) = f(f(x))
= (x 2 + 1)2 + 1
=x 4 + 1 + 2x 2 + 1
= x 4 + 2x 2 + 2 a)

54. Solution:
1 1 2
f (x + x) = (x + x) − 2
1
let z = x +
x
=> f(z) = z 2 − 2
=> f(x) = x 2 − 2 c)

55. Solution:
x
Given f(x) = x−1
a
f(a) a−1
= a+1
f(a+1)
a
a a
= ×
a−1 a+1
a 2
= a2 −1
2)
= f(a c)

56. Solution:
Let k = f −1 (17)
=> f(k) = 17
=> k 2 + 1 = 17
=> k = ±4
Similarly
f −1 (−3) = m
=> f(m) = −3
m2 + 1 = −3
m2 = −4 (not possible) d)

57. Solution:
Let y = 10x − 7
y+7
=> x =
10
x+7
g(x) = c)
10

58. Solution:
f(g(x)) = g(f(x))
f(2x ) = g(x 2 )
2
=> (2x )2 = 2x
=> x 2 = 2x
= x(x − 2) = 0
= x = 0, 2 c)

MUHAMMAD ALI 148

 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014

59. Hint:
3 3 3
(gof) ( ) = g (f ( )) ; which is not defined because ∉N (d)
2 2 2

60. Solution:
Let y = x 3 + 5
=> x = (y − 5)1/3 (b)

62. Hint: Option ‘c’ satisfies (fog)(x) = (gof)(x) c)

63. Hint: Simplify it by putting values (b)

64. Hint: f[f(x)] = x

ax
f [x+1] = x
=> a = −1 (d)

65. Solution:
Use componendo and dividend
f(x)+1 x−1+x+1
f(x)−1
= (𝑥−1)−(𝑥−1) = −𝑥
1+f(x)
=> x = 1−f(x)
2x−1
Now f(2x) = 2x+1
Putting value of x and simplify
3f(x)+1
f(2x) = (a)
f(x)+3

MUHAMMAD ALI 149

 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014

Chapter # 16
DIFFERENTIATION

SYNOPSIS
Derivative of a Function
Let y = f(x) be a function defined on the interval [a, b]. Let for a small increment δx in x, the
corresponding increment in the value of y be δy. Then
y = f(x) and y + δy = f(x + δx)
On subtraction, we get
δy = f(x + δx) − f(x)
δy f(x+δx)−f(x)
or =
δx δx
Taking limit on both sides when δx → 0 we have,
δy f(x+δx)−f(x)
lim 0 = lim
δx→ δx δx→0 δx
If this limit exists, is called the derivative or differential coefficient of y with respect to x and is written as
dy
or f’(x). Thus
dx
dy δy f(x+δx)−f(x)
= lim = lim
dx δx→0 δx δx→0 δx

Derivative at a Point
The value of f’(x) obtained by putting x = a, is called the derivative of f(x) at x = a and it is denoted by
dy
f’(a) or {dx}
x=a

Differentiability of a Function at a Point

Let f be a function defined on an interval I ⊆ R. We say that f is differentiable at an interior point c ϵ I
provided
f(x)−f(c)
lim x−c exists and is finite
x→c
We denote this limit by f’(c), called the derivative of f at c

Key Point on Differentiability

1) Every polynomial function, exponential function and constant function is differentiable at each
point of the real line
2) Logarithmic functions, Trigonometric functions and Inverse Trigonometric functions are
differentiable in their domain
3) The sum, difference, products and quotient of two differentiable functions is differentiable
4) The composition of differentiable functions is a differentiable function

Standard Derivatives
The following formulae can be applied directly for finding the derivative of a function
d
1) dx (sin x) = cos x
d
2) (cos x) = − sin x
dx
d
3) (tan x) = sec 2 x
dx
d
4) (cot x) = −cosec 2 x
dx

MUHAMMAD ALI 150

 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014
d
5) (sec x) = sec x tan x
dx
d
6) (cosec x) = −cosec x cot x
dx
d
7) (ex ) = ex
dx
d
8) (ax ) = ax log e a, a > 1
dx
d 1
9) (log e x) = , x > 0
dx x
d n n−1
10) (x ) = nx (General power rule)
dx
d 1
11) (sin−1 x) = ,1 < x < 1
dx √1−x2
d 1
12) (cos−1 x) = ,1 < x < 1
dx √1−x2
d 1
13) (tan−1 x) = , −∞ < x < ∞
dx 1+x2
d −1 1
14) (sec x) = , |x| > 1
dx |x|√x2 −1
d 1
15) (cosec −1 x) = − , |x| > 1
dx |x|√x2 −1
d 1
16) (cot −1 x) = , −∞ < x < ∞
dx 1+x2
d x |x|
17) (|x|) = or , x≠ 0
dx |x| x
d
18) dx
sinh x = cosh x
d
19) dx
cosh x = sinh x
d
20) dx
tanh x = sech2 x
d
21) coth x = −cosech2 x
dx
d
22) dx
cosech x = − coth x . cosech x
d
23) dx
sech x = − tanh x . sech x
d 1
24) sinh−1 x = ,x ∈ ℜ
dx √1+x2
d 1
25) dx
cosh−1 x = 2 , x > 1
√x −1
d −1 1
26) dx
tanh x = 1−x2 , |x| > 1
d 1
27) dx
coth−1 x = 1−x2 , |x| > 1
d 1
28) sech−1 x = − ,1 < x < 1
dx x√1−x2
d 1
29) cosech−1 x = − , x ∈ ℜ − {0}
dx x√1+x2

Rules for Differentiation

i) The derivative of a constant function is zero i.e.
d
(c) = 0
dx
ii) The derivative of constant times a function is constant times the derivative of the function,
i.e.
d d
{c, f(x)} = c {f(x)}
dx dx

MUHAMMAD ALI 151

 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014

Product Rule of Differentiation

If f(x) and g(x) are differentiable function of x, then
d d d
[f(x)g(x)] = f(x) g(x) + g(x) f(x)
dx dx dx

Quotient Rule of Differentiation

If f(x) and g(x) are two differentiable function of x, then
d d
d f(x) g(x) f(x)−f(x) g(x)
dx dx
[ ]
dx g(x)
= [g(x)]2

Differentiation of a Function of a Function

(Chain Rule)
If y is a differentiable function of u and u is a differentiable function of x, then
dy dy du
dx
= du × dx

Successive Differentiation
dy
Let y = f(x) be a function of x, then dx is again a function of x and is called the first derivative of y
w.r.t. x. If the first derivative is differentiable, its derivative is called second derivative of the original
d2 y
function and is denoted by or y2 . If the second derivative is differentiable, its derivative is called the
dx2
d3 y
third derivative of the original function and is denoted by dx3 or y 3 and so on. This process of
differentiation a function more than once is called successive differentiation
First derivative represents the change in the original function and second derivative represents the
change in the gradient or slope.

Some Expansions of Functions

McLaurin’ Series
x2 f′′ (0) x2 f′′′ (0) x4 fiv (0) fn (0)xn
f(x) = f(0) + xf ′ (0) + + + + ⋯+ + ⋯.
2! 3! 4! n!
fn (0) n
or f(x) = ∑∞
n=0 n! x

Some Important McLaurin Series Expansions

x3 x5 x7
sin x = x − 3! + 5! ± 7! + ⋯.
x2 x4 x6
cos x = 1 − 2! + 4! − 6! + ⋯.
x3 2x5 17x7
tan x = x + 3
+ 15
+ 315
+⋯
x 2 x 3 x 4
ex = 1 + x + 2! + 3! + 4! + ⋯

Tailor Series Expansion of a Function f(x) at x = a:

(x−a)2 f′′ (a) (x−1)3 .f′′′ (a) (x−a)n .fn (a)
f(x) = f(a) + (x − 1)f ′ (a) + 2!
+ 3!
+ ⋯+ n!
fn (a)(x−a)n
or f(x) = ∑∞
n=0 n!

MUHAMMAD ALI 152

 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014

Tangents and Normals

Geometrical Meaning of Derivative at a Point
The derivatives of a function f(x) at a point x = a is the slope of the
tangent to the curve y = f(x) at the point (a, f(a))
Consider a curve y = f(x) and a point P(x, y) on this curve. If tangent to the
curve at P(x, y) makes an angle θ with the positive direction of x-axis, then, at
the point.
dy
P(x, y) dx = tan θ = m = gradient or slope of tangent to the curve at P(x, y)

Key Points to Remember

dy
1) If dx > 0 the tangent makes an acute angle with the x-axis
dy
2) If dx < 0 the tangent makes an obtuse angle with the x-axis
dy
3) If dx = 0 the tangent is parallel to x-axis
4) If the tangent is perpendicular to axis, then
dy dx
dx
= ∞ i.e., dy = 0

Increasing and Decreasing Functions (Monotonicity)

Increasing Function
A function f(x) is said to be an increasing function on an interval
I, if
x1 < x2 => f(x1 ) ≤ f(x2 ), ∀ x1 , x2 ∈ I

Strictly Increasing Function

A function f(x) is said to be a strictly increasing function on an interval I,
if
x1 < x2 => f(x1 ) < f(x2 ), ∀ x1 , x2 ∈ I

Decreasing Function
A function f(x) is said to be a decreasing function on an interval I, if
x1 < x2 => f(x1 ) ≥ f(x2 ), ∀ x1 , x2 ∈ I

MUHAMMAD ALI 153

 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014

Strictly Decreasing Function

A function f(x) is said to be a strictly decreasing function on an interval
I, if
x1 < x2 => f(x1 ) > f(x2 ), ∀ x1 , x2 ∈ I

Monotonic Function
A function f(x) is said to be monotonic on an interval I if it is either increasing or decreasing on I

Key Point to Remember

1) If a function f(x) is strictly increasing (strictly decreasing) on an interval I, then f −1 exists and is
also strictly increasing (strictly decreasing)
2) If the function f(x) and g(x), both are increasing or decreasing on an interval I, then the composite
function (gof) (x) is an increasing function on I
3) If the function f(x) is increasing and g(x) decreasing on an interval I, then the composite function
(gof) (x) is decreasing on the interval I
4) A function may be increasing in some interval I1 and decreasing in some other interval I2

Extreme Value of a Function

The point at which a function attains either the local maximum value or local minimum value are called
the extreme points and both local maximum and local minimum values are called the extreme values of
the function f(x)
The local maximum and local minimum values are also known as relative maximum and relative
minimum values respectively

Working Rule to Determine to Points of Local Maxima and Local Minima

Method I (First Derivative Test)

• For the function y = f(x), find f’(x)
• Put f’(x) = 0 and solve this equation for x. Let its roots be a, b, c etc. these points are called
stationary points or critical points
• At x = a, determine the sign of f’(x) for values of x slightly less than a and that for values of x
slightly greater than a
(a) If f’(x) changes signs from positive to negative as x increases through a, then x = a is a point
of maximum

(b) If f’(x) changes sign from negative to positive as x increases through a, then x = a is a point
of minimum

(c) f’(x) does not change sign as x increases through a, then x = a is neither a point of maximum
nor a point of minimum. Such a point is called a point of infection

MUHAMMAD ALI 154

 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014

Methods II (Second Derivative Test)

• For the function y = f(x), find f’(x) and f’’(x)
• Put f’(x) = 0 and solve this equation for x. Let its roots be a, b. c etc
• At x = a
a) If f’’(a) < 0, then x = a is a point of local maxima
b) If f’’(a) > 0, then x = a is a point of local minima
c) If f’’(a) = 0, we cannot say anything (point of inflection)

Critical Point
The point c where f’(c) = 0 or undefined is called critical point

Stationary Point
Any point where if is neither increasing nor decreases but f’(c) = 0 is called stationary point

Equation of Tangent
The equation of a tangent to a curve y = f(x) at a given point P(x1 , y1 ) is given by
dy
y − y1 = ( ) (x − x1 )
dx (x1 ,y1 )

Equation of Normal
The equation of a normal to a curve y = f(x) at a given point P(x1 , y1 ) is given by
1
y − y1 = − dy (x − x1 )
( )
dx (x1 ,y1 )

MUHAMMAD ALI 155

 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014

MCQs
1 1 1
dy
1. If y = (1 + x 4 ) (1 + 𝑥 2 ) (1 − x 4 ), then =
dx
a) 1 b) -1 c) x d) √𝑥

dy
2. If sin y = x sin(a + y), then is
dx
sin a sin2(a+y) sin2(a−y)
a) sin a sin2(a+y)
b) sin a
c) sin a sin2(a + y) d) sin a

3. The slope of the tangent to the curve x = t 2 + 3t − 8, y = 2t 2 − 2t − 5 at that point t = 2 is

7 5 6
a) 6 b) 6 c) 7 d) 1

ax
4. If the slope of the curve y = b−x at the point (1, 1) is 2, then the values of a and b are
a) 1, -2 b) -1, 2 c) 1, 2 d) none of these

5. The function f(x) = tan x − x

a) Sometimes increases and sometimes decreases b) never increases c) never decreases
d) cannot be said

6. The two curves x 3 − 3xy 2 + 2 = 0 and 3x 2 y − y 3 − 2 = 0

π π
a) Cut at right angles b) touch each other c) cut at an angle 3 d) cut at an angle 4

7. The equation of the normal to the curve x 2 = 4y passing through the point (1, 2) is
a) x + y + 3 = 0 b) x − y − 3 = 0 c) x + y − 3 = 0 d) none of these

8. For the curve x = t 2 − 1, y = t 2 − t, the tangent is parallel to x-axis where

1 1 1
a) t = b) t = − c) t = 0 d) t =
√3 √3 2

9. The equation of the normal to the curve y = sin x at (0, 0) is

a) x – y = 0 b) x + y = 0 c) y = 0 d) x = 0

10. The slope of the tangent to the curve x = t 2 + 3t − 8, y = 2t 2 − 2t − 5 at the point (2, −1) is
22 6
a) b) c) -6 d) none of these
7 7

1+x
11. The differential coefficient of tan−1 1−x is
1 1 1 1
a) b) − c) d)
1+x2 1+x2 1+x √1−𝑥 2

12. If f(x) = 2/x 3 and a = (−6)1/4 then f’(a) will be

a) 0 b) +∞ c) −∞ d) 1

d √x
13. dx
of is
√𝑥+1
1 1 1 1
a) 2√𝑥
b) 2 c) 2 d) 2
2√𝑥(√𝑥+1) √x+1 (2√x+1)

MUHAMMAD ALI 156

 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014
dy
14. of sin √x is
dx
1 cos √x+1 cos x−1
a) b) c) d) none of these
2√𝑥 cos √𝑥 2√x √𝑥

dy
15. If x = acos3 θ , y = bsin3 θ then dx will be
b b b sin θ b
a) − b) c) d) − tan θ
a a 𝑎 a

dy
16. If y = sec 2 2x then dx is
a) 2 sec 2 3x . tan2 x b) 4 sec 2 2x . tan 2x x) 2 tan2 2x sec 2x d) None of these

dy
17. If y = sin−1 x 2 then dx will be
2x 2x 2x
a) 1 b) 1 c) − d) None of these
(1−x4 )2 (x4 −1)2 x4 −1

1−cos x π
18. If f(x) = 1−sin x , then f ′ ( 2 ) is
a) 1 b) 0 c) ∞ d) Does not exist

dy
19. If √x + √y = 4, then at y = 1, is
dx
a) – 1 b) – 3 c) 3 d) none of these

20. The derivative of an odd function is always

a) An even function b) an odd function c) does not exist d) none of the
above

dP
21. If PV = 81, then at V= 9 equals
dV
a) 1 b) – 1 c) 2 d) none of these

d
22. (cos−1 x + sin−1 x) is
dx
2 π
a) b) 2 c) 0 d) None of these
√1−x2

23. The differential coefficient of x 6 w.r.t. x 3 is

a) 6x 5 b) 3x 2 c) 2x 3 d) x 3

24. The slope of y = x is

a) 0 b) 1 c) does not exist d) none of these

1−cos x dy
25. If y = tan−1 √1+cos x, then dx =
1 1
a) 0 b) 1 c) 2 d) − 2

26. The point at which the curve y = x 2 − 4x + 3 has gradient – 2 is

a) (0, 1) b) (1, 0) c) (2, 1) d) (-3, 2)

MUHAMMAD ALI 157

 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014
d
27. =? where ‘c’ is a constant
(c)
dx
a) 2c b) c c) 0 d) ∞

28. The differential coefficient of x 9 w.r.t. x 2 is

5 9
a) 5x 9 b) 2 x 6 c) 2 x 7 d) 3x 6

d
29. dx
sec 2x=?
a) 2. sec 2x . tan 2x b) 2.sec 2x. tan2 x c) 2. sec x . tan x d) sec 2x . tan 2x

30. The tangent to the graph y = x 3 + 1 at the point (1, 2) is

a) 1 b) 2 c) 3 d) 4

31. If f(x) = ax 2 − 3x − 5, and f’(2) = 9, then a is

a) – 2 b) 2 c) 3 d) 4

32. The tangents to the graph y = 2x − x 2 at the points where it crosses the x-axis meet at
a) (-1, 1) b) (-1, 2) c) (1, 1) d) (1, 2)

33. For what value of x do the graphs y = 6x 2 − 7x and y = x 3 + 5x have the same gradient?
a) – 1 b) 0 c) 1 d) 2

π
34. If f(x) = a. cos 3x and f ′ ( ) = 6, then a equals
2
a) – 6 b) – 2 c) 2 d) 3

35. The derivative of x 2/3 and x = 8 is

a) 3 b) 1/3 c) -3 d) None of these

dy
36. If y = x 4 + 2x 2 + 2, then will be
dx
a) 4x√𝑦 − 1 b) 2x √𝑦 − 1 c) x√𝑦 − 1 d) None of these

d d d
37. [f(x). g(x)]
= f(x). dx g(x) + g(x) dx f(x): the rule is called
dx
a) Quotient rule b) Product rule c) Power rule d) Chain rule

dy
38. dx
of x 2 + y 2 = 4 is
y x x y
a) − x b) − y c) y d) x

39. The derivative of sin3 x w.r.t. cos2 x is

3 3 2 2
a) 2 sin 𝑥 b) − 2 sin 𝑥 c) 3 sin 𝑥 d) − 3 sin 𝑥

d
40. dx
tan−1 x is
1 1 1
a) 1+x b) 1+x2 c) − 1+x2 d) None of these

MUHAMMAD ALI 158

 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014

41. Derivative of sin √x is

cos √x cos √𝑥
a) cos √x b) 2√𝑥
c) − 2√𝑥
d) None of these

d4 y
42. If y = x 3 + sin 𝑥, then 4 is
dx
a) sin 𝑥 b) cos 𝑥 c) tan 𝑥 d) sec 𝑥

d2 y
43. If y = a cos 𝑥 + b. sin 𝑥, then dx2 is
a) 𝑥 b) −x c) y d) – y

44. If y = e−x then its fifth derivative is

a) −e−x b) e−x c) ex d) −ex

45. Derivative of ln(ln x) is

1 1 1 𝑥
a) 𝑥 b) x.ln a c) x.ln 𝑥 d) ln 𝑥

46. If 𝑦 = 7𝑥 6 + 3𝑥 4 − 5𝑥 3 + 2, then which one is true

a) y5 = 0 b) y6 = 0 c) y7 = 0 d) y8 = 0

47. Derivative of ax is
a) ln a b) 𝑥. ln a c) ax . ln a d) a. ln x

48. Derivative of 74x−3 is

4x−3
a) b) 4x. ln 7 c) (4x − 3). ln 7 d) 4. 74x−3 ln 7
ln 7

49. In case of strictly decreasing functions, the derivative is

a) Positive b) Negative c) Zero d) Either negative or zero

50. If 𝑦 = ln 𝑥 then y4 is
3 6 5 4
a) − 4 b) − 4 c) − d)
x x x4 x4

51. Derivative of cosh x w.r.t. x is

a) sinh x b) − sinh x c) sech x d) None of these

d2 y
52. for 𝑥 2 + 𝑦 2 = 𝑎2 is
dx2
a2 a2 a2 y3
a) − y
b) − y3 c) y2 d) a2

53. The Maclaurin series expansion of 𝑒 𝑥 is

x2 x3 x2 x3 x2 x3
a) 1 + x − 2 + 3 − ⋯. B) 1 − x − 2
− 3
− ⋯. C) 1 + x + 2! + 3! + ⋯ d)
None of these

54. The maximum value of the function f(x) = sin x . cos x is

1
a) 1 b) 2 c) 2 d) None of these

MUHAMMAD ALI 159

 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014

d2 y
55. If ax 2 + 2hxy + by 2 = 1, then dx2 is equal to
ab−h2 h2 −ab h2 +ab
a) (hx+by)2
b) (hx+by)2 c) (hx+by)2 d) None of these

56. If y = x − x 2 , then the derivative of y 2 with respect to x 2 is

a) 2x 2 + 3x − 1 b) 2x 2 − 3x + 1 c) 2x 2 + 3x + 1 d) None of these

dy
57. If ex + ey = ex+y, then the value of dx at (1, 1) is
a) 0 b) – 1 c) 1 d) None of these

dy π
58. If y = [(tan x)tan x ]tan x , then dx at x = 4
is equal to
a) 1 b) 2 c) 0 d) None of these

dy
59. If xexy = y + sin2 x, then at x = 0, is equal to
dx
a) – 1 b) 1 c) 0 d) None of these

d2 y
60. If y = x + ex , then dx2 is
1 ex ex
a) (1+ex )2
b) − (1+ex )2 c) − (1+ex )3 d) ex

dy
61. If x y = ex−y, then is equal to
dx
x x−y (x+y) 1
a) log (1+log x)2 b) (1+log x)2 c) (1+log x)2 d) 1+log x

62. The derivative of an odd function is always

a) An even function b) An odd function c) Does not exits d) None of these these

dy
63. If 2𝑥 + 2𝑦 = 2𝑥+𝑦 , then the value of dx at x = y = 1 is
a) 0 b) – 1 c) 1 d) 2

dy
64. If y = (sin x)tan x then dx is equal to
a) (sin x)tan x . (1 + sec 2 𝑥 . log sin 𝑥) b) tan 𝑥 . (sin 𝑥)tan 𝑥−1 . cos 𝑥 c)
(sin 𝑥)tan 𝑥 . sec 2 𝑥 . log sin 𝑥
d) tan 𝑥. (sin 𝑥)tan 𝑥−1

dy 18π
65. If 𝑥 = a cos2 2t and 𝑦 = b sin2 2t, then dx at t = 7
is
a b b
a) b) − c) d) None of these
b a a

66. The point where f is neither increasing nor decreasing but its derivative is zero at a certain value
is called
a) Point of inflection b) Critical point c) Stationary point d) None of these

dy
67. If dx = 0, the tangent is parallel to
a) x-axis b) y-axis c) y = x d) None of these

MUHAMMAD ALI 160

 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014

68. The tangent to the curve y = x 3 − 2x 2 + x − 2 is parallel to x-axis at the point

1 50 1 50
a) (1, -2) b) (-1, 2) c) (3 , − 27) d) (3 , 27)

dy
69. If y = tan−1 x and z = cot −1 x, then =
dz
π
a) 2
b) 1 c) – 1 d) None of these

dy
70. If y = x sin y, then dx =
1−x cos y 1−x sin y 1−sin y
a) sin y
b) x cos y
c) 𝑥 cos y
d) None of these

dy
71. If x y . y x = K, then the value of dx at (e, e) is
a) 1 b) -1 c) log e + 1 d) None of these

d2 y
72. If y = xe5x, then 2 =
dx
a) 5e5x (5x + 2) b) 25 e5x c) e5x (25x + 2) d) None of these

dy
73. If x 3 + xy 2 + y 3 = 3a3 , then dx at (a, a) is
a) 4/5 b) -4a/5 c) -4/5 d) none of these

π
74. If f(x) = tan3 2x, then f ′ ( 8 ) =
a) 3 b) 6 c) 12 d) None of these

c dy
75. If x = ct, y = , then is
t dx
1 1 1 1
a) t
b) −t c) − t d) − t3

dy π
76. If x = cos3 t, y = sin3 t , at t = is equal to
dx 4
a) -1 b) 1 c) ½ d) -1/2

dy
77. If y = tan−1 3x, then dx =
1 1 3 3
a) b) 1+9x2 c) d) 1+9x2
√1−9x2 √1−9x2

dy
78. If y = sin−1(cos x), then dx =
1 1
a) sin x
b) cos −1 x c) – 1 d) 2

79. The slope of the tangent to the curve x = t 2 + 3t − 8, y = 2t 2 − 2t − 5 at the point t = 2 is

7 5 6
a) 6 b) 6 c) 7 d) 1

80. For the curve x = t 2 − 1, y = t 2 − t, the tangent is parallel to x-axis where

1 1 1
a) t = 3 b) t = − 3 c) t = 0 d) t = 2
√ √

MUHAMMAD ALI 161

 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014

81. The slope of the tangent to the curve x = t 2 + 3t − 8, y = 2t 2 − 2t − 5 at the point (2, −1) is
22 6
a) 7 b) 7 c) – 6 d) none of these

dy
82. If y = ecot 3x , then dx is
a) y cosec 2 3x b) −3y cosec 2 3x c) 3y cosec 2 3x d) None of these
2
83. The derivative of 𝑒 𝑥 w.r.t. ex is
2
ex ex(1−x)
a) 2xex b) 2x
c) 2x
d) None of these

84. The point on the curve y = 𝑥 2 which is nearest to (3, 0) is

a) (1, -1) b) (-1, 1) c) (-1, -1) d) (1, 1)

1−t 2t d2 y
85. If x = 1+t , y = 1+t, then dx2 at t = 5 is
a) 0 b) – 5 c) -1 d) none of these

dy
86. If x = acosh3 t and y = a sinh3 t, then =
dx
a) tanh t b) tanh2 t c) coth t d) − tanh t
−1 dy
87. If y = easin x , then dx at x = 0 is
a) 1 b) 0 c) a d) – 1

π
88. Which of the following is decreasing in (0, 2 )?
dy
a) sin x b) cos x c) tan x d) dx 𝑒 𝑥

dy
89. If x = ecos t and y = esin t , then =
dx
sin t−cos t
a) − cot t . e b) cot t . esin t−cos t c) tan t . esin t−cos t d)
− tan t . 𝑒 sint−cos t

d2 y π
90. If x = a cos3 θ , y = a sin3 θ, then dx2 at θ = 4
is
3a 4√2 3a a
a) 4√2
b) 3a
c) d) 4
√2 √2

d2 y π
91. If x = a cos3 θ , y = a sin3 θ, then at θ= is
dx2 4
3a 4√2 3a a
a) b) c) d)
4√2 3𝑎 √2 4√2

dy
92. If y = x1/x, then dx vanishes when
1
a) x = 0 b) x = 1 c) x = e d) x =
e

93. If y = ln 𝑥, then y4 is
3 6 5 4
a) − x4 b) − x4 c) − x4 d) x4

MUHAMMAD ALI 162

 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014

ANSWERS
1. B 16. B 31. C 46. C 61. A 76. A
2. B 17. A 32. C 47. C 62. A 77. D
3. C 18. D 33. D 48. D 63. B 78. C
4. C 19. D 34. C 49. B 64. A 79. C
5. C 20. A 35. B 50. B 65. A 80. D
6. A 21. B 36. A 51. A 66. C 81. B
7. C 22. C 37. B 52. B 67. A 82. B
8. D 23. C 38. B 53. C 68. (A, C) 83. C
9. B 24. B 39. B 54. C 69. C 84. D
10. B 25. C 40. B 55. B 70. D 85. A
11. A 26. B 41. B 56. B 71. B 86. A
12. D 27. C 42. A 57. B 72. A 87. C
13. B 28. C 43. D 58. B 73. C 88. B
14. D 29. A 44. A 59. B 74. C 89. A
15. D 30. C 45. C 60. C 75. C 90. C
91. B
92. C
93. B

SOLUTIONS / HINTS
1. Solution
1 1 1
y = (1 + x 4 ) (1 + x 2 ) (1 − 𝑥 4 )
1 1
= (1 − x 2 ) (1 + 𝑥 2 )
y=1−x
dy
=> dx = −1 (b)

2. Solution
sin 𝑦
x = sin(a+y) Diff w.r.t. y
dx sin a
=> dy = sin2(a+y)
dy sin2(a+y)
=> dx = sin a
b)

dy dy dt 4t−2
3. Hint: Use chain Rule = × =
dx dt dx 2t+3
dy 6
Put t = 2 => |dx| =7 c)
𝑡=2

4. Solution
dy ab
Here = (b−x)2
dx
dy ab
=> |dx| = (b−1)2
1,1

MUHAMMAD ALI 163

 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014
ab
=> 2 = (b−1)2
2
=> 2(b − 1) = ab c)

5. Solution
f(x) = tan 𝑥 − 𝑥
=> f ′ (x) = sec 2 x − 1 => tan2 x ≥ 0 ∀ x ∈ R
=> f(x) never decreases c)

6. Solution
Take derivatives of the given curves
Here product of derivatives = -1
Hence, the two curves cut at right angles a)

7. Hint: Equation in option c is satisfied by the given point (1, 2) c)

8. Solution
dy dy dt 2t−1
Here dx = dt × dx = 2t
dy
Put =0
dx
2t−1
=> =0
2t
=> 2t − 1 = 0
1
t=2 c)

9. Solution
Equation of normal is given as
1
y − y1 = − dy (𝑥 − 𝑥1 )
dx
dy
Here = cos x
dx
dy
=> | | = cos 0 =1
dx 0,0
Equation of normal is y – 0 = - 1(x – 0)
y = −x
y+x = 0 b)

10. Solution
Use chain rule
dy dy dt 4t−2
dx
= dt
× dx = 2t+3
dy (4(2)−2) 6
=> |dx| = (2(2)+3) =7 b)
(2,1)

12. Solution Here

6
f ′ (x) = − x4
6 (−6)
∴ f ′ (a) = − 1 4
= −6
=1 d)
[(−6)4 ]

MUHAMMAD ALI 164

 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014
15. Solution
By chain Rule
dy dy dθ
dx
= dθ × dx
b
= − a tan θ d)

π
22. Hint: cos−1 x + sin−1 x = 2
d d π
=> dx (cos−1 x + sin−1 x) = dx ( 2 ) c)

23. Hint
Let u = x 6 and v = x 3
du
We need to find
dv
du du dx
By chain rule = × = 2x 3 c)
dv dx dv

25. Hint: Multiplying and dividing by (1 + cos 𝑥) and simplify and then take derivative c)

dy
26. Hint: Here dx = 2𝑥 − 4

dy
32. Solution: Here dx = 2 − 2𝑥
dy
Put dx = 0
=> 2 − 2x = 0 => x = 1
Put in y = 2x − x 2 => y = 1
∴ Point = (1, 1) c)

dy d
33. Hint: Put (6x 2 − 7x) = (x 3 + 5x)
dx dx
=> 12x − 7 = 3x 2 + 5
∴ Point = (1, 1) c)

39. Solution
Let u = sin3 x and v = cos2 x
Then by Chain Rule
du du dx
dv
= dx × dv
3 sin3 𝑥.cos x 3
= −2 cos x.sin x = − 2 sin x a)

42. Hint: No need to take derivatives again and again; because the fourth derivative of x 3 will be
zero. So just take derivatives of sin 𝑥 a)

43. Hint: Take second derivative and simplify it d)

56. Solution
Let u y 2 and v = x 2

MUHAMMAD ALI 165

 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014
du dy
=> dx
= 2y dx = 2𝑦(1 − 2𝑥) because
dy
dx
= 1 − 2𝑥 and
dv
dx
= 2𝑥
By chain Rule
du du dx
dx
= dx × dv = 2x 2 − 3x + 1 (b)

57. Solution
d d
(ex + ey ) = (ex+y)
dx dx
dy dy
ex + ey dx = ex+y [1 + dx]
dy ex+y −ex
=> dx = ey −ex+y
dy e2 −e
=> |dx| = e−e2 = −1 b)
1,1

58. Solution
Given y = [(tan 𝑥)tan 𝑥 ]tan x
Taking ln on both sides
ln 𝑥𝑦 = ln[(tan 𝑥)tan 𝑥 ]tan 𝑥
=> ln 𝑥𝑦 = tan2 𝑥 . ln tan 𝑥
1 dy 1
=> . = 2 tan 𝑥 . sec 2 x . ln tan 𝑥 + tan2 𝑥 sec 2 𝑥
y dx tan 𝑥
dy
=> dx
= [(tan 𝑥)tan 𝑥 ]tan 𝑥 [2 tan 𝑥 . sec 2 x . ln tan 𝑥 + tan 𝑥 sec 2 𝑥]
dy
=> |dx| π = 2 (b)
x=
4

59. Solution
xexy = y + sin2 𝑥
Diff. w.r.t.x
d d
[x xy ] = [y + sin2 x]
dx dx
d dx dy d
x dx exy + exy . dx = dy + x sin2 𝑥
dy dy
x [exy {x dx + y}] + exy = dx + 2 sin 𝑥 cos 𝑥
dy dy
x 2 exy dx + xy. exy + exy = dx + 2 sin 𝑥 cos 𝑥
dy 2 sin 𝑥 cos 𝑥−xy exy −exy
dx
= x2 exy −1
dy 0−0−1
=> |dx| = 0−1 = +1 b)
𝑥=0

63. Solution
If 2x + 2y = 2x+y
Diff w.r.t x
dy dy
=> ln 2 [2𝑥 + 2𝑦 dx] = ln 2 [2x+y {1 + dx}]
dy dy dy
=> 2x + 2y dx = 2x+y + 2x+y dx
[2y − 2x+y ]
dx
= 2𝑥+𝑦 − 2𝑥

MUHAMMAD ALI 166

 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014
dy 2x+y −2x
=> = y x+y
dx 2 −2
dy 22 −2 2
=> |dx| = 2−22 = −2 = −1 b)
(1,1)

64. Solution
y = (sin x)tan 𝑥
Taking ln on both sides
ln 𝑦 = tan 𝑥 . ln(sin 𝑥)
Diff. w.r.t. x
1 dy 1
=> y dx = tan 𝑥 [sin 𝑥 . cos 𝑥] + ln sin 𝑥 . sec 2 𝑥
dy
=> dx = 𝑦[1 + sec 2 𝑥 . ln sin 𝑥]
= (sin 𝑥)tan 𝑥 [1 + sec 2 x . ln sin 𝑥] (a)

dy dy dt
65. Hint: Use chain Rule dx = dt
× dx (b)

71. Solution
Take x y . y x = k
Diff w.r.t.x
d d
[x y . y x ] = (k)
dx dx
d dxy
=> x y dx y x + y x . dx =0
dy −𝑦 𝑥 .𝑦𝑥 𝑦−1
=> = 𝑦 𝑥
dx 𝑥 .𝑦 .ln 𝑦
dy
=> |dx| = −1 (b)
(𝑒,𝑒)

dy
79. Hint: Find dx at t = 2 c)

dy dy
80. Hint: Use Chain Rule; find and put =0
dx dx
1
=> t = 2
(d)

dy
81. Hint: Find dx at (2, 1)

83. Hint: Use Chain Rule

2
let u = ex and v = ex
by chain rule
du du dx
dx
= dx × dv c)

84. Hint: Apply distance formula; (1, 1) is nearest to (3, 0) d)

−1 𝑥 dy −1 𝑥 a
87. Hint: y = easin ; = 𝑒 asin . c)
dx √1−𝑥 2

MUHAMMAD ALI 167

 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014
89. Hint:
dy dy dt
Use = × (a)
dx dt dx

92. Solution
Take y = x1/x
1
=> ln 𝑦 = ln 𝑥 1/𝑥 => ln 𝑦 = 𝑥 ln 𝑥
Diff. w.r.t. x
d d 1
dx
ln 𝑦 = dx (x . ln 𝑥)
1 dy 1 d d 1
=> y . dx = 𝑥 dx ln 𝑥 + ln 𝑥 dx (𝑥)
1 dy 1 1 1
. = [ ] + ln 𝑥 [(− 2 )]
y dx 𝑥 𝑥 𝑥
1 dy 1 ln 𝑥
= 2− 2
𝑦 dx 𝑥 𝑥
dy 1 ln 𝑥
|dx| = 𝑦 [𝑥 2 − 𝑥 2 ] = 0 (c)
𝑥=𝑒

MUHAMMAD ALI 168

 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014

Chapter # 17
INTEGRATION

SYNOPSIS
The process of finding an antiderivative is called integration

Mathematical Notation
Integration is the inverse process of differentiation. That is, the process of finding a function,
whose differential coefficient is knows, is called integration. If the differential coefficient of F(x) is f(x),
i.e.
d
[F(x)] = f(x)
dx
Then we say that the antiderivative or integral of f(x) is F(x), written as
∫ f(x)dx = F(x)
Here ∫{ } dx is the notation of integration. f(x) is the integrand, x is the variable of integration and dx
denotes the integration with respect to x.

Indefinite Integrals
d
We know that if dx [F(x)] = f(x), then
∫ f(x)dx = F(x) . Also, for any arbitrary constant C,
d d
[F(x) + C] = [F(x)] + 0 = f(x)
dx dx
∴ ∫ f(x) = F(x) + C,
This shows that F(x) and F(x) + C are both integrals of the same function f(x). Thus, for different
values of C, we obtain different integrals of f(x). This implies that the integrals of f(x) is not definite. By
virtue of this property F(x) is called indefinite integrals of f(x)

Properties of Indefinite Integration

d
1) [∫ f(x)dx] = f(x)
dx
d
2) ∫ f ′ (x)dx = ∫ dx [f(x)]dx = f(x)
3) ∫ k f(x)dx = k ∫ f(x) dx, where k is any constant

Standard Formulae of Integration

The following results are a direct consequence of the definition of an integral
xn+1
1) ∫ x n dx = + C, n ≠ −1
n+1
1
2) ∫ x dx = log|x| + C
3) ∫ ex dx = ex + C
ax
4) ∫ ax dx = log a + C
e
5) ∫ sin x dx = − cos x + C
6) ∫ cos x dx = sin x + C
7) ∫ sec 2 x dx = tan x + C
8) ∫ cosec 2 x dx = − cot x + C
9) ∫ sec x tan x dx = sec x + C

MUHAMMAD ALI 169

 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014
10) ∫ cosec x cot x dx = −cosec x + C
11) ∫ tan x dx = − log|cos x| + C = log|sec x| + C
12) ∫ cot x dx = log|sin x| + C
13) ∫ sec x dx = log|sec x + tan x| + C
14) ∫ cosec x dx = log|cosec x − cot x| + C
dx
15) ∫ = sin−1 x + C; |x| < 1
√1−x2
dx
16) ∫ (1+x2 ) = tan−1 x + C
dx
17) ∫ = sec −1|x| + C ; |x| > 1
x√x2 −1

Method of Integration by Parts

The process of integration of the product of two functions is known as integration by parts
For example, if u and v are two functions of x, then
du
∫(uv)dx = v. ∫ v dx − ∫ ( . ∫ v dx) dx
dx
In words, integral of the product of two functions = first function × integral of the second – integral of
(differential of first × integral of the second function)

Key Point to Remember

1) Choose the first and second function in such a way that the derivative of the first function and the
integral of the second function can be easily found.
2) In case of integrals of the form ∫ f(x). x n dx, take x n as the first function and f(x) as the second
function
3) If the two functions are of different type, we can choose the first function as the one whose initial
comes first in the word “ILATE”, where
I – Inverse Trigonometric function
V – Logarithmic function
A – Algebraic function
T – Trigonometric function
E – Exponential function

Some Special Integrals

dx 1 x
1) ∫ x2 +a2 = a tan−1 a + C
dx 1 x−a
2) ∫ 2 2 = log | | + C
x −a 2a x+a
dx 1 a+x
3) ∫ 2 2 = log | | + C
a −x 2a a−x
dx x
4) ∫ 2 2 = sin−1 a + C
√a −x
dx
5) ∫ 2 2 = log|x + √x 2 + a2 | + C
√x +a
dx
6) ∫ 2 2 = log|x + √x 2 − a2 | + C
√x −a
x a2 x
7) ∫ √a2 − x 2 dx = 2 √a2 − x 2 + 2
sin−1 a + C
x a2
8) ∫ √x 2 + a2 dx = 2 √x 2 + a2 + 2
log|x + √x 2 + a2 | + C
x a2
9) ∫ √x 2 − a2 dx = 2 √x 2 − a2 − 2
log|x + √x 2 − a2 | + C

MUHAMMAD ALI 170

 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014

Note: Integrals of the form

∫ eax [x f(x) + f ′ (x)]dx = eax f(x) + C

Introduction of Definite Integral

We have defined integration as the inverse of differentiation. Now we shall define integration as a
process of summation or definite integral as the limit a sum. We shall also discuss properties of definite
integral. Finally, using the concept of definite integral, we shall find the area under certain curves

Definite Integrals
Let F(x) be any antiderivative of f(x), then for any two values of the independent variable x, say a
and b, the difference F(b) – F(a) is called the definite integral of f(x) from a to b and is denoted by
𝑏
∫𝑎 ∫ f(x) dx
Thus
𝑏
∫ ∫ f(x) dx = F(b) − F(a)
𝑎
Where F(x) is anya ntiderivative of f(x), the number a and b are called the limits of integration; a is the
lower limit and b is the upper limit. Usually F(b) – F(a) is abbreviated by writing F(x)lba

Fundamental Theorem of Integral Calculus

If f(x) is continuous on [a, b] and if F(x) be antiderivative of f(x), then
𝑏
∫ f(x)dx = F(b) − F(a)
𝑎
The reason for using the term definite integral follows from the fact that the value or definite integral is
independent of the particular choice of the antiderivative of f(x). For if F(x) + c is any other antiderivative
of f(x), then
𝑏
∫ f(x) dx = F(x) + c|ba = [F(b) + c] − F(a) + c]
𝑎
= F(b) − F(a)
Which is same as before
Properties of Definite Integrals
𝑏 𝑏
1) ∫𝑎 f(x) dx = − ∫𝑎 f(x) dx
𝑏 𝑐 𝑏
2) ∫𝑎 f(x) dx = ∫𝑎 f(x) dx + ∫𝑎 f(x) dx, where a < c < b
𝑎
3) ∫𝑎 f(x) dx = 0

Note: If the lower limit is a constant and the upper limit is variable, then the integral is a function of the
upper limit only an vice versa

Key Result to Remember

𝑎
1) ∫−𝑎 f(x) dx = 0 if f(x) is an odd function
𝑎 𝑎
2) ∫−𝑎 f(x) dx = 2 ∫0 f(x) dx, if f(x) is an even function
𝜋/2 𝜋/2 π
3) ∫0 ln sin x dx = ∫0 ln cos x dx = − 2 ln 2
𝜋/2
4) ∫0 ln tan x dx = 0
𝜋 𝜋 𝜋
5) ∫−𝜋 sin x dx = ∫−𝜋 cos x dx = ∫−𝜋 tan x dx = 0

MUHAMMAD ALI 171

 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014

Area of Plane Regions

The area bounded by the curve y = f(x), x –axis and the ordinate x = a and x = b (where b > a) is given by
𝑏 𝑏
A = ∫ y dx = ∫ f(x) dx
𝑎 𝑎

Differential Equation
An equation which contains at least one dependent variable and its derivatives with respect to
one or more independent variable is called a differential equation

Order
The order of a differential equation is the order of the highest derivative appearing in it.

Degree
Degree of a differential equation is the degree of the highest derivative that appears in the
equation (When the differential coefficients are made free from radicals and fractions as far as the
derivatives are concerned)

Solution of First Order Differential Equation by the Method of Separation of Variables

A solution of a differential equation is any relation between the variables free from derivatives,
which satisfy the differential equation

Note The general solution of differential equation of order n contains n arbitrary constant which can be
determined by n initial values conditions

Differentials
Let y = f(x) is a differentiable function then dy = f ′ (x) is called differential of the function

Note
1) δy is the rise of function f(x) for a change δx in x at x whereas dy is the rise of the tangent line at
P corresponding to the same change δx in x.
2) f(x + δx) ≈ f(x) + dy
3) f(x + δx) ≈ f(x) + f ′ (x)dx

MUHAMMAD ALI 172

 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014

MCQs
cot 𝑥
1. ∫ dx is equal to
√sin 𝑥
1 2 2
a) 2√sin 𝑥 + C b) 2√sin 𝑥 + c c) − +C d) +𝐶
√sin 𝑥 √sin 𝑥

1
(𝑥−𝑥 3 )3
2. The value of ∫ 𝑥4
dx is
1 1 4/3 3 1 4/3 3 1 4/3
a) 8
(1 − 𝑥 2 ) b) 8 (𝑥 2 − 1) c) − 8 (x2 − 1) d) None of these

−4 −4 1
3. If ∫−1 f(x)dx = 4 and ∫2 (3 − f(x))dx = 7, then the value of ∫−2 f(−x)dx is
a) 30 b) 29 c) 28 d) None of these
2𝑥
4. ∫ (𝑥 2 +3) dx = ?
a) ln(𝑥 2 + 3) + c b) ln 2𝑥 + c c) ln(2𝑥 − 3) +c d)
ln(x 2 + 2x + 3) +c

(𝑥+2)
5. ∫ (𝑥−3) dx = ?
a) 𝑥 + ln(𝑥 − 3) + c b) ln(𝑥 + 2) + 𝑐 c) ln(𝑥 − 3) + 𝑐 d) None of these

6. ∫ ln 𝑥 dx = ?
a) ln 𝑥 +c b) 𝑥. ln 𝑥 − 𝑥 +c c) 𝑥. ln 𝑥 +c d) 𝑥. ln 𝑥 + 𝑥 + 𝑐

7. ∫(1 − cos x)1/2 dx = ?

𝑥
a) −2√2 cos 2 + c b) 2√2 cos 𝑥 + c c) 2√2. sin x + 𝑐 d) None of these

8. ∫ tan4 𝑥 dx = ?
1 1 1
a) 3 tan3 𝑥 − tan 𝑥 + 𝑥 + c b) 3 tan2 𝑥 − tan 𝑥 + 𝑥 + c c) 2 tan2 𝑥 − 𝑥 + c d)
1
2
tan3 𝑥 − tan 𝑥 + c

9. ∫ sec 4 2𝑥 dx = ?
1 1 1 1 1
a) tan 2 𝑥 + tan3 2𝑥 + c b) tan2 𝑥 − tan3 3𝑥 +c c) tan3 𝑥 − 𝑥 + 𝑐 d)
2 6 3 6 2
None of these

dx
10. ∫ x2 +4x+5 = ?
a) tan−1 𝑥 + c b) tan−1 (𝑥 + 2) + c c) tan−1(𝑥 − 2) + c d) tan−1(𝑥 − 3) +
c

11. ∫ 𝑥 2 ex dx = ?
a) 𝑒 𝑥 . (𝑥 2 − 2𝑥 + 2) + c b) 𝑒 𝑥 . (𝑥 2 − 𝑥) + 𝑐 c) 𝑥. 𝑒 𝑥 + 𝑐 d) None of these

MUHAMMAD ALI 173

 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014

1 1
12. ∫ 𝑒^𝑥 {(1−𝑥) + 1−𝑥2 } dx = ?
𝑒𝑥 𝑒𝑥 𝑒𝑥
a) 𝑒 𝑥 + c b) 1−𝑥 + c c) (1−𝑥)2 + c d) (1−𝑥)3 + c

13. ∫(3𝑥 2 − 2𝑥 + 3) dx = ?
a) 𝑥 3 − 𝑥 2 + c b) 3𝑥 3 − 𝑥 2 + 3𝑥 + c c) 𝑥 3 − 𝑥 2 + 3𝑥 + c d) None of these

14. ∫ √4 − 2𝑡 dt = ?
1 2 1
a) − 3 √4 − 2𝑡 + c b) 3 (4 − 𝑡)2/3 + c c) − 6 (4 − 2𝑡)3 + c d) None of these

dx
15. ∫ 3(2x−1)2 = ?
1 1 6
a) (2𝑥−1)
+𝑐 b) (6−12𝑥) + c c) (2𝑥−1) + c d) None of these

cos √𝑥
16. ∫ dx = ?
√x
a) 2 cos √𝑥 b) sin √𝑥 c) 2 sin √𝑥 d) None of these

3𝑥 2
17. ∫ 𝑥 6 +1 dx = ?
a) log(𝑥 6 + 1) + c b) tan−1 𝑥 3 + c c) 3 tan−1 𝑥 3 + c d) tan 𝑥 3 + c

sin−1 𝑥
18. ∫ dx = ?
√1−𝑥 2
1
a) sin−1 𝑥 + c b) (sin−1 𝑥)2 + c c) 2 (sin−1 𝑥)2 + 𝑐 d) None of
these

19. ∫ 𝑒 𝑥 (sinh 𝑥 + cosh 𝑥) dx = ?

a) 𝑒 𝑥 sech 𝑥 + c b) 𝑒 𝑥 cosh 𝑥 + c c) 𝑒 𝑥 sinh 𝑥 + c d) None of these

20. ∫ 𝑥. tan−1 𝑥 dx = ?
1 1 1
a) 2 (𝑥 2 + 1) tan−1 𝑥 − 𝑥 + c b) 2 (𝑥 2 + 1) tan−1 𝑥 − 2 𝑥 + c c)
(𝑥 2 + 1) tan−1 𝑥 − 𝑥 + c d) None

𝑒 𝑥 (1−𝑥)
21. ∫ 𝑥2
dx =?
𝑒𝑥 𝑒𝑥 𝑒𝑥 𝑥
a) 𝑥 + c b) − 𝑥
+c c) 𝑥 2 + c d) 𝑒 𝑥

a
22. ∫ xn dx = ?
axn+1 𝑎𝑥 1−𝑛
a) n+1
b) ax n−1 (n − 1) c) 1−𝑛
d) (𝑎𝑥)𝑛+1

1
23. ∫ 𝑒 𝑥 (tan−1 𝑥 + ) dx = ?
1+𝑥 2
𝑒𝑥 𝑒𝑥
a) 𝑒 𝑥 sec −1 𝑥 + (1+𝑥2 ) + c b) 𝑒 𝑥 tan−1 𝑥 + c c) 𝑒 𝑥 sec −1 𝑥 + c d) (1+𝑥2 ) + 𝑐

MUHAMMAD ALI 174

 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014
24. ∫(tan4 𝑥 + tan2 𝑥) dx = ?
𝑥 𝑥 𝑥 𝑥
a) tan3 3 + c b) tan4 4 + c c) tan5 5 + c d) tan6 6 + c

𝑥
25. ∫ (𝑥 2 +8) dx = ?
a) ln(𝑥 2 + 8) + 𝑐 b) − ln(𝑥 2 + 8) + c c) ln(𝑥 2 + 8)1/2 + c
d) 2 ln(𝑥 2 + 8)1/2 + c

26. ∫ 43𝑥 dx = ?
1 43𝑥 43𝑥
a) 3.43𝑥 + c b) . 43𝑥 + 𝑐 c) +c d) +c
3 ln 3 3 ln 4

1
27. ∫ 𝑥 2 dx = ?
1 2
a) ln|𝑥| + 𝑐 b) ln|x 2 | + c c) − + c d) − +c
𝑥 𝑥3

d
28. dx
∫ 𝑔(𝑥) dx = ?
1
a) 𝑔(𝑥) b) 𝑔(𝑥) c) 𝑔′ (𝑥) d) 𝑔′′(𝑥)

(𝑥+4)
29. ∫ (𝑥+3) dx = ?
a) ln|𝑥 + 3| + 𝑐 b) 4𝑥 + ln|𝑥 + 3| + 𝑐 c) 𝑥 + ln|𝑥 + 3| + 𝑐
d) 𝑥 2 + ln|𝑥 + 3| + 𝑐
−1
𝑒 tan 𝑥
30. ∫ (1+𝑥 2 )
dx =?
tan−1 𝑥 1 −1 𝑥
a) 𝑒 +c b) −1 𝑥 +c c) ln|𝑥 2 + 1| + 𝑐 d) ln|𝑒 tan |+𝑐
𝑒 tan

31. ∫ 𝑥. cos 𝑥 dx = ?
a) 𝑥. sin 𝑥 + c b) 𝑥. sin 𝑥 − cos 𝑥 + 𝑐 c) 𝑥. sin 𝑥 + cos 𝑥 + c
d) −𝑥. sin 𝑥 + cos 𝑥 + c

cot(ln 𝑥)
32. ∫ 𝑥 dx = ?
a) ln[cos(ln 𝑥)] + c b) sin(ln 𝑥) + c c) ln sin(ln 𝑥) + c d) None of these

1
33. ∫ 𝑒 𝑥 (cosec −1 𝑥 − ) dx = ?
𝑥√𝑥 2 −1
cosec−1 x cosec−1 x
a) 𝑒 𝑥 cosec −1 x + c b) cosec −1 x + c c) ex
+ c d) ex
+ c

34. Differential equation of y = sec(tan−1 𝑥) is

dy dy dy
a) (1 + 𝑥 2 ) dx = y + x + c b) (1 + 𝑥 2 ) dx = y − x + c c) (1 + 𝑥 2 ) dx = yx + c
dy x
d) (1 + 𝑥 2 ) dx = y + c

dy
35. The solution of 𝑥 2 + 𝑦 2 dx = 4 is
a) 𝑥 2 + 𝑦 2 = 12𝑥 + c b) 𝑥 2 + 𝑦 2 = 3𝑥 +c c) 𝑥 3 + 𝑦 3 = 3𝑥 + 𝑐
d) 𝑥 3 + 𝑦 3 = 12𝑥 + 𝑐

MUHAMMAD ALI 175

 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014
36. A solution of the differential equation
dy 2 dy
(dx) − x dx + y = 0 is
a) 𝑦 = 2 b) y = 2 x c) y = 2x – 4 d) y = 2𝑥 2 − 4

37. The differential equation of all straight lines passing through origin is
dy dy dy
a) 𝑦 = √𝑥 dx b) dx = 𝑦 + 𝑥 c) dx = y − x d) None of these

d2 y
38. The solution of the equation dx2 = e−2x is y =
𝑒 −2𝑥 𝑒 −2𝑥 𝑒 −2𝑥
a) b) + 𝑐𝑥 + 𝑑 c) + 𝑐𝑥 2 + 𝑑 d) None of these
4 4 4

dy
39. The solution of the differential equation dx = cos 𝑥 is
a) 𝑦 = sin 𝑥 b) 𝑦 = tan 𝑥 c) 𝑦 = sec 𝑥 d) None of these

40. The solution of a differential equation which contains a number of arbitrary constants equal to the
order of the differential equation is called the
a) Particular solution b) General solution c) Solution of differential equation
d) None of these
1
41. ∫−1(1 − 𝑥) dx
a) – 2 b) 0 c) 2 d) 4

42. The area bounded by the x-axis and the curve y = 4x - 𝑥 2 is

32 64
a) b) 32 c) d) 64
3 3

43. The slope of the tangent to the curve 𝑦 = 𝑥 2 − 2𝑥 at P (1, 1) is

a) 2 b) 0 c) – 2 d) None of these

dy sin 𝑥
44. Solution of the differential equation dx = sin 𝑦 is
a) cos 𝑥 = cos 𝑦 b) sin 𝑥 = sin 𝑦 c) sin 𝑥 + sin 𝑦 = 𝑐 d) cos y − cos 𝑥 =
𝑐

45. The area bounded by the curve 𝑦 = ln 𝑥, x-axis and ordinate x = e is

a) 𝑒 b) 1 c) ∞ d) none of these

dy
46. Solution of dx = 𝑥 4 + 12 is
𝑥5 𝑥 5 +12𝑥+c 𝑥 2 +12𝑥
a) 𝑥 4 + 12 + c b) 5
+ 12𝑥 + c c) 5
d) 4+𝑐

47. The order of the highest derivative is called _________ of the differential equation
a) Order b) Degree c) Index d) None of these

4𝑥 3
48. ∫ 1+𝑥8 =
9𝑥 4 x4
a) 9+𝑥 4
b) tan−1 (1+x8 ) c) tan−1 (𝑥 4 ) d) None of these

MUHAMMAD ALI 176

 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014
sec 𝑥
49. ∫ sec 𝑥+tan 𝑥 dx =
a) tan 𝑥 − sec 𝑥 + c b) log(1 + sin 𝑥) +c c) sec x + tan 𝑥 + 𝑐 d) None of these

𝑎
50. ∫𝑎 𝑓(𝑥)𝑑𝑥 =
a) 1 b) 0 c) a d) None of these
1
51. ∫0 (1 − 𝑥)(1 + 𝑥)𝑑𝑥 =
𝜋 𝜋 𝜋
a) 2 b) 2 − 1 c) 2 + 1 d) 𝜋 + 1

𝑑𝑥
52. ∫ 4𝑥 2 −4𝑥+26 =
1 2𝑥−1 1 2𝑥+1 1 2𝑥−1
a) 5
tan−1 5 b) 10 tan−1 ( 5
) c) 10 tan−1 5
d) None of these

16
53. ∫0 𝑥 dx =
a) 128 b) – 128 c) 256 d) None of these

54. If the lower limit is a constant and the upper limit is a variable, then the integral is a function of
a) The lower limit b) the upper limit c) Either lower or upper limit d) None
of these
𝜋
55. ∫−𝜋 sin 𝑥 dx =
a) 1 b) 0 c) ∞ d) 𝜋
𝜋
56. ∫−𝜋cos 𝑥 dx –
a) 1 b) 0 c) ∞ d) 𝜋
𝑒
57. ∫1 ln 𝑥 dx =
a) 1 b) 0 c) ∞ d) 𝜋

58. The area between the x-axis and the curve 𝑦 = 𝑥 2 + 1 from x = 1 to x = 2 is
10 10
a) 10 b) 3 c) 4 d) None of these

59. The area between the x-axis and the curve 𝑦 = 4𝑥 − 𝑥 2 is

32 23
a) 3 b) 3 c) 32 c) None of these

60. Solution of the differential equation (𝑥 − 1)dx + ydy = 0 is

a) 𝑥 2 + 𝑦 2 − 2𝑥 = 𝑐 b) 𝑥 2 + 𝑦 2 + 2 c) 𝑥 2 − 𝑦 2 − 2𝑥 = 𝑐 d) None of these

61. The general solution of differential equation of order n contains n arbitrary constants which can
be determined by ______ initial values conditions
a) 𝑛 + 1 b) n c) n – 1 d) none of these

dy
62. Solution of differential equation 𝑥 dx = 1 + y is
a) 𝑦 = 𝑐𝑥 − 1 b) 𝑦 = 𝑥 − 1 c) 𝑦 = 𝑐𝑥 + 1 d) none of these

MUHAMMAD ALI 177

 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014
dy 1+y2
63. Solution of differential equation = −x is
dx e
a) 𝑦 = tan(𝑒 𝑥 + 𝑐) b) 𝑦 = tan(ex − c) c) 𝑦 2 = tan(𝑒 𝑥 + 𝑐) d) None of
these

64. ∫ tan−1 𝑥 dx =
1 1
a) 𝑥 tan−1 𝑥 + 1 log|1 + 𝑥 2 | + 𝑐 b) 𝑥𝑡𝑎𝑛−1 𝑥 − 5 log|1 + 𝑥 2 | + 𝑐 c)
−1 1 2|
𝑥 tan 𝑥− log|1 +𝑥 +𝑐
2
1
d) 𝑥 tan−1 𝑥 + log|1 + 𝑥2| + 𝑐
5

𝑑𝑥
65. ∫ (3𝑥+2)2 +16 =
1 3𝑥+2 1 3𝑥+2 1 3𝑥−2
a) 12
tan−1 ( 4 ) +c b) 4 tan−1 ( 4
)+ 𝑐 c) 12 tan−1 ( 4
)+ 𝑐 d)
1 3𝑥−2
6
tan−1 ( 4 ) + c

𝑑𝑥
66. ∫ =
√4−9𝑥 2
1 3x 1 2x 1 3𝑥 1 2x
a) sin−1 ( ) + c b) sin−1 ( ) + c c) sin−1 ( ) + c d) sin−1 ( ) + 𝑐
3 2 3 3 2 2 2 3

67. ∫ tan 𝑥 √sec 𝑥 dx =

2 1
a) 5 (sec x)3/2 b) c) √sec 𝑥 d) 2√sec 𝑥
√sec 𝑥

68. ∫(cot 2 𝑥 − tan2 𝑥) dx =

a) cot 𝑥 − tan 𝑥 b) tan 𝑥 − cot 𝑥 c) − tan 𝑥 − cot 𝑥 d) None of these

ex
69. ∫ ex +e−x dx =
1 1
a) 2
tan−1 (ex ) b) 2 log(𝑒 2𝑥 + 1) c) tan−1(ex ) d) log(𝑒 2𝑥 + 1)

1−cos 𝑥
70. ∫ √1+cos 𝑥 dx =
𝑥 𝑥 𝑥
a) log sec 2 b) 2 log sec 2 c) 4 log sec 2 d) None of these

1
71. The value of ∫ (𝑥−5)2 dx is
1 1 2
a) +c b) − +c c) (𝑥−5)3 + c d) −2(𝑥 − 5)3 + 𝑐
𝑥−5 𝑥−5

1
𝑒𝑥
72. ∫ 𝑥 2 dx =
1
1
a) 𝑒 1/𝑥 + c b) −𝑒 𝑥 + 𝑐 c) 𝑒 1/𝑥 + 𝑐 d) None of these
4

2
73. ∫ 𝑒 sin 𝑥 sin 2𝑥 dx =
2𝑥
a) sin2 𝑥+ c b) sin 2 𝑥+ c c) 𝑒 sin 2𝑥 + c d) 𝑒 sin +c

MUHAMMAD ALI 178

 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014
x2 −1
74. ∫ x2 +1
dx =
a) tan−1 𝑥 2 b) 𝑥 + tan−1 𝑥 c) 𝑥 − 2 tan−1 𝑥 d) log(1 + 𝑥 4 )
1
75. ∫ 𝑒 𝑥 −1 dx =
a) 𝑒 𝑥 − 1 b) − log(1 − 𝑒 −𝑥 ) c) log(𝑒 𝑥 − 1) d) tan−1 (𝑒 −𝑥 )

1 𝑥3
76. ∫0 1+𝑥 8
dx =
𝜋 𝜋 𝜋 𝜋
a) 16 b) 4 c) 2 d) 8

dy
77. The solution of differential equation (1 + 𝑥 2 ) dx = 2x cot 𝑦, when x = 0, y = 0 is
a) sin 𝑦 = 1 + 𝑥 2 b) tan 𝑦 = 1 + 𝑥 2 c) sec 𝑦 = (1 + 𝑥 2 ) d) cos 𝑦 = (1 + 𝑥 2 )
∞ 1
78. ∫−∞ x2 +1 dx
𝜋
a) ∞ b) c) 0 d) 𝜋
2

𝜋/2
79. ∫0 cos3 𝑥 dx =
2 3 2 1
a) 3
b) 2 c) − 3 d) 3

80. The differential equation of the family of lines through the origin is
a) 𝑦 ′′ + 𝑦 = 0 b) 𝑦 ′ = 𝑥𝑦 c) 𝑦 ′ + 2𝑦 = 0 d) 𝑦 = 𝑥𝑦′

81. The area bounded by the curve 𝑦 = sin 𝑥 and x-axis from x = 0 to 𝑥 = 2𝜋 is
a) 0 b) 1 c) 2 d) 4
𝜋
82. ∫0 sin 3𝑥 cos 2𝑥 dx =
2 6
a) 0 b) c) d) None of these
5 5

2
83. ∫−1|𝑥| 𝑑𝑥
3 5
a) 2
b) 1 c) 2 d) 2

𝜋/2
84. ∫0 𝑒 sin 𝑥 cos 𝑥 dx =
a) 𝑒 b) e + 2 c) e – 1 d) e + 1
4
85. ∫1 𝑥√𝑥 dx =
a) 12.4 b) 8.4 c) 8.8 d) 12. 8
2
86. ∫1 |1 − 𝑥| dx =
3
a) 0 b) – 1 c) 2 d) 2

MUHAMMAD ALI 179

 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014

ANSWERS
1. C 17. B 33. A 49. A 65. A
2. C 18. C 34. C 50. B 66. A
3. B 19. (B, C) 35. D 51. B 67. D
4. A 20. B 36. C 52. C 68. C
5. D 21. B 37. D 53. A 69. B
6. B 22. C 38. B 54. B 70. B
7. A 23. B 39. A 55. B 71. B
8. A 24. A 40. B 56. B 72. B
9. A 25. C 41. C 57. A 73. D
10. B 26. D 42. A 58. B 74. C
11. A 27. C 43. B 59. A 75. B
12. B 28. A 44. D 60. A 76. A
13. C 29. C 45. B 61. B 77. C
14. D 30. A 46. B 62. A 78. D
15. B 31. C 47. A 63. B 79. A
16. C 32. C 48. C 64. C 80. D
81. A
82. C
83. C
84. C
85. D
86. B

SOLUTIONS / HINTS
1. Solution
cot 𝑥
∫ 𝑥
dx = ∫(sin 𝑥)−1/2 cot 𝑥 dx
√sin
1
cos 𝑥
= ∫(sin 𝑥)−2 . sin 𝑥 dx
= ∫(sin 𝑥)−3/2 . cos 𝑥 dx
3
(sin 𝑥)−2+1
= 3 +c
− +1
2
1
= −2(sin 𝑥)−2 +c
2
=− 𝑥
+c (c)
√sin

3. Solution
−4
Given ∫−1 f(x) dx = 4 and
−4
∫−1 (3 − f(x)) dx = 7
−4 −4
=> ∫−2 3dx − ∫−2 f(x) dx = 7
−2
=> ∫−4 f(x) dx = 25
1 2
Now ∫−2 f(−x)dx = ∫−1 f(x) dx
−4 2
= ∫−1 f(x) dx + ∫−4 f(x) dx
= 4 + 25
= 29 b)

MUHAMMAD ALI 180

 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014

8. Solution
∫ tan4 x dx = ∫ tan2 𝑥 tan2 𝑥 dx
= ∫ tan2 𝑥 . (sec 2 x − 1) dx
= ∫ tan2 𝑥 . sec 2 x dx - ∫ tan2 x dx
tan3 x
= 3
− ∫ sec 2 x + ∫ dx
tan3 x
= − tan 𝑥 + 𝑥 + 𝑐 a)
3

9. Solution
∫ sec 4 2𝑥 dx
= ∫ sec 2 𝑥 (1 + tan2 2𝑥) dx
= ∫ sec 2 2𝑥 dx + ∫ tan2 2𝑥. sec 2 2𝑥 dx
1 1
= 2 ∫ sec 2 2x (2) dx + 2 ∫ tan2 2𝑥 . sec 2 2𝑥 (2) dx
1 1
= 2 tan 2𝑥 + 6 tan3 2𝑥 + c a)

17. Solution
3𝑥 2 3𝑥 2
∫ 𝑥 6 +1 dx = ∫ 1+(𝑥3 )2 dx
= tan−1 𝑥 3 + c b)

24. Solution
∫(tan4 x + tan2 x) dx
= ∫ tan2 𝑥 . (tan2 𝑥 + 1) dx
= ∫ tan2 𝑥 . sec 2 𝑥 dx
tan3 𝑥
= +c a)
3

34. Solution
Take 𝑦 = sec(tan−1 𝑥)
Dy 1
dx
= sec(tan−1 𝑥). tan(tan−1 𝑥). 1+𝑥2
dy
= (1 + x 2 ) = 𝑥𝑦 + 𝑐 c)
dx

35. Solution By taking derivatives of the options; it is clear that only option ‘d’ satisfies the given
differential Equation.
dy
OR x 2 + y 2 dx = 4
dy
=> 𝑦 2 = 4 − x 2
dx
=> y 2 dy = (4 − x 2 ) dx
Integrating
∫ 𝑦 2 dy = ∫ 4 dx − ∫ x 2 dx
y3 𝑥3
=> 3 = 4𝑥 − 3 + c
=> y 3 = 12x − x 3 + c
=> x 3 + y 3 = 12x + c (d)

37. Solution
The equation of all the straight lines passing through origin (0, 0) is y = mx

MUHAMMAD ALI 181

 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014
dy
Hence, the required differential equation of all such lines is y = (dx)x because
dy
m= d)
dx

45. Solution
Put y = 0
=> ln 𝑥 = 0
=> ln 𝑥 = ln 1 => 𝑥 = 1
𝑒 𝑒
Area = ∫1 ln 𝑥 dx = [𝑥 ln 𝑥 − 𝑥]1
= (𝑒 ln 𝑒 − 𝑒′) − (1. ln 1 − 1)
= (e − e) − (0 − 1)
=1 (b)

d 4x3
48. Hint: dx tan−1 (𝑥 4 ) = 1+x8 c)

49. Solution
sec 𝑥 sec 𝑥
∫ sec 𝑥+tan 𝑥 dx = ∫ 1 sin 𝑥 dx
+
cos 𝑥 cos 𝑥
sec 𝑥.cos 𝑥 1
=∫ dx = ∫ dx
1+sin 𝑥 1+sin 𝑥
1−sin 𝑥
= ∫ cos2 𝑥 dx = ∫ sec 2 𝑥 dx − ∫ sec 𝑥 . tan 𝑥 dx
= tan 𝑥 − sec 𝑥 + c (a)

52. Solution
dx dx
∫ 4x2 −4x+26 = ∫ (2x−1)2 +25
1 2dx 1 1 2𝑥−1
= ∫ (2x−1)2 = [ tan−1 ( )] c)
2 +25 2 5 5

60. Hint: Separate the variables and integrate OR check the derivatives of options (a)

66. Solution
dx dx
∫ √4−9𝑥2 = ∫
√(2)2 −(3𝑥)2
1 3𝑥
= 3
sin−1 2 + c a)

67. Hint: Check derivatives

d
dx
[2√sec 𝑥] = tan 𝑥 √sec 𝑥 (d)

69. Solution
ex e2x
∫ ex −e−x dx = ∫ 𝑒 2𝑥 +1 dx
1 2e2x
= 2 ∫ e2x +1 dx
1
= 2 ln(𝑒 2𝑥 + 1) + c (b)

𝑥 𝑥
70. Hint: Use 1 − cos 𝑥 = 2 sin2 2 and 1 + cos 𝑥 = 2 cos2 2 (b)

MUHAMMAD ALI 182

 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014

72. Solution
1
1
𝑒𝑥 1
∫ 𝑥2 dx= − ∫ 𝑒 𝑥 (− 𝑥 2 ) dx
1
= −𝑒 𝑥 + c b)

d
73. Hint: dx sin2 𝑥 = sin 2𝑥 (d)

76. Solution
1 x3 1
∫0 1+x8
dx = 4 [tan−1 𝑥 4 ]10
1
= 4 [tan−1 (1) − tan−1 (0)]
𝜋
= 16 (a)

79. Hint: cos3 x = cos 2 𝑥 . cos 𝑥 = (1 − sin2 𝑥) cos 𝑥 (a)

80. Solution
Eq. of line through the origin is y = x
Check option ‘d’
y = xy′
dy
y = x dx
Separate the variables and integrate
dx dy
∫ x
=∫ y
=> ln 𝑥 = ln 𝑦
=> x = y (d)

2𝜋
81. Hint: ∫0 sin 𝑥 dx = 0 (a)

83. Solution
2 0 2
∫−1|𝑥| dx = ∫−1(−x) dx + ∫0 𝑥 dx
5
=2 c)

86. Solution
2 1 2
∫0 |1 − 𝑥| dx = ∫0 −(1 − 𝑥)dx + ∫1 (1 − 𝑥) dx
= −1 (b)

MUHAMMAD ALI 183

 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014

Chapter # 18
INTRODUCTION TO ANALYTIC GEOMETRY

SYNOPSIS
Introduction to Analytical Geometry
• Two lines which are perpendicular/orthogonal to each other form a ‘coordinate system’
• The point of intersection of these two lines is called ‘origin’
• The horizontal lines is called ‘x-axis’
• The vertical line is called ‘x-axis’
• These two lines are called ‘coordinate axes’
• The xy-plane consists of too many points. Each point has two components, called coordinates

• Consider a point P(x, y) in plane. Here y is called y-coordinate or ordinate of point P, and it
shows the distance of the point from x-axis
• Consider a point P(cx, y) is plane. Here x is called x-coordinate or abscissa of point P, and it
shows the distance of the point from y-axis
• On x-axis, y is always zero. On y-axis, x is always zero
• The coordinate axes divide the plane into four equal parts, these parts are called “Quadrants”
• Quadrants 1:
• All points (x, y) with x > 0 (+ve) and y > (+ve) e.g. (3, 5), (4, 0), (7, 7) etc
• Quadrants 2:
All points (x, y) with x < 0 (-ve) and y > 0 (+ve) e.g., (-3, 5) (2, -7), (-7, 6) etc
• Quadrants 3:
All points (x, y) with x < 0 (-ve) and y < 0 (-ve) e.g., (-3, -5), (-2, -7), (-7, -6) etc
• Quadrant 4:
All points (x, y) with x > 0 (+ve) and y < 0 (-ve) e.g., (4, -5), (3, -4) etc
• The Distance Formula
If P1 (x1 , y1 ) and P2 (x2 , y2 ) are two points in xy-plane, then the distance d = |P1 P2 | between
them is given by
P2 (x2 , y2 )

P1 (x1 , y1 )

MUHAMMAD ALI 184

 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014

d = |P1 P2 | = √(x2 − x1 )2 + (y2 − y1 )2

OR we can also write
d = |P1 P2 | = √(x1 − x2 )2 + (y1 − y2 )2
• Distance between two points in a plane is always positive
Division Formula
Point dividing the join of two points in a given ratio. Consider two points A(x1 , y1 ) and B((x2 , y2 ) in
a plane. Let P(x, y) is the point dividing the line segment AB in the ratio k1 : k 2
Then coordinates of P(x, y) are
k1 x2 + k 2 x1 k1 y2 + k 2 y1
P(x, y) = ( , )
k1 + k 2 k1 + k 2

B(x2 , y2 )

K2

P(x, y)
K1

A (x1 , y1 )

Note: P(x, y) is not the midpoint of AB

• If P(x, y) is the mid-point of AB then
x1 + x2 y1 + y2
P(x, y) = ( , )
2 2
Because here k1 : k 2 = 1: 1
• In a triangle ABC
1) The point of intersection of all medians is called “Centroid” of the triangle. (Medians are
concurrent)
2) The point of intersection of all the altitudes is called “Orthocenter”. (Altitudes are concurrent)
3) The point of intersection of all the perpendicular bisectors is called “Circumcenter”.
(Perpendicular bisector are concurrent)
4) The point of intersection of all the angle bisector is called the in-centre

In ∆ABC such that A(x1 , y1 ), B(x2 , y2 ) and C(x3 , y3 ) are the coordinates, the in-center is given as
ax1 + bx2 + cx3 ay2 + by2 + cy3
( , )
a+b+c a+b+c
• The centroid of a ∆ABC is a point that divides each median in the ratio 2 : 1
• Centroid has coordinates
x1 + x2 + x3 y1 + y2 + y3
( , )
3 3
• Bisector of angles of a triangle are concurrent

Key Points to Remember

• Three points will be the vertices of a right triangles if “Pythagoras theorem is satisfied”
i.e., |AC|2 = |AB|2 + |BC|2
(Use distance formula)
• The points will be vertices of an isosceles triangle if two sides are equal

MUHAMMAD ALI 185

 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014
i.e., |AB| = |BC|
• Four points will be the vertices of parallelogram.
If |AB| = |CD|
And |BC| = |AD|
• The parallelogram will be a square if “Diagonals are equal in length”
i.e. |AC| = |AD|
D C

A B
• Collinear Points
The three points P1 (x1 , y1 ), P2 (x2 , y2 ) and P3 (x3 , y3 ) are said to be collinear (lie in a same line) if:
x1 y1 1
|x2 y2 1| = 0
x3 y3 1

Important Tips:
In order to prove that a given figure is a
i) Square: Prove that the four sides are equal and the diagonal are also equal
ii) Rhombus: (But not a square
Prove that the four sides are equal but the diagonals are not equal
iii) Rectangle: Prove that the opposite sides are equal and the diagonal are also equal
iv) Parallelogram: (but not a rectangle)
Prove that the opposite sides are equal, but diagonals are not equal
Note that in each of these cases diagonals bisect each other
• Translation of Axes
Consider we have xy-coordinate system. Let P(x, y) is any point in xy-coordinate system. Origin
is the point of intersection

y Y

O′ (h, k) X

O(0, 0)
Let the axes be translates through this point O′ (h, k). The new axes are O′ X and O′Y. Coordinates
of the point P(x, y) w.r.t. new system are P(X, Y)
Also X = x − h and Y = y − K
Further
x = X+h ; y = Y+K
(Translational eq’s)
Here (x, y) represents the coordinates of point w.r.t. xy-system
(X, Y) represents the coordinates of point w.r.t. XY-system
And O′ (h, k) represents new origin

MUHAMMAD ALI 186

 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014
Note: In translation of axis, the origin is shifted to another point in the plane but the axes remain parallel
to the old axes.

• Rotation of Axes
Consider the xy-coordinate system. Let P(x, y) is any point in xy-plane

Now, we rotate the axes Ox and Oy about the origin O(0, 0) through an angle θ(0 < θ < 90o ) so
that the new-axes are OX and OY
The coordinates of P become P(X, Y)
Here X = x cos θ + y sin θ
Y = y cos θ − x sin θ
These equations are called equations of rotation

Note In rotation of axis, the origin remains at its original position.

• “Collection of points form a line”
• Inclination of a Line”
“The angle made by a non-horizontal line with positive x-axis is called inclination of the line.
The direction of angle ‘α’ is anticlockwise

From figure, α is called inclination of the line and 0 < α < 180o

• If the line ‘𝑙’ is parallel to x-axis then α = 0

• If the line ‘𝑙’ is perpendicular or orthogonal to x-axis then α = 90o

MUHAMMAD ALI 187

 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014

Note In each case, we have to measure the angle of the line that is made with positive x-axis

• Slope of Gradient of a Line

Slope of a line ‘𝑙’ is denoted by ‘m’. The ratio of rise to the run is called slope of the line

Rise y
m= = …… (i)
Run x
Also from figure
y
tan α = ……(ii)
x
Comparing
m = tan α
where α is the inclination of the line
• If line is parallel to x-axis. Then α = 0
So slope of a parallel line is zero
• If line is perpendicular to x-axis, then α = 90o
So m = tan 90o
=> m is undefined (∵ tan 90o → α)
So slope of perpendicular line is undefined

• Method of find slope of a line joining two points

Consider a line 𝑙 form by joining P(x1 , y1 ) and Q(x2 , y2 ); then
y −y
Slope of line x2 −x1
2 1
y −y
Or slope of line = x2 −x1
1 2
Q (x2 , y2 )
Slope

MUHAMMAD ALI 188

 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014
P(x1 , y1 )

• Collinear Points
The three points A, B and C are said to be collinear (lie in a same line) if
Slope of AB = Slope of BC

A B C

• Consider two lines 𝑙1 and 𝑙2 such that

m1 = Slope of 𝑙1 and m2 = Slope of 𝑙2
Then lines are parallel iff m1 = m2

m1

m2

And lines are perpendicular

Iff m1 m2 = −1
Or m1 m2 + 1 = 0
1
Or m1 = − m
2
1
Or m2 = −
m1
𝑙2

𝑙1

• Equation of a straight line parallel to x-axis (or perpendicular to the y-axis)

The eq. is y = a
If a = 0, then y = 0 is the equation of x-axis
If a > 0 (+ve); then y > 0 (+ve) is the equation above x-axis
If a < 0 (-ve); then y < 0 (-ve) is the equation below x-axis
• Equation of a straight line parallel to the y-axis (or perpendicular to the x-axis) the standard
equation is
x = b (b is any no. )
If b = 0; then x = 0 is the equation of y-axis
If b > 0; then x > 0 is the equation of line right to y-axis
If b < 0; then x < 0 is the equation of line left to y-axis

Intercept of a Line on the Axis

• For x-intercept
If a line intersect x-axis at (a, 0), then a is called x-intercept of the line, y-component is zero at x-
axis |a| is called the length of the intercept of the line on x-axis

• For y-intercept
If a line intersects y-axis at (b, 0) then b is called y-intercept of the line x-component is zero at y-
axis |B| is called the length of the intercept of the line of y-axis

MUHAMMAD ALI 189

 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014

Standard Form of Equations of Straight Lines

• Slope-Intercept Form
If we are given only the slope m and y-intercept c of a non-vertical line; then its equation is
y = mx + c
where
m = slope of line
c = y-intercept

Note: If we are given only slope m and x-intercept ‘c’ of a non-vertical line, then its equation is
1
x = my + c
where
m = slope of line
c = x − intercept

• Point Slope Form

If we are given that slope of a non-vertical line l is m and line is passing through a point
P(x1 , y1 ); then its eq is
y − y1 = m(x − x1 )

• Two Point Form

If we are given that slope of a non-vertical line l is m and line is passing through two points
P(x1 , y1 ) and Q(x2 , y2 ); then eq. of line is
y2 − y1
y − y1 = (x − x1 )
x2 − x1
or
y2 − y1
y − y2 = (x − x2 )
x2 − x1
line

P(x1 , y1 )

• Symmetric Form of Equation of a Straight Line (Parametric Form)

x−x1 y−y1
= = r (say)
cos α sin α
y−y
Where m = tan α = x−x1
1

• Intercept Form
If we have non-zero x and y-intercept of a non-vertical line, then its eq. is
x y
(a + b) = 1
Where;
a = x − intercept
and b = y − intercept

MUHAMMAD ALI 190

 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014

• Normal Form
Consider a non-vertical line ‘𝑙’. Take P(x, y) on the line and let p is the length of
perpendicular from the origin to the line and α is the inclination of the perpendicular with x-axis,
then equation of line is
x cos α + y sin α = p
where; a, b and c are constant and are not simultaneously zero

• A Linear Equation with Two Variables x and y Represents a Straight Line

A linear equation in two variables x and y is given by
ax + by + c = 0
where a, b and c are constant and are not simultaneously zero
that is if ax + by + c = 0. Then
a c
m = − ; y − intercept = −
b b

• Position of a Point with respect to a Line

Method I:
Consider a line:
𝑙 : ax + by + c = 0 and a point P(x1 , y1 ). Now if ax1 + by1 + c > 0 (+ve) then P(x1 , y1 ) lies
above the line. (Here b > 0 +ve)
If ax1 + by1 + c = 0 then P(x1 , y1 ) lies below the line. (Here b > 0 +ve)

Method II:
Consider a line 𝑙: ax + by + c = 0 and a point P(x1 , y1 ). Now, if ax1 + by1 + c and b have the
same sign, then P(x1 , y1 ) lies above the line.
If ax1 + by1 + c and b have the opposite sign, then P(x1 , y1 ) lies below the line
• Consider two lines:
𝑙1 : a1 x + b1 y + c1 = 0
𝑙2 : a2 x + b2 y + c2 = 0
The lines will be parallel if a1 b2 − b1 a2 = 0
The lines will be perpendicular iff a1 a2 + b1 b2 = 0
a b c
The lines will be coincident if a1 = b1 = c1
2 2 2
a1 b1
The lines will be intersecting, if ≠
a2 b2
i.e., if they are neither coincident nor parallel

Equation of a Line Parallel to a Given Line

The equation of a line parallel to a given line ax + by + c = 0 is ax + by + k = 0, where k is constant

Equation of a Line Perpendicular to a Given Line

The equation of a line perpendicular to a given line ax + by + c = 0 is bx − ay + k = 0, where k is a
constant

• Two non-parallel lines intersect each other at one and only one point
• By solving two given equation, we can find point of intersection of these two lines
• If the lines are parallel then solution does not exist.

MUHAMMAD ALI 191

 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014
• Condition of Concurrency of three Straight Lines
Let three non-parallel lines
𝑙1 : a1 x + b1 y + c1 = 0
𝑙2 : a2 x + b2 y + c2 = 0
𝑙3 : a3 x + b3 y + c3 = 0
Then these three lines will intersect each other at a same point if the following condition is
satisfied
a1 b1 c1
|a2 b2 c2 | = 0
a3 b3 c3
• An infinite number of lines can pass through a point
Family of Lines
• We can find a family of lines through the point of intersection of the two non-parallel lines 𝑙1 and
𝑙2
Family of lines
a1 x + b1 y + c1 + k(a2 x + b2 y + c2 ) = 0
When k is non-zero real number
• Altitude of a triangle are concurrent
• Right bisector of a triangle are concurrent
• Distance of a Point from a Line
Consider 𝑙: ax + by + c = 0 and P(x1 , y1 )
The distance of point from line is
(|ax1 +by1 +c|)
d= 2 2
√a +b

Key Points to Remember

1) The distance is always positive
2) If the point P (x1 , y1 ) lies on 𝑙, then the distance d would be zero
3) If ax1 + by1 + c = 0, then P(x1 , y1 ) satisfy the equation
4) The length of perpendicular from origin (0, 0) to the given line is √a2 + b 2

Distance between Two Parallel Lines

The distance between two parallel lines
ax + by + c1 = 0 and ax + by + c2 = 0 is given by
|c −c |
d = 12 22
√a +b

MUHAMMAD ALI 192

 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014

Area of Triangular Region

• Area of triangular region whose vertices are P(x1 , y1 ), Q(x2 , y2 ) and R(x3 , y3 ) is given by
x1 y1 1
1
Area = 2 | 2 y2 1|
x
x3 y3 1
• Collinear Points
The three points P, Q and R are collinear iff Area = 0
• Area is always positive, if sign of the area is negative, then it is to be omitted
• Any closed plane figure having four sides is called quadrilateral
• A quadrilateral having two parallel and two non-parallel sides is called trapezium
• Area of trapezium
1
= (Sum of // sides)(Distance between // sides)
2
• Angle between Two Lines
Consider two coplanar lines 𝑙1 and 𝑙2 intersect at a point P. Then the angle θ between two lines
from 𝑙1 to 𝑙2 is
m2 −m1
tan θ = 1+m m
1 2

Where;
m1 = slope of 𝑙1
m2 = slope of 𝑙2
Similarly the angle θ from 𝑙2 to 𝑙1 is
m −m
tan θ = 1 2
1+m1 m2
Acute angle θ is given by
m1 −m2
tan θ = 1+m m
1 2

Equation of Straight Lines in Matrix Form

One linear equation
𝑙: ax + by + c = 0
=> [ax + by] = [−c]
x
[a b] [y] = [−c]
AX = C
System of two linear equations
• Similarly, a system of two or three equations can be written in matrix form
If 𝑙1 : a1 x + b1 y + c1 = 0
𝑙2 : a2 x + b2 y + c2 = 0
𝑙3 : a3 x + b3 y + c3 = 0

MUHAMMAD ALI 193

 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014

• Concurrent Lines
Three lines 𝑙1 , 𝑙2 and 𝑙3 will be concurrent if matrix
a1 b1 c1
[a2 b2 c2 ] is singular
a3 b3 c3
• The graph of any linear equation in x and y is a straight line
• Homogeneous Equation
Let f(x, y) = 0 be any equation in the variable x and y. Equation is called a homogenous equation
of degree n if:
f(kx, ky) = k n f(x, y)
where n is a positive integer and k is any real number
• Second degree equation in x and y
ax 2 + 2hxy + by 2 + 2gx + 2fy + c = 0
represents a pair of straight lines
• Homogenous Second Degree Equation
ax 2 + 2hxy + by 2 = 0 provided a, h and b are not simultaneously zero
Second degree homogeneous equation represents a pair of lines through the origin

Nature of Lines
The lines are real and distinct, if h2 > ab or h2 − ab > 0
The lines are real and coincident if h2 = ab or h2 − ab = 0
The lines are imaginary if h2 < ab or h2 − ab < 0.
• If the lines are imaginary, they will intersect at (0, 0)

Condition for the Lines to be Coincident

2√h2 −ab
As tan θ =
a+b
If θ = 0 => h2 − ab = 0

Condition for the Lines to be Perpendicular / Orthogonal

If θ = 90o
=> a + b = 0
• So if the sum of the coefficients of x 2 and y 2 in the homogeneous equation ax 2 + 2hxy + by 2 =
0 is zero, then the two equation represented will be orthogonal
• The most general equation of second degree
ax 2 + 2hxy + by 2 + 2gx + 2fy + c = 0 may represent a pair of straight lines of the following
condition is satisfied
a h g
|h b f | = 0
g f c

MUHAMMAD ALI 194

 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014

MCQs
1. The point of intersection of all the perpendicular bisectors of the sides of a triangle is called
a) Circumcentre b) In centre c) Orthocentre d) Centroid

2. The point of intersection of all the altitudes of a triangle is called

a) Curcumcentre b) In centre c) Orthocentre d) Centroid

3. The length of the medium through A of a triangle whose vertices are A(-1, 3), B(1, -1) and C(5,
1) is
a) 5 b) 4 c) 1 d) None of these

4. The coordinate of A, B and C are (6, 3), (-3, 5) and (4, -2) respectively and P is any point (x, y).
The ratio of the areas of triangles PBC and ABC is
(x+y−2) |x+y−2| (x+y+2)
a) 7
b) 7 c) 7 d) None of these

5. The values of k for which the points (k, 2 – 2k), (-k+1, 2k) and (-4-k, 6-2k) are collinear, is
1 1
a) 2 b) − 2 c) 1 d) – 1

6. The locus of the point whose distance from x-axis is twice that from y-axis, is
a) y = x b) y = 2x c) x = y d) x = 2y

7. the points (3, 3), (h, 0) and (0, k) are collinear if

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
a) h + k = 3 b) h − k = 3 c) k − h = 3 d) None of these

8. If P(1, 2), Q(4, 6), R(5, 7) and S(a, b) are the vertices of a parallelogram PQRS, then
a) a = 2, b = 4 b) a = 3, b = 4 c) a = 2, b = 3 d) a = 3, b = 5

9. The point which divides the join of (1, 2) and (3, 4) externally in the ratio 1 : 1
a) Lies in the IIIrd quadrant b) lies in the IInd quadrant c) lies in the first quadrant
d) cannot be found

10. The triangle with vertices at (2, 4), (2, 6) and (2 + √3, 5) is
a) Right angled and isosceles b) always isosceles c) equilateral d) none of these

11. The new coordinate of a point (4, 5) when the origin is shifted to the point (1, -2) are
a) (5, 3) b) (3, 5) c) (3, 7) d) None of these

12. The point (-5, 3) is the center of a circle and P(7, -2) lies on the circle. The radius of the circle is
a) 2 b) 13 c) 7 d) 8

13. The center of a circle of radius 10 is on the origin. Which of the following point lies with in the
circle?
a) (10, 0) b) (8, 8) c) (8, 4) d) (0, 10)

14. The centroid of a triangle is a point that divides each ____ in the ratio ___
a) Median, 1:2 b) Altitudes, 2:1 c) Medians, 2:1 d) None of these

MUHAMMAD ALI 195

 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014
15. Centroid of a triangle with vertices A(2, 3), B(-1, 6) and (7, 5) is
1 2 2 7 8 14 7 11
a) (3 , 7) b) (5 , 3) c) (3 , 3 ) d) (3 , 3 )

16. The points (7, 9), (3, -7) and (-3, 3) are the vertices of
a) A right angled triangle b) an isosceles triangle c) an equilateral triangle d) a
right angled isosceles triangle

17. The points (4, -2), (-2, 4) and (5, 5) are the vertices of a triangle. Then the coordinates of the in
centre of the triangle are?
7 2 3 3 5 5
a) ( , ) b) ( , ) c) ( , ) d) (3, −3)
2 7 2 2 2 2

18. Slope of a line parallel to y-axis is

a) 0 b) undefined c) 1 d) – 1

19. The inclination of any line parallel to y-axis is

π π 3π
a) b) 0 c) d)
2 4 2

20. Two lines are parallel iff they have same

a) Distance b) quadrants c) slope d) vertices

21. The inclination of x-axis is

a) 180o b) 0 c) 90o d) 150o

22. Find ‘b’ if the line through (3, 4) and (-1, b) is parallel to the line through (2, 3) and (-5, 1)
20 11
a) 20 b) 17 c) d) −
7 15

23. The equation of the line through the points (2, 4) and (7, 1) is
a) 5𝑦 + 3𝑥 = 0 b) 5𝑦 + 3𝑥 − 26 = 0 c) 2√5𝑦 + 16𝑥 − 13 = 0 d) 9𝑥 +
2𝑦 + 17 = 0

24. The distance between parallel lines 4𝑥 + 3𝑦 − 2 = 0 and 4𝑥 + 3𝑦 + 8 = 0

13 59
a) 2 b) 3 c) 2 d) 12

25. The points (5, -2), (1, 2) and (2, 5) are

a) Collinear b) vertices of an equilateral triangle c) vertices of right angled
triangle d) none of these

26. If the origin is shifted to (-4, -6) then the point P(-6, -8) will be shifted into
a) (-2, 1) b) (-2, -2) c) (0, -2) d) (2, 2)

27. The xy-coordinates are related about origin at an angle 180o , the coordinates of the point P(4, -1)
are
a) (1, 4) b) (-1, 4) c) (-4, 1) d) (-4, -1)

28. Find the point three-fifth of the way along the line segment from A (-5, 8) to B(5, 3)
a) (5, -1) b) (1, 5) c) (6, -1) d) (-1, 6)

MUHAMMAD ALI 196

 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014
29. The vertices A(1, 1), B(4, 5) and C(12, -1)
a) Form right angled triangle b) are collinear c) form right angled isosceles triangle
d) form equilateral triangle

30. The equation of the straight line, if its slope is 2 and y-intercept is 5 is given as
𝑥 4 𝑥 4 6 4
a) 𝑦 = 6 + 3 b) 𝑦 = 6 − 3 c) 𝑦 = 𝑥 + 3 d) None of these

31. The coordinates of a point on the line x + y = 4 that lies at a unit distance from the line 4x + 3y –
10 = 0 are
a) (3, 1) b) (-7, 11) c) (3, -1) d) (7, 11)

32. The acute angle between the line x + y = 3 and the line joining the points (1, 1) and (-3, 4) is
3 3 1 1
a) tan−1 (7) b) π − tan−1 (7) c) tan−1 (7) d) π − tan−1 (7)

4
33. The equation of the straight line, having x-intercept equal to − 5 and is perpendicular to the line
2𝑥 − 5𝑦 + 8 = 0
a) 2𝑥 + 5𝑦 + 4 = 0 b) 5𝑥 − 2𝑦 + 4 = 0 c) 2𝑥 − 5𝑦 + 4 = 0 d) 5𝑥 + 2𝑦 +
4=0

34. The equation of the perpendicular bisector of the line segment joining the points (1, 4) and (3, 6)
is
a) 𝑥 − 𝑦 − 7 = 0 b) 𝑥 + 𝑦 − 7 = 0 c) 𝑥 + 𝑦 + 7 = 0 d) None of these

35. The equation of the straight line passing through the point of intersection of the lines x – y = 1
and 2x – 3y + 1 = 0 and parallel to the lines 3x + 4y = 14 is
a) 3𝑥 + 4𝑦 + 24 = 0 b) 3𝑥 + 4𝑦 − 24 = 0 c) 4𝑥 + 3𝑦 + 24 = 0 d) 4𝑥 +
3𝑦 − 24 = 0

36. The equation of the straight line passing through the point of intersection of lines 3𝑥 − 4𝑦 − 7 =
0 and 12𝑥 − 5𝑦 − 13 = 0 and perpendicular to the line 2𝑥 − 3𝑦 + 5 = 0 is
a) 33𝑥 + 22𝑦 + 13 = 0 b) 33𝑥 + 22𝑦 − 13 = 0 c) 33𝑥 − 22𝑦 + 13 = 0 d)
None of these

37. The values of k so that the lines 2𝑥 − 3𝑦 + 𝑘 = 0, 3𝑥 − 4𝑦 − 13 = 0 and 8𝑥 − 11𝑦 − 33 = 0

are concurrent, is
a) 7 b) – 7 c) 5 d) – 5

38. The three lines 3𝑥 + 4𝑦 + 6 = 0 √2𝑥 + √3𝑦 + 2√2 = 0 and 4𝑥 + 7𝑦 + 8 = 0 are

a) Sides of a triangle b) concurrent c) parallel d) none of these

39. A line passes through the point (2, 3) and is perpendicular to the line 3𝑥 + 𝑦 = 3. Its y intercept
is
1 2 4
a) 3 b) 3 c) 1 d) 3

3
40. The equation of the line with slope − 2 and which is concurrent with the lines 4𝑥 + 3𝑦 − 7 = 0
and 8𝑥 + 5𝑦 − 1 = 0 is
a) 2𝑦 − 3𝑥 − 2 = 0 b) 3𝑥 + 2𝑦 − 2 = 0 c) 3𝑥 + 2𝑦 − 63 = 0 d) None of
these

MUHAMMAD ALI 197

 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014

41. The distance between the lines 4𝑥 + 3𝑦 = 11 and 8𝑥 + 6𝑦 = 15 is

7 7
a) 10 b) 2 c) 4 d) None of these

42. If the lines 𝑎𝑥 + 12𝑦 + 1 = 0, 𝑏𝑥 + 13𝑦 + 1 = 0, and 𝑐𝑥 + 14𝑦 + 1 = 0 are concurrent, then a,
b, c are in
a) H.P b) G.P c) A.P d) none of these

43. The lines passing through (0, 1) and perpendicular to the lines 𝑥 − 2𝑦 + 11 = 0 is
a) 2𝑥 + 2𝑦 + 11 = 0 b) 2𝑥 + 𝑦 − 1 = 0 c) 2𝑥 − 𝑦 + 3 = 0 d) 2𝑥 − 𝑦 + 1 =
0

44. Two points (a, 0) and (0, b) are joined by a straight line. Another point on this line is
a) (-3a, 2b) b) (a, b) c) (3a, -2b) d) (𝑎2 ,ab)

45. The straight line 𝑥 + 𝑦 − 4 = 0, 3𝑥 + 𝑦 − 4 = 0, 𝑥 + 3𝑦 − 4 = 0 form a triangle which is

a) Isosceles b) right angled c) equilateral d) None of these

46. The angle between the lines 3𝑥 + 𝑦 − 7 = 0 and 𝑥 + 2𝑦 + 9 = 0 will be

a) 120𝑜 b) 135𝑜 c) 180𝑜 d) 90𝑜

47. The equation of straight line passing through point of intersection of the straight lines 3𝑥 − 𝑦 +
2 = 0 and 5𝑥 − 2𝑦 + 7 = 0 and having infinite slope is
a) 𝑥 = 2 b) 𝑥 + 𝑦 = 3 c) 𝑥 = 3 d) 𝑥 = 4

48. If the equation 3𝑥 2 − 8𝑥𝑦 + 𝑘𝑦 2 = 0 represents two perpendicular lines, then the value of k is
a) 3 b) – 3 c) 2 d) none of these

49. If the lines represented by 2𝑥 2 + 8𝑥𝑦 + 𝑘𝑦 2 = 0 are coincident, then the values of k is
a) 8 b) – 8 c) 4 d) none of these

50. Which of the following pair of lines intersect at right angles?

a) 2𝑥 2 = 𝑦(𝑥 + 2𝑦) b) (𝑥 + 𝑦)2 = 𝑥(𝑦 + 3𝑥) c) 2𝑦(𝑥 + 𝑦) = 𝑥𝑦 d) 𝑦 = ±2𝑥

51. If the equation 3𝑥 2 + 6𝑥𝑦 + 𝑚𝑦 2 = 0 represents a pair of lines inclined at an angle 𝜋, then m is
equal to
a) 3 b) 6 c) 9 d) any real number

52. The equation 𝑥 3 + 𝑥𝑦 2 − 2𝑦 3 = 0 represents

a) Three real straight lines b) three lines passing through origin c) three distinct
points d) none of these

53. The angle between the lines given by 𝑥 2 − 𝑦 2 = 0 is

a) 15𝑜 b) 45𝑜 c) 75𝑜 d) 90𝑜

54. The angle between the pair of lines given by the equation 𝑥 2 + 2𝑥𝑦 − 𝑦 2 = 0 is
𝜋 𝜋 𝜋
a) 3 b) 6 c) 2 d) 0

MUHAMMAD ALI 198

 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014

55. The angle between the lines 𝑥 2 − 𝑦 2 − 1 = 0 is

a) 90𝑜 b) 60𝑜 c) 75𝑜 d) 36𝑜

56. The equation of line passing through point (4, −6) and making an angle of 45𝑜 with positive x-
axis is
a) 𝑥 + 𝑦 − 10 = 0 b) 2𝑥 − 𝑦 = 10 c) 𝑥 − 𝑦 = 10 − 0 d) 𝑦 − 𝑥 +
10 = 0

57. If a line passes through points (4, 3) and (2, k) and perpendicular to 𝑦 = 2𝑥 + 3, then k is equal
to
a) -1 b) 1 c) -4 d) 4

58. The measure of the angle from the first line to the second line whose slopes are 0 and 3, is
1 1
a) tan−1 (3) b) tan−1 3 c) 2 tan−1 7 d) 2 tan−1 3

59. Distance of the point (-7, 13) from the line 2𝑥 + 𝑦 + 13 = 0 is

6 14
a) 109 b) 56 c) 67 d) 5
√ √

4𝑥
60. Which point is above the line 3 + 𝑦 = 1?
a) (−3, −1) b) (−3, 1) c) (3, 1) d) (−4, −1)

61. Two lines 𝑎1 x + b1 y + c1 = 0 and 𝑎2 x + b2 y + c2 = 0 are perpendicular, if:

a) 𝑎1 b2 − b1 𝑎2 = 0 b) 𝑎1 𝑎2 + 𝑏1 𝑏2 = 0 c) 𝑎1 𝑏2 + 𝑏1 𝑎2 ≠ 0 d) 𝑎1 𝑎2 +
𝑏1 𝑏2 ≠ 0

62. (4, 0), (0, −5) and (0, 0) are the vertices of a/an
a) Isosceles triangle b) right triangle c) equilateral triangle d) oblique triangle

63. The point (x, y) is on x-axis and its distance is 6 units from (5, 2), then coordinates of P are
a) (2, √5) b) (√3, 4) c) (2, 10) d) none of these

64. Equation of straight line passing through (3, 4) and having x-intercept ‘1’ is
a) 𝑥 − 𝑦 + 8 = 0 b) 2𝑥 − 𝑦 − 2 = 0 c) 𝑥 − 2𝑦 − 8 = 0 d) 2𝑥 − 𝑦 − 10 = 0

65. The equation of straight line passing through a point (−1, 7) and // to line 2𝑥 − 𝑦 + 7 = 0 is
a) 𝑥 − 𝑦 + 1 = 0 b) 𝑥 + 2𝑦 + 7 = 0 c) 2𝑥 − 𝑦 + 9 = 0 d) 3𝑥 + 2𝑦 + 8 =
0

5
66. The mid point of P(x, y) and (3, 1) is (4, 2), then coordinates of point P are
a) (3, 2) b) (4, 5) c) (5, 4) d) (1, 5)

67. The equation of the line passing through (-6, 5) and having slope 7 is
a) 7𝑥 − 47 b) −7𝑥 − 47 c) 7𝑥 + 47 d) −7𝑥 + 47

68. The equation of straight line passing through the intersection of lines 𝑥 − 3𝑦 + 1 = 0 and 2𝑥 +
5𝑦 − 9 = 0 and at distance √5 from the origin is
a) 2𝑥 − 𝑦 = 5 b) 𝑥 + 2𝑦 = 5 c) 2𝑥 + 𝑦 = 5 d) 𝑥 + 2𝑦 = 1

MUHAMMAD ALI 199

 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014

69. The straight lines 𝑥 + 𝑦 − 4 = 0, 3𝑥 + 𝑦 − 4 = 0, 𝑥 + 3𝑦 − 4 = 0 form a triangle which is

a) Isosceles b) right angled c) equilateral d) none of these

70. The area of the triangle with vertices at the points (a, b + c), (b, c + a), (c, a + b) is
a) 0 b) a + b + c c) ab + bc + ca d) none of these

71. If m = 0, for a line l, then every point of l has a same value of

a) Abscissa b) ordinate c) slope d) component

72. If 2𝑥 + 3𝑦 + 7 = 0 & 𝑥 − 𝛽𝑦 + 8 = 0 are ⊥, then 𝛽 =?

2 3 3
a) 3 b) 2 c) − 2 d) none of these

73. A line passes through the point (2, 2) and is perpendicular to the line 3𝑥 + 𝑦 = 3. Its y intercept
is
a) 1/3 b) 2/3 c) 1 d) 4/3

ANSWERS
1. A 15. C 29. A 43. B 57. D
2. C 16. D 30. D 44. C 58. B
3. A 17. C 31. (A, B) 45. A 59. D
4. B 18. B 32. C 46. B 60. C
5. D 19. A 33. D 47. C 61. B
6. B 20. C 34. B 48. B 62. B
7. A 21. B 35. B 49. A 63. D
8. C 22. C 36. A 50. A 64. B
9. D 23. B 37. B 51. A 65. C
10. C 24. C 38. B 52. D 66. C
11. C 25. A 39. D 53. D 67. C
12. B 26. B 40. B 54. C 68. C
13. B 27. C 41. A 55. A 69. A
14. B 28. B 42. C 56. C 70. A
71. B
72. A
73. D

SOLUTIONS / HINTS
4. Solution
𝑥 𝑦 1
1
Area of ∆PBC = |−3 5 1|
2
4 −2 1
= 7x + 7y − 14
6 3 1
1
Area of ∆ABC = |−3 5 1| = 49
2
4 −2 1
Area of ∆PBC |7x+7y−14|
∴ Area of ∆ABC = 49
|x+y−2|
= 7
(b)

MUHAMMAD ALI 200

 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014
5. Hint: If points are collinear then slope of AB = slope of BC
2k−(2−2k) (6−2k)−2k
=> (−k+1)−k
= (−4−k)−(−k+1)
(2k−2+2k)6−2k−2k
= −k+1−k
= −4−k+k−1
4k−2 6−4k
=> 1−2k = −5 => 𝑘 = −1 (d)

6. Hint: Let the coordinates of the point P be (α, β). Then, distance of P from x-axis is β and from
y-axis is α
We have, β = 2α (given)
∴ the locus of P is y = 2x (b)

7. Hint: If points are collinear then slope of AB = slope of BC

0−3 k−0
=> h−3 = 0−h
3 k
=> − h−3 = − h
1 1
=> h + k = 3 (a)

13. Hint: Here Centre = C (0, 0)

Radius = 10
Only the distance of point (8, 4) from centre is less than 10
∴ (8, 4) lies within the circle (a)

15. Hint: Use the formula

x +x +x y +y +y
( 1 32 3 ; 1 32 3 ) (c)

17. Hint: Use the formula

ax +bx2 +cx3 ay1 +by2 +cy3
( 1a+b+c ; a+b+c ) (C)
22. Hint: If lines are parallel; then their slopes will be equal that is
b−4 1−3
−1−3
= −5−2
20
=> b = 7
(c)

|c2 −c1 |
24. Hint: Use distance =
√a2 +b2
|8+2| 10
= = =2 c)
√14+9 5

31. Solution
Simply check the options which satisfy the Eq. x + y = 4 (a, b)

33. Hint: Check options. Starting of the required line will be like 5x + 2y + k = 0. Further we can
check x-intercept as well (d)

34. Solution
Midpoint of the line joining (1, 4) and (3, 6) is (2, 5)
Now the point (2, 5) satisfy the equation
x+y−7=0 (b)

MUHAMMAD ALI 201

 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014
35. Hint: Use the formula (eq. of line)
(y − y1 ) = m(x − x1 )
3
Here m = − and point is point of intersection of given lines i.e., (4, 3)
4
OR (4, 3) satisfies the eq. of lines 3x + 4y − 24 = 0 (b)
OR Please note starting of the required line will be like 3x + 4y + k = 0; so we can easily
eliminate (c) and (d) options.

37. Hint: If lines are concurrent, we can write

2 −3 𝑘
|3 −4 −13| = 0
8 −11 −33
=> k = −7 (b)

3
40. Hint: First check the option such that the slope of line is − 2. Option (a) cannot be the rifght
answer.
Secondly, check the point of intersection of two given lines i.e., (-8, 13)
OR Point of intersection (-8, 13) satisfies the eq. of line 3x + 2y − 2 = 0 (b)

42. Hint: If lines are concurrent; we can write

𝑎 12 1
|𝑏 13 1| = 0
𝑐 14 1
a+c
=> b = (c)
2

43. Hint: Only option (b) can be the answer because its slope is “-2” and point (0, 1) satisfies it as
well (b)

b
44. Hint: Slope of given two points = − a
Only the point (3a, -2b) has the same slope with given points c)

47. Hint: Option (b) cannot be the answer because its slope is finite. Point of intersection of given
lines is (3, 11)
So x = 3 is the required line (c)

48. Hint: For perpendicular lines, condition is a + b = 0

∴ Put 3 + k = 0
k = −3 (b)

49. Hint: For coincident lines

Put h2 − ab = 0
=> 16 − 2𝑘 = 0
=> 𝑘 = 8 (a)
51. Solution
2√h2 −ab
Use tan θ = a+b
Here θ = π; h = 3; a = 3; b = m

MUHAMMAD ALI 202

 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014
2√9−3m
tan π =
3+𝑚
=> 3m − 9 = 0
=> 3m = 9
=> 𝑚 = 3 (a)

52. Hint: The given equation can be written as

(x − y)(x 2 + xy + 2y 2 ) = 0
x − y = 0 represents a straight line passing through origin. But the equation x 2 + xy + 2y 2 = 0
represents two imaginary lines (d)

55. Hint: Here a + b = 0

θ = 90o (a)

57. Solution
k−3
Slope of line joining (4, 3) and (2, k) = 2−4
Slope of given line = 2
k−3
Put (2−4) (2) = −1
k−3 =1
=> k = 4 (d)

63. Hint: If point is on x-axis, its y-component must be zero. So there is no option in which y-
component is zero (d)

66. Solution
x+3 y+1 5
Here 4 = 2
and 2
=2
=> 𝑥 = 5; 𝑦 = 4
c)
67. Solution
Let y = mx + c be the required line
Here m = 7
∴ y = 7x + c
If line passes through (-6, 5), we have
5 = 7(−6) + 𝑐
c = 47
Therefore, required line is
y = 7x + 47 c)

70. Hint: Points are collinear (a)

71. Hint: Every point of 1 has a same values of ordinate, that is y-component because line is parallel
to x-axis, so perpendicular distance of line from x-axis will remain same (b)

72. Solution
2 1
m1 = − 3 and m2 = β

MUHAMMAD ALI 203

 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014
2 1
=> (− 3) (β) = −1
2
=> β=3 (a)

73. Hint: Find equation of line with slope m = - 3 and find its y-intercept by putting x = 0 in equation
of line (d)

MUHAMMAD ALI 204

 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014

Chapter # 19

LINEAR INEQUALITIES & LINEAR PROGRAMMING

SYNOPSIS
Inequalities
Inequalities are of four types
Inequalities Symbols
Greater than >
Less than <
Greater than or equal to ≥
Less than or equal to ≤

Linear Inequalities
General a linear inequality in two variables x and y can be of the following four forms
i) ax + by < c
ii) ax + by ≤ c
iii) ax + by > c
iv) ax + by ≥ c

where a, b and c are constants also a and b cannot zero simultaneously

Key Points Related Inequality in Two Variables

Corresponding Equation
For every inequality ax + by = c is called associated or corresponding equation

Half Planes
Every inequality divides a plane into two half planes

Left and Right Planes

A vertical line divides the plane into left and right half planes

Upper and Lower Planes

A non-vertical lines divides the plane in to upper and lower half planes

Corner Point or Vertex

A point of a solution region where two of its boundary lines intersect is called a corner point or vertex

Linear Programming
Linear programming is a branch of mathematic that deals with an important class of constrained
optimization problems

Problem Constraints
The system of linear inequalities involved in the problem concerned is called problem constraints

MUHAMMAD ALI 205

 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014
Decision Variables
Non-negative constraints are called decision variables

Feasible Region
A region which is restricted in first quadrant under certain constraints is called the feasible region

Feasible Solution
Each point of the feasible region is called feasible solution

Feasible Solution Set

The set of all feasible solutions of a system of linear inequalities is called feasible solution set

Convex Region
If the line joining any two points of a region lies entirely with in the region, then the region is called
convex

Objective Function
A function which is to be maximized or minimized but not both is called objective function

Optimal Solution
The feasible solution which maximized or minimizes the objective function is called optimal solution

Key Point to Remember

• There are infinite many feasible solutions in the feasible region
• The intersection point of two boundary lines is a corner point only if it is feasible
• If a linear program has an optimal solution, it must occur at a corner of the feasibility region

MUHAMMAD ALI 206

 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014

MCQs
1. A function which is to be maximized or minimized is called ________ function
a) Optimal b) Feasible c) Objective d) Corner

2. The feasible solution which maximized or minimized the objective function is called
a) Feasible solution b) Optimal solution c) Either feasible or optimal d) None of these

3. Non-negative constraints help in taking

a) Solutions b) maximization c) minimization d) decision

4. Optimize means _________a quantity under certain constraints

a) Maximize b) minimize c) either maximum or minimum d) both

5. Inequalities have _______ symbols

a) 2 b) 3 c) 4 d) 6

6. The solution set of x < 4 is

a) −∞ < x < 4 b) 4 < x < ∞ c) 0 < x < 4 d) −∞ < x < ∞

7. Corner point is also called

a) Origin b) Focus c) Vertex d) Point of contact

8. The variables used in the system of linear inequalities are ______

a) Integers b) Real numbers c) Non-ve integers d) none of these
9. Non-ve constraints are called _________
a) Discrete b) continuous c) dependent d) decision

10. There are ________ feasible solutions in the feasible region

a) 2 b) 4 c) 6 d) infinite

11. A point of a solution region where two of its boundary lines intersect is called
a) Vertex b) Corner point c) Both a) and b) d) None of these

12. Region restricted to first quadrant only is called

a) Solution region b) Restricted region c) Feasible region d) None of these

13. If the line segment obtained by joining any two points of a region lies entirely within the region,
then the region is called
a) Feasible region b) solution region c) convex region d) none of these

MUHAMMAD ALI 207

 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014

ANSWERS
1. C 8. C
2. B 9. D
3. D 10. D
4. C 11. C
5. C 12. C
6. A 13. C
7. C

MUHAMMAD ALI 208

 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014

Chapter # 20
CONIC SECTION

SYNOPSIS
Circle
A circle is the locus of a point which moves in a plane such that its distance from a fixed point always
remains constant. The fixed point is called the centre and the constant distance is called the radius of the
circle.

Standard Equations of a Circle

The equation of a circle with the centre at (h, k) and radius a, is
(x − h)2 + (y − k)2 = a2

If the centre of the circle is at the origin and radius is a, then the equation of circle is x 2 + y 2 = a2

General Equation of a Circle

The general equation of a circle is of the form
x 2 + y 2 + 2gx + 2fy + c = 0…..(i)
Where g, f and c are constant
The coordinates of its centre are (-g, -f) and radius is √g 2 + f 2 − c

Conditions for an Equation to Represents a Circle

A general equation of second degree
ax 2 + 2hxy + by 2 + 2gx + 2fy + c = 0
in x, y represents a circle if
1. Coefficient of x 2 = coefficient of y 2 i.e. a = b
2. Coefficient of xy is zero i.e. h = 0

Nature of the Circle

If g 2 + f 2 − c < 0, the radius of the circle is imaginary but the centre is real. Such a circle is called a
virtual circle or imaginary circle as it is not possible to draw such a circle.

Parametric Equation
x = a cos θ , y = a sin θ , 0 ≤ θ ≤ π is said to be parametric equation of the circle x 2 + y 2 = a2 in terms
of the parameter θ

Position of a Point with respect to a Circle

Let S = x 2 + y 2 + 2gx + 2fy + c = 0, be a circle and P(x1 , y1 ) be a point in the plane of S, then S1 =
x12 + y12 + 2gx1 + 2fy1 + c. The point P(x1 , y1 ) lies outside, or inside the circle S according as S1 >, =
or < 0, respectively

MUHAMMAD ALI 209

 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014

Notes
Let S be a circle and P(x1 , y1 ) and Q(x2 , y2 ) be two points in the plane of S, then they lie
• On the same side of S iff S1 and S2 have same signs
• On the opposite sides of S iff S1 and S2 have opposite signs

Circle through Three Points

The equation of the circle through three non-collinear points (x1 , y1 ), (x2 , y2 ) and (x3 , y3 ) is
x2 + y2 x y 1
|x1 + y12 x1 y1 1| = 0
x22 + y22 x2 y2 1
|x32 + y32 x3 y3 1|

Intersection of a Line and a Circle

Let S be a circle with centre C and radius a. Let l be any line in the plane of the circle and d be the
perpendicular distance from C to the line 𝑙, then
1. 𝑙 intersects S in two distinct points iff d < a
2. 𝑙 intersects S in one and only point iff d = a, i.e., the line l touches the circle if perpendicular
distance from the centre to the line l is equal to radius of the circle
3. 𝑙 does not intersect S iff d > 1

Contact of Two Circles

The two circles having centres at A(x1 , y1 ) and B(x2 , y2 ) and radii r1 and r2 respectively will:

i. Intersect in two real distinct points iff

|r1 − r2 | < AB < r1 + r2
ii. Touch each other externally if and only if
AB = r1 + r2 and their point of contact C is given by

MUHAMMAD ALI 210

 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014

r1 x2 + r2 x1 r1 y2 + r2 y1
C=( , )
r1 + r2 r1 + r2
iii. Touch each other internally if and only if
AB = |r1 − r2 |, and their point of contact C is given by
r1 x2 − r2 x1 r1 y2 −r2 y1
C=( , )
r1 − r2 r1 − r2

iv. One circle lies outside the other if AB > r1 + r2

v. One circle is contained to the other if AB < |r1 − r2 |

Tangent to a Circle at a Given Point

1. Equation of the tangent to the circle x 2 + y 2 = a2 at the point (x1 , y1 ) in it is: xx1 + yy1 = a2
2. Equation of the tangent to the circle
x 2 + y 2 + 2gx + 2fy + c = 0 at the point (x1 , y1 ) in it is xx1 + yy1 + g(x + x1 ) + f(y + y1 ) +
c=0

MUHAMMAD ALI 211

 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014

Equation of the Tangent in Slope Form

The equation of a tangent of slope m to the circle x 2 + y 2 = a2 is y = mx ± a√1 + m2
The coordinates of the point of contact are
am a
(± ,± )
√1 + m2 √1 + m2

Condition of Tangency
The straight line y = mx + c will be a tangent to the circle
x 2 + y 2 = a2 if c = ±a√1 + m2

Note A line will touch a circle if and only if the length of the perpendicular from the centre of the circle to
the line is equation to the radius of the circle

Length of the Tangent from a Point to a Circle

The length of the tangent that can be drawn from the point P(x1 , y1 ) to the circle S = 0is √S1, where
the coefficients of x 2 and y 2 in the equation of the circle are unity. Thus the length of the tangent from the
point P(x1 , y1 ) to circle x 2 + y 2 + 2gx + 2fy + c = 0 is given by
PT = √x12 + y12 + 2gx + 2fy1 + c

Important Properties of a Circle

i. Perpendicular dropped from the centre of a circle on a chord bisects the chord
ii. The perpendicular bisector of any chord of a circle passes through the centre of the circle
iii. The line joining the centre of a circle to the midpoint of a chord is perpendicular to the chord
iv. Congruent chords of a circle are equidistant from its centre
v. Measure of the central angle of a minor are is double the measure of the angle subtended in
the corresponding major axis.
vi. An angle in a semi-circle is a right angle
vii. The tangent to a circle at any point of the circle is perpendicular to the radial segment at that
point
viii. The perpendicular at the outer end of a radical segment is tangent to the circle
ix. Normal lines of a circle pass through the centre of the circle
x. Mid point of the hypotenuse of a right triangle is the circumcentre of the triangle
xi. Perpendicular dropped from a point of a circle on a diameter into which it divides the
diameter

Introduction
Conic section is the curve obtained when a conical surface is intersected by a plane. If the intersecting
plane cuts both extensions of the cone, it yields a hyperbola, if it is parallel to the side of the cone, it

MUHAMMAD ALI 212

 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014
yields a hyperbola, if it is parallel to the side of the cone, it produces a parabola. Other intersecting
planes produces circles or ellipse

Cone
A cone is the surface or the solid figure formed by moving a line so that the line always intersects a
plane (called the directrix) and passes through a fixed point (called the vertex) See figure (a) and (b).
In a right circular cone figure (a) the axis is perpendicular to (forms a 90o angle with) the directrix
Rotating a right triangle around one of its shorter sides (making the side the axis will produce a right
circular cone. In an oblique circular cone figure (b) the axis does not form 90o angle with the
directrix.

Conic Section-As Sections of a Right Circular Cone

1. Section of a right circular cone by a plane, which is passing through its vertex, is a pair of
straight line. Lines always pass through the vertex of the cone.

2. Section of a right circular cone by a plane, which is parallel to its base, is a circle

MUHAMMAD ALI 213

 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014

3. Section of a right circular cone by a plane, which is parallel to a generator of the cone, is a
parabola

4. Section of a right circular cone by a plane, which is not parallel to any generator and not parallel
or perpendicular to the axis of the cone, is an ellipse

5. Section of a right circular cone by a plane, which is parallel to the axis of the cone, is a hyperbola

Conic Section or Conics-As Plane Curves

Conics sections are two dimensional or plane curves and therefore a desirable definition of conics avoids
the notation of a cone, which is three –dimensions

MUHAMMAD ALI 214

 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014

A conic section or conic is the locus of a point which moves so that its distance from a fixed point is in a
constant ratio to its distance from a fixed straight line
The fixed point is called a focus, the fixed straight line is called a directly, and the constant ratio is
called the eccentricity, which is denoted by ‘e’
From the definition, we have
PS
PK
= Constant = e,
If e = 1, the curve is a parabola
If e < 1, the curve is an ellipse
If e > 1, the curve is a hyperbola
The straight line passing through the focus and perpendicular to the directrix is called the axis of the
conic.
A point of intersection of conic with its axis is called a vertex of the conic.

Note: It is assumed that the point P moves in the plane in which, the fixed point and the fixed straight line
lie.
We proceed to find the equation of the simplest of these curves, namely that in which the eccentricity is
equal to unity. This curve as you know, is called a parabola

General Equation
The general equation of second degree ax 2 + 2hxy + by 2 + 2gx + 2fy + c = 0 represents
• A pair of straight lines if ∆= 0 where ∆= abc + 2fgh − af 2 − bg 2 − ch2

a h g
or ∆= |h b f |
g f c
• A circle if ∆≠ 0, a = b and h = 0
• A parabola if ∆≠ 0 and h2 = ab
• An ellipse if ∆≠ 0 and h2 < ab, and
• A hyperbola if ∆≠ 0 and h2 > ab

Parabola
A parabola is the locus of a point which moves in a plane such that its distance from a fixed point (called
the focus) is equal to its distance from a fixed straight line (called the directrix)

MUHAMMAD ALI 215

 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014

Let S be the focus, QN be the directrix and P be any point on the parabola. Then, by definition, PS = PN
where PN is the length of the perpendicular from P on the directrix QN

Equation of a Parabola in the Standard Form

y 2 = 4ax(a > 0), which is the required equation of the parabola

Latus Rectum of the Parabola

Let the given parabola be y 2 = 4ax. In the figure LSL’ (a line through focus ⊥ to axis) is the latus rectum

Also be definition,
LSL′ = 2(√4a. a) = 4a
= double ordinate (Any chord of the parabola y 2 = 4ax which is ⊥ to its axis is called the double
ordinate through the focus S)

MUHAMMAD ALI 216

 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014

Focus Standard Forms of the Parabola

Standard 𝐲 𝟐 = 𝟒𝐚𝐱(𝐚 > 𝟎) 𝐲 𝟐 = −𝟒𝐚𝐱(𝐚 > 𝟎) 𝐱 𝟐 = 𝟒𝐚𝐱(𝐚 > 𝟎) 𝐱 𝟐 = −𝟒𝐚𝐱(𝐚 > 𝐛)
Equation
Shape of
the
parabola

Vertex A(0, 0) A(0, 0) A(0, 0) A(0, 0)

Focus S(a, 0) S(-a, 0) S(0, a) S(0, -a)
Equation of x = −a x=a y = −a y=a
directrix
Equation of y=0 y=0 x=0 x=0
axis
Length of 4a 4a 4a 4a
latus
rectum
Extermities (a, ±2a) (−a, ±2a) (±2a, a) (±2a, −a)
of latus
rectum
Equation of x=a x = −a y=a y = −a
latus
rectum
Equation of x=0 x=0 y=0 y=0
tangent at
vertex
Focal x+a x−a y+a y−a
distance of
a point P(x,
y)
Parametric (at 2 , 2at) (at 2 , 2at) (2at, at 2 ) (2at, −at 2 )
coordinates
Eccentricity 1 1 1 1
(e)

Parametric Equation of a Parabola

Clearly x = at 2 , y = 2at satisfy the equation y 2 = 4ax for all real values of t. Hence the parametric
equations of the parabola y 2 = 4ax are x = at 2, y = 2at, where t is the parameter
Condition for the Chord to be a Focal Chord
The chord joining the points (at12 , 2at1 ) and (at 22 , 2at 2 ) passes through focus provided t1 t 2 = −1

Note Two parabolas are said to be equal when their latus recta are equal

MUHAMMAD ALI 217

 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014
Focal Chord
Any chord to the parabola which passes through the focus is called a focal chord of the parabola
Four standard forms of the parabola are shown in the table below
Condition for Tangency and Point of Contact
a
The line y = max + c touches the parabola y 2 = 4ax if c = m and the coordinates of the point of contact
a 2a
are ( 2 , )
m m
Position of a Point with respect to a Parabola
The point (x1 , y1 ) lies outside on or inside the parabola y 2 = 4ax according as y12 − 4ax1 >, = or < 0,
respectively
Number of Tangents Drawn from a Point to a Parabola
Two tangents can be drawn from a point to a parabola. The two tangents are real and distinct or
coincident or imiginary according as the given point lies outside, on or insider the parabolas.
Some Useful Results on Parabola
i. The tangent at any point P on the parabola bisects the angle between the focal chord throough
P and the perpendicular from P on the directrix
ii. The portion of a tangent to a parabola cut off between the directric and the curve substendes a
right angle at the focus.
iii. Tangents at the extremities of any focal chord intersect at right angles on the directrix
iv. Any tangent to a parabola and the perpendicular on it from the focus meet on the tangent at
the vertex

Ellipse
An ellipse is the locus of a point which moves in a plane so that the ratio of its distance from a fixed point
(called focus) and a fixed line (called directrix) is a constant which is less than one. This ratio is called
eccentricity and is denited by e. For an ellipse, e < 1
PS
Let S be the focus, QN be the directrix and P be any point on the ellipse. Then, by definition, = e or
PN
PS = ePN, e < 1, where PN is the length of the perpendicular from P on the directrix QN.

An Alternate Definition
An ellipse is the locus of a point that moves in such a way that the sum of its distances from two fixed
points (called foci) is constant.

Equation of an Ellipse in Standard Form

The standard form of the equation of an ellipse is:
x2 y2
+ b2 = 1(a > b)
a2
Where a and b are constants.

MUHAMMAD ALI 218

 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014

Some Terms and Properties Related to an Ellipse

x2 y2
A sketch of the locus of a moving point satisfying the equation a2 + b2 = 1(a > b), has been shown in
the figure given below
1. Symmetry
(a) On replacing y by –y, the above equation remains unchanged. So, the curve is symmetrical about
x-axis
(b) On replacing x by –x, the above equation remains unchanged. So, the curve is symmetrical about
y-axis

2. Focal
It S and S’ are the two foci of the ellipse and their coordinates are (ae, o) and (-ae, 0) respectively,
then distance between foci is given by:
SS ′ = 2ae

3. Directrices
a a
If Zm and Z’M’ are the two directrices of the ellipse and their equations are x = and x = −
c e
respectively, then the distance between directrices is given by
2a
ZZ′ =
e

4. Axes
The lines AA′ and BB′ are called the major axis and minor axis respectively of the ellipse.
The length of major axis = AA′ = 2a
The length of minor axis = BB ′ = 2b

5. Centre
The point of intersection C of the axes of the ellipse is called the centre of the ellipse. All chords,
passing through C are bisected at C.

6. Vertices
The end points A and A’ of the major axis are known as the vertices of the ellipse

7. Focal Chord
A chord of the ellipse passing through its focus is called a focal chord

8. Latus Rectum
If LL′ and NN′ are the latus rectum of the ellipse, then these lines are ⊥ to the major axis AA′,
passing through the foci S and S′ respectively

9. Parametric Equation of the Ellipse

The coordinates x = a cos θ and y = b sin θ satisfy the equation
x2 y2
a2
+ b2 = 1 for all real values of θ. Thus x = acos θ , y = b sin θ are the parametric equations of
x2 y2
the ellipse 2 + 2 = 1, where the parameters 0 ≤ θ < 2π.
a b
The angle θ is called the eccentric angle of the point (a cos θ , b sin θ) on the ellipse

MUHAMMAD ALI 219

 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014

Position of a Point with respect to an Ellipse

x2 y2 x2 y2
The point P(x1 , y1 ) lies outside, on or inside the ellipse a2 + b2 = 1 according as a12 + b12 − 1 >
0, 0 or < 0
Two standard forms of the ellipse are shown below along with their properties

Two Standard Forms of the Ellipse

Standard Equation 𝐱𝟐 𝐲𝟐 𝐱𝟐 𝐲𝟐
+ = 𝟏(𝐚 > 𝐛) + = 𝟏(𝐚, 𝐛)
𝐚𝟐 𝐛 𝟐 𝐛 𝟐 𝐚𝟐
Shape of the ellipse

Centre (0, 0) (0, 0)

Equation of major axis y=0 x=0
Equation of minor axis 𝑥=0 𝑦=0
Length of major axis 2a 2a
Length of minor axis 2b 2b
Foci
(±ae, 0) (0, ±ae)
Vertices (±a, 0) (0, ±a)
a a
Equation of directrices 𝑥=± y=±
e e
Eccentricity a2 −b2 a2 −b2
e= √ 2 e= √ 2
a a
Length of latus rectum 2b2 2b2
a a
Ends of latra recta b2 b2
(±ae, ± a ) (± a , ±ae)
Paaramteric coordinates (a cos θ , b sin θ) (a cos θ , b sin θ)
Focal radii SP = a − ex1 and S ′ P = a + SP = a − ey1 and S ′ P = a +
ex1 ey1
Sum of focal radii SP + SP’ = 2a 2a
Distance between foci 2ae 2ae
Distance between directrices 2a 2a
e e
Tangents at the vertices x = ±a y = ±a

Equation of Tangent to Ellipse

x2 y2 xx1 yy1
The equation of the tangent to the ellipse a2 + b2 = 1 at the point (x1 , y1 ) is a2
+ b2
=1

MUHAMMAD ALI 220

 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014
Note: Number of tangents drawn from a point: Two tangents can be drawn from a point to an
ellipse. The two tangents are real and distinct or coincident or imaginary according as the given
point lies outside, on or inside the ellipse.

Hyperbola
A hyperbola is the locus of a point which moves in a plane so that the ratio of its distances from a
fixed point (called focus) and a fixed line (called directrix) is a constant which is greater than one.
This ratio is called eccentricity and is denoted by e. for a hyperbola, e > 1
Let S be the focus, QN be the directrix and P be any point on the hyperbola. Then, by definition,
PS
PN
= e or PS = ePN, e > 1
Where PN is the length of the perpendicular from P on the directrix QN

An Alternate Definition
A hyper bola is the locus of a point which moves in such a way that the difference of its
distances from two fixed points (called foci) is constant

Equation of a Hyperbola in Standard Form

The general form of standard hyperbola is
x2 y2
− 2=1
a2 b
Where a and b are constants

Some Terms and Properties Related to a Hyperbola

x2 y2
A sketch of the locus of a moving point satisfying the equation a2 − b2 = 1, has been shown in
the figure above

MUHAMMAD ALI 221

 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014
1) Symmetry: Since only even powers of x and y occur in the above equation, so the curve is
symmetrical about both the axes
2) Foci: If S and S′ are the two foci of the hyperbola and their coordinates are (ae, 0) and
(−ae, 0) respectively, then distance between foci is given by SS′ = 2ae
3) Directrices: ZM and ZM’ are thre two directrices of the hyperbola and their equations are
a a 2a
x = e and x = − e respectively, then the distances between directrices is given by ZZ′ = e
4) Axes: The line AA′ and BB′ are called the transverse axis and conjugate axis respectively of
the hyperbola
The length of transverse axis = AA′ = 2a
5) Centre: The point of intersection C of the axes of the hyperbola is called the centre of the
hyperbola. All chords, passing through C, are bisected at C.
6) Vertices: The point A = (a, 0) and A′ = (−a, 0), where the curve meets the line joining the
foci S and S′, are called the vertices of the hyperbola
7) Focal Chord: A chord of the hyperbola passing through its focus is called a focal chord
8) Latus Rectum: If LL′ and NN′ are the latus rectum of the hyperbola then these lines are
perpendicular to the transverse axis AA′, passing through the foci S and S′ respectively
9) Parametric Equation of the Hyperbola: Since the coordinates x = a sec θ and y = b tan θ
satisfy the equation
x2 y2
− 2 = 1 for all values of θ, therefore there are parametric equations of hyperbola where
a2 b
0 ≤ θ ≤ 2π
Properties of hyperbola and conjugate are given below in table

Properties of Hyperbola and its Conjugates

Hyperbola Conjugate Hyperbola
Standard equation x2 y2 x2 y2 x2 y2
− =1 − 2 + 2 = 1 or 2 − 2 = 1
a2 b2 a b a b
Centre (0, 0) (0, 0)
Equation of transverse axis y=0 x=0
Equation of conjugate axis x=0 y=0
Length of transverse axis 2a 2b
Length of conjugate axis 2b 2a
Foci (±ae, 0) (0, ±be)
a b
Equation of directrices x = ±e y = ±e
Vertices (±a, 0) (0, ±be)
Eccentricity a2 +b2 a2 +b2
e=√ a2
e=√ b2
Length of latus rectum 2b2 2a2
a b
Parametric coordinates (a sec θ , b tan θ) (b sec θ , a tan θ)
Focal radii SP = ex1 − a and S ′ P = ex1 + SP = ey1 − b and SP′ = ey1 +
a b
Tangents at the vertices x = ±a y = ±b

Position of a Point with respect to a Hyperbola

x2 y2 x2 y2
The point P(x1 , y1 )lies outside on or inside the hyperbola a2 − b2 = 1 according as a12 − b12 − 1 > 0, = 0
or < 0

MUHAMMAD ALI 222

 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014
Condition for Tangency and Points of Contact
x2 y2
The condition for the line y = mx + c to be a tangent to the hyperbola a2 − b2 = 1 is that c 2 = a2 m2 −
b2

Equation of Tangent to Hyperbola

x2 y2
The equation of the tangent to the hyperbola a2 − b2 = 1 at the point (x1 , y1 ) is
xx1 yy1
( 2 − 2)=1
a b

Number of Tangents form a Point

Two tangents can be drawn from a point to a hyperbola. The two tangents are real and distinct or
coincident or imaginary according as the given point lies outside, on or inside the hyperbola

Asymptotes of Hyperbola
x2 y2 bx
The lines a2 − b2 = 0 i.e. y = ± a are called the asymptotes of the hyperbola
The curve comes close to these lines as x → ∞ or x → −∞ but never meets them. in other words,
asymptotes to a curve touches the curve at infinity

Notes:
x2 y2 b
1. The angle between the asymptotes of a2 − b2 = 1 is 2 tan−1 (a)
2. The asymptotes pass through the centre of the hyperbola
Rectangular Hyperbola
If asymptotes of the standard hyperbola are perpendicular to each other, then it is known as
Rectangular Hyperbola
Transformations
Translation of Axis
To transform the given equations referred to the new origin O′ (h, k) put x = X + h, y = Y + k in the
given equation of the curve.
Rotation of Axis
To find the new equation when axis are rotated through an angle θ, put x = X cos θ − Y sin θ, y =
X sin θ + Y cos θ in the given equation

Elimination of the xy-term

To remove the xy-term from a second degree equation, determine the value of θ, such that
2h
tan 2θ =
a−b

Identification of a Conic from the General Equation

The general equation of a conic
ax 2 + 2hxy + by 2 + 2gxy + 2fy + c = 0 represents
i. A circle if h2 − ab < 0 & a = b
ii. An ellipse if h2 − ab < 0 & a ≠ b
iii. A parabola if h2 − ab = 0
iv. A hyperbola if h2 − ab > 0
a h g
v. A pair of straight lines, if |h b f | = 0
g f c

MUHAMMAD ALI 223

 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014

MCQs
1. The equation of the circle whose centre is (1, 2) and which passes through the point (4, 6) is
a) x 2 + y 2 + 2x − 4y − 20 = 0 b) x 2 + y 2 + 2x + 4y − 20 = 0
c) x 2 + y 2 − 2x − 4y − 20 = 0 d) None of these

2. If the equation of a circle is (4a − 3)x 2 + ay 2 + 6x − 2y + 2 = 0, then its centre is

a) (3, −1) b) (3, 1) c) (−3, 1) d) None of these

3. If the equation of a circle is 3x 2 + 3y 2 + kxy + 9x + (k − 6)y + 3 = 0, then its radius is

3 √17 2
a) 2
b) 2
c) 3 d) None of these

4. The equation x 2 + y 2 − 8x + 6y + 25 = 0 represents

a) A circle b) a pair of straight lines c) a point d) none of these

5. The number of tangents to the circle x 2 + y 2 − 8x − 6y + 9 = 0 which pass through the point
(3, -2) is
a) 2 b) 1 c) 0 d) None of these

6. If the line 2x − y + k = 0 is a diameter of the circle x 2 + y 2 + 6x − 6y + 5 = 0, then k is equal

to
a) 12 b) 9 c) 6 d) 3

7. The equation of a tangent of slope m to the circle x 2 + y 2 = a2 is

a) y = mx ± a√1 + m2 b) y = mx ± a√1 + m c) y = mx ± a√1 − m2
d) y = mx ± √1 + m 2

8. The straight line y = mx + c will be a tangent to the circle x 2 + y 2 = a2 if

a) c = ±a√1 + m b) c = ±a√1 + m2 c) c = ±√1 + m2 d) c = ±a√1 − m2

9. The circle x 2 + y 2 − 8x + 4y + 4 = 0 touches

a) x-axis b) y-axis c) both axes d) neither x-axis nor y-axis

10. The equation of the circle, the end points of whose diameter are the centre of the cirlces
a) x 2 + y 2 + x − 2y − 41 = 0 b) x 2 + y 2 + x + 2y − 41 = 0
c) x 2 + y 2 + x + 2y + 41 = 0 d) None of these

11. The centre of the three circle x 2 + y 2 = 1, x 2 + y 2 + 6x − 2y = 1 and x 2 + y 2 − 12x + 4y = 1

a) Form a right angled triangle b) Collinear c) Form an isosceles triangle d) None

12. The equation of that diameter of the circle x 2 + y 2 − 6x + 2y − 8 = 0, which passes through the
origins, is
a) x − 3y = 0 b) x + 3y = 0 c) 3x − y = 0 d) none of these

13. Equation of tangent to the circle x 2 + y 2 = 10, at the point whose abscissa is 1, is
a) x + 3y = 10 b) 3x + y = 10 c) x − 3y = 10 d) 3x − y = 10

MUHAMMAD ALI 224

 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014
14. The two circles x 2 + y 2 − 2x + 6y + 6 = 0 and x 2 + y 2 − 5x + 6y + 15 = 0
a) Are concentric b) Touch internally c) Touch externally d) Intersect

15. The straight line x + y = 10 intersects the circle x 2 + y 2 − 2x − 4y − 20 = 0 at the points

a) (4, 6) and (3, 7) b) (2, 8) and (5, 5) c) (10, 0) and (2, 8) d) (5, 5) and (4, 6)

16. The equation of a parabola is (y − 2)2 = −16(x − 1). The latus rectum and focus are
respectively
a) 16 and (2, -3) b) -16 and (-2, -3) c) 16 and (-3, 2) d) None of these

17. The slope of the tangent at the point (h, h) of the circles x 2 + y 2 = a2 is
a) 0 b) 0 c) -1 d) Depend upon h

18. The coordinates of the point at which the circles x 2 + y 2 − 4x − 2y − 4 = 0 and x 2 + y 2 −

12x − 8y − 36 = 0 touch each other, are
a) (3, 2) b) (-2, 3) c) (3, 2) d) None of these

19. Equation of the normal at (x1 , y1 ) on the circle x 2 + y 2 = a2 is

x y
a) xx1 + yy1 = a2 b) = c) xy − x1 y1 = 0 d) None of these
x1 y1

20. The area of a circle centered at (1, 2) and passing through (4, 6) is
a) 30π sq. units b) 5 π sq. units c) 15 π sq. units d) 25 π sq. units

21. The equation of tangents to the circle x 2 + y 2 = 25 which are inclined at angle of 30o to the x-
axis are
a) y = x√3 ± 5 b) √3y = x ± 10 c) ±√3y = x + 10 d) None of these

22. Equation of the normal of y 2 = 20x at (5, 10) is

a) x − y + 5 = 0 b) x + y − 15 = 0 c) x + y − 5 = 0 d) x − y + 15 = 0

23. The value of k for which the line x + y + 1 = 0 touches the parabola y 2 = kx is
a) – 4 b) 4 c) 2 d) – 2

24. The equation of the normal to the parabola y 2 = 4x, which passes through the point (3, 0) os
a) y = 0 b) y = x − 3 c) y = −x + 3 d) All of these

25. For all parabola x 2 + 4x + 4y + 16 = 0, the equation of the axis and the directrix are given by
a) x + 2 = 0, y − 2 = 0 b) x − 2 = 0, y + 2 = 0 c) x + 2 = 0, y + 2 = 0 d) None

26. If (4, 0) is the vertex and y-axis, the directrix of a parabola, then its focus is
a) (8, 0) b) (4, 0) c) (0, 8) d) (0, 4)

27. The focus of the parabola x 2 − 2x − y + 2 = 0 is

5 5 5
a) (1, 0) b) (0, 4) c) (1, 4) d) (4 , 1)

28. Axis of the parabola x 2 − 3y − 6x + 6 = 0 is

a) x = −3 b) y = −1 c) x = 3 d) y = 1

MUHAMMAD ALI 225

 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014

29. The line y = mx + 1 is a tangent to the parabola y 2 = 4x, if

a) m = 1 b) m = 2 c) m = 4 d) m =3

30. The slope of the normal at the point (at 2 , 2at) of the parabola y 2 = 4ax is
1 1
a) t b) t c) −t d) − t

31. The length of the latus rectum of the parabola 4y 2 + 2x − 20y + 17 = 0 is

1
a) 3 b) 6 c) 2 d) 9

32. The line y = mx + c touches the parabola x 2 = 4ay if

a
a) c = −am b) c = − m c) c = −am2 d) c = a/m2

33. The parabola y 2 = 4ax passes through the point (2, -6) then the length of its latus rectum is
a) 9 b) 16 c) 18 d) 6

34. The axis of the parabola 9y 2 − 16x − 12y − 57 = 0 is

a) 3y = 2 b) x + 3y = 3 c) 2x = 3 d) y = 3

35. Coordinates of the centre of the circle of equation x 2 + y 2 + 2x + y + 17 = 0

1 1
a) (1, 2) b) (3, 4) c) (−1, 2) d) (1, 2)

36. The focus of the parabola x 2 = 6ay is

2
a) (0, a) b) (0, 6a) c) (0, 3a) d) None

37. The equation of the ellipse referred to its axis as the axes of coordinates with latus rectum 8 and
1
eccentricity 2 is
√
a) x 2 + 2y 2 = 64 b) 2x 2 + y 2 = 64 c) x 2 + 4y 2 = 16 d) None of these

38. The sum of the focal distances from any point on the ellipse 9x 2 + 16y 2 = 144 is
a) 32 b) 18 c) 16 d8

39. If P(x, y), F1 (3, 0), F2 (−3, 0) and 16x 2 + 25y 2 = 400, then PF1 + PF2 equals
a) 8 b) 6 c) 10 d) 12

x2
40. The number of values of c such that the straight line y = 4x + C touches the curve + y 2 = 1 is
4
a) 0 b) 1 c) 2 d) infinite

41. If eccentricity of ellipse becomes zero, then it takes the form of

a) A parabola b) A straight line c) A circle d) None of these

x2 y2
42. If F1 and F2 are the foci of the ellipse a2 + b2 = 1 and P(x, y) a point on it, the value of PF1 +
PF2 is
a) 2b b) 2a c) a – b d) a + b

MUHAMMAD ALI 226

 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014

43. For the ellipse 3x 2 + 4y 2 − 6x + 8y − 5 = 0,

a) Centre is (1, -1) b) Eccentricity c) Foci are (3, -1) and (-1, -1) d) All of these

44. The latus rectum of the conic 3x 2 + 4y 2 − 6x + 8y − 5 = 0

√3 2
a) 3 b) c) d) None of these
2 √3

45. The eccentricity of the hyperbola 3x 2 − y 2 = 4 is

1 1
a) 2 b) √2 c) 2 d) 2
√

46. The eccentricity of the hyperbola 9x 2 − 16y 2 + 72x − 32y − 26 = 0 is

5 4 9 16
a) 4 b) 5 c) 16 d) 9

47. The eccentricity of the conic 9x 2 − 16y 2 = 144

5 4 4
a) 4 b) 3 c) 5 d) √7

48. The lines y = 4x + c touches the hyperbola x 2 − 𝑦 2 = 1 if and only if

a) c = ±√2 b) c = ±√17 c) c = 0 d) c = ±√15

49. The eccentricity of ellipse 5x 2 + 4y 2 = 1 is

1 1 1 1
a) b) c) d)
2 √2 √5 3

x2 y2
50. The parametric equation of the hyperbola a2 − b2 = 1 are
a) x = a tan θ, y = b sec θ b) x = a sec θ, y = b tan θ c) x = √2, y = b d) None

51. The eccentricity of hyperbola is

a) 0 b)1 cc) more than one d) less than one

x2 y2
52. The equation of the normal to the hyperbola − = 1 at (4, 0) is
16 9
a) y = 0 b) y = x c) 𝑥 = 0 d) x = −y

53. If the eccentricity of hyperbola is

a) 0 b) 1 c) more than one d) less than one

x2 y2
54. Equation of conjugate axis of hyperbola a2 − b2 = 1 is
a) x = 0 b) y = 0 c) x = a d) y = x

x2 y2
55. Length of the latus rectum of the hyperbola a2 − b2 = 1 is
e a a 2b2
a) a
b) e c) 2b2 d) a

56. Hyperbola is: I. An open curve II. A closed curve III. It extends to infinity
a) I and III b) II only c) II and III d) I only

MUHAMMAD ALI 227

 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014

57. ax 2 + by 2 + 2gx + 2fy + c = 0 represents a hyperbola if: I. a ≠ 0 II. b ≠ 0. III a and b have
different signs
a) I and II b) I, II and III c) II and III d) none of these

58. If a = b = 1 the eccentricity of hyperbola becomes

a) √2 b) 2 c) 2√2 d) 1

59. The equation of hyperbola with centre at the origin, focus (8, 0), directrix x = 4 is
a) x 2 − y 2 = 4 b) x 2 − y 2 = 1 c) x 2 − y 2 = 16 d) x 2 − y 2 = 32
3
60. The equation of hyperbola with centre at the origin, directrix x = 3, e = 2 is
a) 20x 2 − 16y 2 = 405 b) x 2 − y 2 = 4 c) 2x 2 − 2y 2 = 6 d) none

61. The equation of hyperbola with centre at the origin, length of the latus recture = 64/3, transverse
axis along y-axis, e = 5/3 is
a) 7x 2 − 8y 2 = 5 b) 3x 2 − 6y 2 = 8 c) 16x 2 − 9y 2 = 576 d) None

62. For the parabola x 2 + 4x + 4y + 16 = 0, the equation of the axis and the directrix are given by
a) x + 2 = 0, y − 2 = 0 b) x − 2 = 0, y + 2 = 0 c) x + 2 = 0, y + 2 = 0 d) None

63. The equation of the focal chord of the parabola y 2 = 3x is

a) y = 3/4 b) none of these c) x = 7/4 d) y = 7/4
a
64. For all non-zero values of m, y = mx + is tangent to
m
a) Parabola b) Hyperbola c) Ellipse d) Circle

65. The point closest to the focus of (y − 5)2 = 16(x − 3) is

a) (4, 0) b) (0, 0) c) (3, 5) d) (-5, -3)

66. The length of tangent drawn from (3, 5) to

x 2 + y 2 − 3x − 5y + 9 = 0 is
a) 1 b) 2 c) 3 d) 4

x2 y2 x2 y2
67. The sum of the square of the eccentricities of the conics 4
+ 3
= 1 and 4
− 3
= 1 is
7
a) 2 b) 2 √3 c) √7 d) None of these

68. With respect to the parabola y 2 = 2x, the points P(4, 2) and Q(1, 4) are such that
a) P and Q both lie inside the parabola
b) P lies inside whereas Q lies outside the parabola
c) P lies outside whereas Q lies inside the parabola
d) P and Q both lie outside the parabola

69. Focus of the parabola (y − 2)2 = 20(x + 3) is

a) (2, -3) b) (2, 3) c( -3, 2) d) (3, -2)

MUHAMMAD ALI 228

 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014

70. The distance between the foci is 16, eccentricity = 1/2, then the length of the major axis of the
ellipse is
a) 32 b) 16 c) 64 d) 8

71. The equation of the directrix of parabola 5y 2 = 4x is

a) 4x − 1 = 0 b) 4x + 1 = 0 c) 5x + 1 = 0 d) 5x − 1 = 0

x2 y2
72. The eccentricity of the ellipse 2 + 2 = 1 if its latus rectum is equal to one half of its minor axis
a b
is
1 √3 1
a) b) c) d) None of these
√2 2 2

73. The eccentricity of the ellipse, if the minor axis is equal to the distance between the foci is
√3 2 1
a) 2
b) c) d) √2
√3 √2

74. The eccentricity of the curve represented by the equation x 2 + 2y 2 − 2x + 3y + 2 = 0 is

1 1
a) 0 b) c) d) √2
2 √2

75. The length of transverse axis of the hyperbola 3x 2 − 4y 2 = 32 is

64 3 16√2 8√2
a) 3
b) 32 c) d)
√3 √3

76. A parabola has its focus at (−4, 0) and its directrix is 𝑥 = 4, its equation is
a) y 2 = −16x b) x 2 = −8y c) y 2 = 8x d) x 2 = 9y

77. The eccentricity of the hyperbola 36x 2 − 25y 2 = 900 is

√61 √31
a) 5 b) 5
c) 5
d) 6

x2 y2
78. In an ellipse a2 + b2 = 1, if the distance between the directrices is 3 times the distance between
the foci, then the eccentricity is
1 1 1 1
a) 2 b) 3 c) 2 d) 3
√ √

79. In an ellipse the distance between its foci is 6 and length of its minor axis is 8. Then its
eccentricity is
3 1 1 4
a) b) c( d)
5 √52 2 5

80. The general second degree equation ax 2 + 2hxy + by 2 + 2gx + 2fy + c = 0 represents a
hyperbola when
a) h2 − ab < 0 b) h2 − ab > 0 c) h2 = ab d) both (b) and (c)

81. The eccentricity of the hyperbola whose latus rectum is half of its transverse axis, is
1 2 3
a) b) √3 c) √2 d) None of these
√2

MUHAMMAD ALI 229

 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014

x2 y2
82. The number of tangents to the hyperbola 4
− 3
= 1 through (4, 1) is
a) 1 b) 2 c) 0 d) 3

83. The equation of asymptotes to 25x 2 − 16y 2 = 400

5 4
a) y = ± 4 𝑥 b) y = ± 5 𝑥 c) 𝑥 = 0 d) 𝑦 = 𝑎

x2 y2
84. The radius of the circle passing through the foci of the ellipse + = 1 and having its centre at
16 9
(0, 3) is
7
a) 4 b) 3 c) √12 d) 2

1
85. The equation to the ellipse whose foci are (±2, 0) and eccentricity is
2
𝑥2 𝑦2 𝑥2 𝑦2 𝑥2 𝑦2
a) 12
+ 16 = 1 b) 16 + 12 = 1 c) 16 + 8
=1 d) None of these

86. The latus rectum of the ellipse 5𝑥 2 + 9𝑦 2 = 45 is

5√5 10√5 10 5
a) 3
b) 3
c) 3
d) 3

𝑥2 𝑦2
87. The length of conjugate axis of 25 − 16 = 1 is
a) 5 b) 4 c) 10 d) 8

ANSWERS
1. C 17. C 33. C 49. C 65. C
2. C 18. D 34. C 50. B 66. C
3. A 19. B 35. A 51. C 67. A
4. C 20. D 36. C 52. A 68. B
5. A 21. B 37. D 53. C 69. B
6. B 22. A 38. A 54. A 70. A
7. A 23. B 39. D 55. D 71. C
8. B 24. D 40. C 56. A 72. B
9. B 25. C 41. C 57. B 73. C
10. A 26. A 42. C 58. A 74. C
11. B 27. C 43. B 59. D 75. D
12. B 28. C 44. D 60. A 76. A
13. A, C 29. A 45. C 61. D 77. B
14. B 30. C 46. A 62. C 78. B
15. D 31. C 47. A 63. B 79. A
16. C 32. C 48. D 64. A 80. B
81. C
82. B
83. A
84. A
85. B
86. C
87. D

MUHAMMAD ALI 230

 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014

SOLUTIONS / HINTS
1. Hint: Method-I: Find radius and use the equation of circle (x − h)2 + (y − k)2 = r 2 where
centre C (h, k) = C (1, 2)
Method-II: The point (4, 6) satisfies the eq.
x 2 + y 2 − 2x − 4y − 20 = 0 (c)

2. Solution: To find a: put 4a – 3 = a

=> a = 1
Therefore, give eq, becomes
x 2 + y 2 + 6x − 2y + 2 = 0
Comparing it with general eq. of circle
x 2 + y 2 + 2gx + 2fy + c = 0
=> 2g = 6 and 2f = −2
=> g = 3 and f = −1
Centre = (−g, −f) = (3, 1) c)

3. Solution: In eq of circle there should be no term containing products term “xy”

So put k = 0, we have
∴ 3x 2 + 3y 2 + +9x − 6y + 3 = 0
=> x 2 + y 2 + 3x − 3y + 1 = 0
3
=> Centre = (− 2,1); c = 1
Radius = √g 2 + f 2 − c
3 2 3
= √(2) + (−1)1 − 1 = 2 (a)

4. Solution: Take x 2 ± 8x + y 2 + 6y + 25 = 0
=> x 2 − 8x + 16 + y 2 + 6y + 9 = 0
=> (x − 4)2 + (y − 3)2 = 0
Here radius is zero c)
5. Hint: The point (3, -2) lies outside the circle, so two tangents can be drawn from this point (a)

6. Solution: Here centre of circle is (−3,3). If the line 2𝑥 − 𝑦 + 𝑘 = 0 is a diameter, then

obviously it passes through the centre of circle
∴ put (-3, 3) into equation of line
2(−3) − 3 + k = 0
=> −6 − 3 + k = 0
=> k = 9 (b)

9. Solution Take x 2 + y 2 − 8x + 4y + 4 = 0
Comparing it with general form; we have
2g = −8; 2f = 4; c = 4
=> g = −4; f = 2; c = 4
Therefore; Centre = (−g, −f) = (4,2)
Radius = √g 2 + f 2 − c
= √16 + 4 − 4 = 4

MUHAMMAD ALI 231

 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014
As radius is equal to x-component of the circle
∴ Circle touches y-axis (b)

10. Hint: Method-1: Find the centre of given circle and with the help of centres find radius and
centre of required circle
Use (x − h)2 + (y − k)2 = r 2
Method-2: Find any one centre of given circles and check the options
Option (a) satisfies the point

11. Hint: Find the centre of each circle and check

For right angled Triangler 2
|Hyp|2 = |Perp|2 + |Base|2
OR (Slope f AB) (slope of BC) = - 1
For collinear points
Slope of AB = Slope of BC
OR
x1 y1 1
1
|x y2 1| = 0
2 2
x3 y3 1
For isosceles triangle
Two sides must be equal (b)

12. Hint: Centre of circle = (3, 1)

Centre satisfies the eq. x + 3y = 0 (b)

13. Hint: Put x = 1 in x 2 + y 2 = 10

=> y = ±3
Points are (1, 3) and (1, -3)
Which satisfies eq. x + 3y = 10 and x − 3y = 10 (a, c)

14. Hint: Here |C1 C2 | = |r1 − r2 | (b)

15. Hint: Solve simultaneously (d)

17. Solution: Given x 2 + y 2 = a2

dy x
=> dx = y
dy
=> dx |(h,+h) = −1 c)

18. Hint: There is no point given which satisfies both the given eq’s of circle (d)

21. Hint: Slope of tangent = m = tan α

1
=> m = tan 30o = (b)
√3

23. Solution: Eq. of line is y = −x − 1 (1)

Eq. of parabola is y 2 = kx (2)
Comparing (1) it with y = mx + c

MUHAMMAD ALI 232

 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014
=> m = −1; c = −1
k
Comparing (2) with y 2 = 4ax => 4a = k => a = 4
k
a 4
As condition is c = m => −1 = −1
=> k = 4 (b)

24. Hint: Point (3, 0) satisfies all the given eqs. (d)

25. Solution: Eq. of parabola is x 2 + 4x + 4y + 16 = 0

=> (x 2 + 4x + 4) + 4y + 12 = 0
=> (x + 2)2 = −4(y + 3)
This is of the form x 2 = −4ay where eq. of axis is x = 0 i.e. x + 2 = 0. Also eq. of directrix is
y = a i.e. y + 3 = 1 => y + 2 = 0 c)

26. Hint: Distance between directrix and vertex is equal to the distance between vertex and focus.
Distance of focus from the directrix = 2 × 4 = 8
∴ Coordinates of the focus, which lies on x-axis = (8, 0) (a)

28. Solution: The give equation of parabola can be written in the form (x − 3)2 = 3(y + 1)
∴ Eq. of the axis of parabola is x − 3 = 0
That is x = 3 c)

29. Solution: The eq. of parabola is y 2 = 4x

a
Here 4a = 4 > a = 1. The line y = mx + 1 will be a tangent to the given parabola, if c = m
1
=> 1 = m
=> m = 1 (a)

dy 2a
30. Hint: Slope of Tangent = =
dx y
dy 2a 1
=> dx |(at2 ,2at) = 2at = t
Slope of normal = -t c)
31. Hint: Use length of latus rectum = 4a
The given eq. of parabola can be written as
5 2 1
(y − 2) = 2 (x − 4)
1
Length of latus rectum = 4a = 2 c)

32. Solution:
Given parabola is x 2 = 4xy (1)
And line is y = mx + c (2)
Eliminate between (1) and (2) we get
x 2 − 4amx − 4ac = 0 (3)
If line (2) touches the parabola (1), then the roots of (3) must be real and equal. So put
b2 = 4ac = 0
=> (−4am)2 − 4(1)(−4ac) =0
=> c = −am2 c)

MUHAMMAD ALI 233

 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014

33. Solution Given y 2 = 4ax Put x = 2 and y = - 6

=> 36 = 8a
36 9
=> a = 8
,a =2
Length of Latus rectum = 4a
9
= 4 (2)
= 18 c)

34. Solution: The given equation of the parabola can be written as

61
(3y − 2)2 = 16 (x + )
16
Axis of parabola is 3y − 2 = 0
=> 3y = 2 (a)

36. Solution: x 2 = 6𝑎𝑦; Comparing it with x 2 = 4𝑎𝑦

=> 4a = 6a => 4 = 6 (not possible) d)

2b2
37. Latus Rectum = = 8 => b2 = 4a (1)
2
1
Also e = b2 = a2 (1 − e2 ) => a = 8, b2 = 32
√2
x2 y2
Eq. of ellipse is 64 + 32 = 1
=> x 2 + 2y 2 = 64 a)

38. Hint: 9x 2 + 16y 2 = 64

x2 y2
=> 16 + 9
= 1 => a2 = 16; b2 = 9
=> a = 4; b = 3
As |PF1 | + |PF2 | = 2a
= 2(4)
=8 d)

39. Hint: 16x 2 + 25y 2 = 400

x2 y2
=> 25 + 16 = 1
Here a2 = 25; b2 = 16
=> a = 5; b = 4
Use |PF1 | + |PF2 | = 2a
= 2(5)
= 10 c)

40. Solution: The line by y = 4x + c touches the ellipse

x2
4
+ y2 = 1
Here, m = 4, a2 = 4, b2 = 1
If c = ±√a2 m2 + b 2
c = ±√(4)(4)2 + (1)2

MUHAMMAD ALI 234

 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014

c = ±√65 c)

45. Hint: 3x 2 − y 2 = 4
x2 y2
=> 4 − 4
=1
3
4 16
=> a2 = 3 ; b2 = 4; c 2 = a2 + b2 = 3
c
Now e = a
4
√3
2
e= =2 c)
√3

46. Hint: The given parabola can be written in the form

(x+4)2 (y+1)2
− =1
16 9
Here, a = 16 and b2 = 9
2
b2 9
e2 = 1 + a2 = 1 + 16
5
=> e = 4 a)

47. Hint: 9x 2 − 16y 2 = 144

x2 y2
=> 16 − 9
=1
=> a2 = 16; b2 = 9
=> a = 4; b = 3; c = 5
c 5
Use e = a = 4 a)

Note: Eliminate the options which represents eccentricity less than one

48. Solution:
x2 y2
The line of y = mx + c touches the hyperbola a2 − b2 = 1
If c 2 = a2 m2 − b2
=> m = 4; a2 = 1; b2 = 1
c 2 = 16 − 1 => c = ±√15 d)

52. Solution:
dy 9x
Here =
dx 16y
dy 9(−4)
=> | = →∞
dx (−4,0) 16(0)
1
Eq of normal is y − 0 = − ∞ (x + 4)
=> y = 0 a)

x2 y2
53. Solution Take 169 + 25 = 1
Here a2 = 169; b2 = 25
a = 13; b = 5

MUHAMMAD ALI 235

 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014
a 13
Req ratio = = c)
b 5

61. Hint: There is no equation given which satisfies all the given conditions d)

65. Hint: Find vertex (3, 5) a)

68. Hint: Simply put the point into equation of parabola and check the answer whether positive or
negative b)

70. Solution: 2c = 16 => c = 8

1
e=2
c 1 8
As e = a => 2 = a => a = 16
Length of major axis = 2a = 32 (a)

71. Solution 5y 2 = 4x
4
y2 = 5 x
Comparing with y 2 = 4ax
4
=> 4a = 5
1
=> a = 5
Equation of directrix is
x = −a
1
x=−
5
=> 5x + 1 = 0 c)

x2 y2
72. Solution Given eq of ellipse is a2 + b2 = 1
2b2
Its latus rectum = a
and minor axis = 26
1
Given latus rectum = 2 (Minor axis)
2b2 1
=> = (2b) => a = 2b
a 2
2 a2 −b2 4b2 −b2 3b2 3
Now e = a2 = 4b2 = 4b2 =4
√3
=> e = 2 b)

73. Solution Given Minor axis = Distance between the foci

=> 2b = 2c
b2 = c 2
=> b2 = a2 e2 because c = ae
=> a2 − c 2 = a2 e2
a2 (1 − e2 ) = a2 e2 = 1 − e2 = e2
1
=> 2e2 = 1 => e = 2 c)
√

MUHAMMAD ALI 236

 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014

78. Solution: Given |AA′ | = 3|FF ′ |

i.e. 2a = 3(2c)
=> a = 3c
c c 1
So e = a = 3c = 3 b)

79. Hint: Given 2c = 6 => c = 3

And 2b = 8 => b = 4
Now c 2 = a2 − b2
9 = a2 = 25
=> a2 = 25
a=5
c 3
Use e = a = 5 a)

x2 y2
81. Solution: Let the eq of hyperbola be − =1
a2 b2
1
Given latus rectum = (transverse axis)
2
2b2 1
a
= 2 (2a) => 2b2 = a2
=> 2a2 (e2 − 1) = a2
3
=> e2 = 2
3
=> e = √2 c)

82. Hint: Put (4, 1) into equation and check the answer, its positive
So point (4, 1) lies outside the curve
Two tangents can be drawn b)

b
83. Hint: Use y = ± x Here b = 5; a = 4
a
5
=> y = ± 4x

84. Solution: We have a2 = 16 and b2 = 9

√7
=> e = 4
Thus, foci are (±√7, 0)
The radius of required circle is
2
√(√7 − 0) + (3)2 = √7 + 9
=4 a)

x2 y2
85. Solution: Let the ellipse be a2 + b2 = 1
1
It is given that e = 2 and ae = 2
=> a = 4
Now b2 = a2 (1 − e2 )

MUHAMMAD ALI 237

 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014
b2 = 12
x2 y2
Thus the required ellipse is 16 + 12 = 1 b)

MUHAMMAD ALI 238

 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014

Chapter # 21
VECTORS

SYNOPSIS

Vector
“A directed line segment is called a vector”

Scalar Quantity
“A physical quantity that can be described only with magnitude and units is called scalar quantity”

Examples:
Mass, time, density, temperature, length, volume, speed, work, etc

Vector Quantity
“A physical quantity that can be described with magnitude units and directions as well is called vector
quantity”

Examples:
Displacement, velocity, acceleration, weight, force, momentum, electric field etc

Geometric Interpretation of Vector

⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗
AB is called a vector B

A
Note: A is called initial point and B is called Terminal point

Magnitude or Length or Norm of a Vector

⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗ |
The absolute value of a vector is called magnitude of a vector. It is represented by |AB

Unit Vector
A vector whose magnitude is one is called a unit vector
A unit vector of a vector v is denoted by v̂ and is given as
v
v̂ = |v |
Vector
So, unit vector vo vector = Magnitude of vector

Null Vector
A vector whose magnitude is zero is called null or zero vector
If terminal point B of a vector ⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗
AB coincides with the initial point A, then magnitude AB = 0 and
⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗ = 0, which is called zero vector or null vector
AB

Negative Vector
Two vectors are said to be negative of each other if they have same magnitude but opposite direction
If ⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗
AB = v
Then -AB ⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗ = -v

MUHAMMAD ALI 239

 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014
Equal Vector
Two vectors are said to be equal vector if they have the same magnitude and same direction

Parallel Vectors
“Two vectors are said to be parallel vectors if they are non-zero scalar multiple of each other”
If we have two vectors u and v and we are able to write
u =Kv, where K is any scalar quantity, then u and v are parallel to each other, otherwise not

Addition of Two Vectors

If we have two vectors u and v represented by ⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗
AB and ⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗
BC, then ⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗
AC = u + v is called resultant of two
vectors u and v

Position Vector
“The distance of any point from the origin is called position vector of a point”
OR
“The vector whose initial point is the origin O and whose terminal point is any other point P is
plane/space called position vector of the point P”
⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗ is P.V. of P.
In figure; OP

Like and Unlike Vectors

Collinear vectors (which are parallel to the same straight line) having the same direction are called like
vectors and there having the opposite directions are called unlike vectors

Reciprocal Vector
1
Let |a| the modulus of the given vector a. Then a vector whose direction is that of a but modulus is |a|
(reciprocal of modulus of a) is called the reciprocal of a and is written as a−1
1 a
Thus a−1 = |a| â = |a|2

Co-initial Vectors
The vectors which have the same initial point are called co-initial vectors

Free Vectors
A vector, in which the initial point is not specified, i.e., there is no restriction to choose its origin, is called
a free vector

MUHAMMAD ALI 240

 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014
Localized Vector
A vector with a fixed initial point is called a localized vector

Vector in Plane
The set,
R2 = {(x, y): x, y ∈ R} is called two dimensional or plane
The xy plane consists of too many points. Each point has the form of P(x, y)
In plane
u = [x, y] where x and y are called the component of u

Addition in Plane
let u = [x1 , y1 ]
and v = [x2 , y2 ]
then u + v = [x1 + x2 , y1 + y2 ]
Scalar Multiplication
If u = [x, y]
Then ku = [kx, ky]

Negative of a Vector
If u = [x, y]
Then −u = [−x, −y]

Difference of Two Vectors

If u = [x1 , y1 ]
And v = [x2 , y2 ]
Then u − v = [x1 − x2 , y1 − y2 ]

Zero Vector
O = [0, 0]

Equal Vector
u=v
iff x1 = x2 and v1 = v2

Position Vector
The distance of any point P(x, y) in plane from the origin O(0, 0) is called position vector. It is
represented by ⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗
OP

Magnitude of a Vector
For any vector u = [x, y] in plane magnitude is
⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗ |
|u| = |OP
|u| = √x 2 + y 2

MUHAMMAD ALI 241

 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014

Note: If c is any scalar

Then |cv| = |c||v|

Notation for Representing Vectors in Plane

Consider
i = [1, 0]
and j = [0, 1]
such that
Magnitude of i = √(1)2 + (0)2
=> |i| = 1
Similarly magnitude of j = √(0)2 + (1)2
=> |j| = 1

So i and j are called unit vector along x-axis and y-axis respectively
In plane:
u = [x, y]
Further
u = xi + yj

Unit Vectors in the Direction of Another

Given Vector:
Consider a non-zero vector v, then let u is the unit vector in the direction of or along or parallel to v. then
u is given as
v
u = |v|

Note: The given four points A, B, C and D will form a parallelogram if

⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗ = DC
AB ⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗
And BC = ⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗
⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗ AD
Then we say ABCD is a parallelogram

MUHAMMAD ALI 242

 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014

Ratio Formula
Consider two points A and B such that
a = p.v. of A and
b = p.v. of B
Let P is the point that divides the line segment AB in ratio p:q; then position vector of P is r and is given
as
qa+qb
r = p+q

Note:
1. In ratio formula if P is the mid point of AB; then
p : q = 1:1 and we have
a+b
r=
2
2. The diagonals of a Parallelogram bisect each other

Concept of Vector in Space

The set R3 = {(x, y, z)}: x, y, z ∈ R} is called the 3-dimensional space. Each point in space has the form of
(x, y, z)
In space, we represent a vector u as
u = [x, y, z]
Where x, y and z are called component of u

Addition in Space
If u = [x, y, z] and v = [x1 , y1 , z1 ]; then
u + v = [x + x1 , y + y1 , z + z1 ]

Scalar Multiplication
If u = [x, y, z]
Then ku = [kx, ky, kz]

Negative of Vector
If u = [x, y, z]
Then −u = [−x, −y, −z]

Difference of Two Vectors

If u = [x, y, z] and v = [x1 , y1 , z1 ]
Then u − v = [x − x1 , y − y1 , z − z1 ]

MUHAMMAD ALI 243

 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014

Null Vector
O = [0,0,0]

Equality of Two Vector

If u = [x, y, z] and v = [x1 , y1 , z1 ]
Then u = v => x = x1 ; y = y1 and z = z1

Position Vector
The distance of any point P(x, y, z) in space from the origin O(0, 0, 0) is called position vector

Magnitude of Vector
If u = [x, y, z] then
Magnitude of u = |u| = √x 2 + y 2 + z 2

Another notation for Representing Vectors in Space

In space; let

i = [1, 0, 0] s. t. |i| = 1
j = [0, 1, 0] s. t. |j| = 1
and k = [0, 0, 1] s.t |k| = 1
So, i, j and k are the unit vector along x-axis, y-axis and z-axis respectively
In space if u = [x, y, z]
Then u = xi + yj + zk

Distance between Two Points in Space

Let P1 (x1 , y1 , z1 ) and P2 (x2 , y2 , z2 ) are two points in space; then distance between them is given as

⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗
d = |P 2 2
1 P2 | = √(x2 − x1 ) + (y2 − y1 ) + (z2 + z1 )
2

Direction Angles and Direction Cosines of a Vector

Consider a non-zero vector r in a space s.t,
r = xi + yj + zk

MUHAMMAD ALI 244

 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014
Let α = Angles made by i with r
β = Angles made by j with r
and γ = Angles made by k with r
Such that
0 ≤ α ≤ π; 0 ≤ β ≤ π
And 0 ≤ γ ≤ π
Now, these angles α, β and γ are called direction angles, and the numbers cos α , cos β and cos γ are
called direction cosines of the vector r

Important Result
The given triples (of angles) will be the direction angles of a single vector if:
cos2 α + cos2 β + cos2 γ = 1 or 𝑙 2 + m2 + n2 = 1

Note:
x
cos α = |r|
y z
cos β = |r| and cos γ = |r|

Scalar Product of Two Vectors

Let u and v are two non-zero vectors; then scalar or dot product of u and v is given as
u. v = |u||v| cos θ
where θ is the angle between u and v 0 ≤ θ ≤ π

Properties of Scalar Product

i. i = |i||i| cos 0o because θ = 0o
i. i = (1)(1)(1) => i. i = 1
Similarly;
j. j = 1 and k. k = 1
On the other hand,
i. j = 0; j. k = 0
and k. i = 0 (Because, θ = 90o )

Note:
Dot Product of two vector is commutative i.e.,
u. v = v. u

Perpendicular (Orthogonal) Vectors

Two non-zero vectors u and v are perpendicular
Iff u. v = 0

Key Points to Remember

1. Zero vector is regarded to be perpendicular to every vector
2. u. u = |u|2

MUHAMMAD ALI 245

 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014
u.v
3. cos θ = |u|.|v| , 0 ≤ θ ≤ π
4. If θ = 0, or π, the vectors u and v are collinear
a.b
5. Projection of vector a along b = |b|
a.b
6. Projection of vector b along a = |b|
7. Cosine Law
In a triangle ABC with usual notation
a2 = b2 + c 2 − 2bc cos A
b2 = a2 + c 2 − 2ac cos B
c 2 = a2 + b2 − 2ab cos C

8. Projection Law
In any triangle ABC with usual notation
a = b cos C + c cos B
Similarly,
b = c cos A + a cos C
c = a cos B + b cos A

9. Mid-point of hypotenuse of a right triangle is equidistant from its vertices

10. Perpendicular bisectors of the sides of a triangle are concurrent
11. Altitudes are concurrent
12. Angle in a semi-circle is a right angle
13. cos(α + β) = cos α cos β − sin α sin β
14. cos(α − β) = cos α cos β + sin α sin β

Cross Product or Vector Product of Two Vectors

Let u and v are two non-zero vectors. The cross or vector product of u and v is given as
u × v = |u||v| sin θ n̂
Where
θ = Angle between u and v
and n̂ = Unit vector perpendicular to the plane containing u and v

We can find the direction of n̂ by using right hand rule

Important Results
If i, j and k are the unit vectors along x, y and z-axis, then
i × j = |i||j| sin 90o k = k
Similarly,
j × k = I and k × i = j
Also i × i = 0; j × j = 0; k × k = 0

MUHAMMAD ALI 246

 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014
And j × i = −k; k × j = −i; i × k = −j

Properties of Cross-Product
1. If u × v = 0 then u and v are parallel to each other. (Because in this case either θ = 0o or 180o )
2. u × v = −v × u
3. u × v = 0
4. Zero vector is parallel to every other non zero vector
5. If u = a1 i + b1 j + c1 k
and v = a2 i + b2 j + c2 k; then
i j k
u × v = |a1 b1 c1 |
a2 b2 c2
|a×b|
6. sin θ = |a||b|
a×b
7. A unit vector perpendicular to a and b = |a×b|
8. In any triangle ABC with usual notation
a b c
sin A
= sin B = sin C

Area of Parallelogram
A = |u × v|; where u and v are two vectors along adjacent sides
1
Area of triangle = 2 |u × v|

Note
1
1. If three points A, B and C are given then area of ∆ABC = |AB ⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗ | = 1 |Ba
⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗ × AC ⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗ |
⃗⃗⃗⃗ × BC
2 2
1
⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗ × ⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗
= |CA CB| 2

2. If four points A, B, C and D are given then first we show that they represent parallelogram
ABCD.

To find area:
⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗ × AD
Area = |AB ⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗ |, where AB
⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗ and AD
⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗ should be two adjacent sides
(The formula may be different for different sides)

Scalars Triple Product of Vector

If u, v and w are three non-zero vectors; then scalar triple product is given as u. (v × w) or [u v w]
Similarly; v. (w × u) and w. (u × v)

Note
1. [u v w] = [v w u] = [w u v]
2. If u = a1 i + b1 j + c1 k; v = a2 + b2 j + c2 k

MUHAMMAD ALI 247

 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014
w = a3 i + b3 j + c3 k then
a1 b1 c1
u. (v × w) = |a2 b2 c2 |
a3 b3 c3
3. [i j k] = 1 = i, j, k being usual unit vector
Volume of Parallelepiped = u. (v × w) = [u v w]
1 1
Volume of Tetrahedron = 6 u. (v × w) = 6 [u v w]

Coplanar Vectors
The vectors u, v and w are said to be coplanar iff [u v w] = 0. Because in this case volume formed
by parallelepiped is zero

Note
1. [u v w] = 0 Similarly [v w w] = 0
2. Scalar triple product is a scalar quantity

Work Done by a Force

Work done by a force F in displacing a particle from A to B is defined by
W=F ⃗ . ⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗
AB

Note: If a number of forces are acting on a particle then the sum of the works done by the forces
is equal to the work done by the resultant force

Moment of a Force about a Point

The vector moment or torque of a force ⃗F acting at a point A about the point B is given by
M = r. F ⃗
⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗
Mb = BA × ⃗F

Note
The algebraic sum of the moments of a system of forces about any point is equal to the moment
of their resultant about the same point.

MUHAMMAD ALI 248

 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014

MCQs
1. The unit vector parallel to the resultant of the vectors 2i + 3j − k and 4i − 3j + 2k is
1 1 1
a) 37 (6i + k) b) 37 (6i + j) c) 37 (6j + k) d) none of these
√ √ √

2. If a = (2, 1, −1), b = (1, −1, 0) and c = (5, −1, 1), then the unit vector parallel to a + b − c, but
in the opposite direction is
1 1 1
a) − 3 (2i − j + 2k) b) 3 (2i − j + 2k) c) 3 (2i + j − 2k) d) none of these

3. The value of ‘a’ such that the vectors 2i − j + k, i + 2j − 3k and 3i + aj + 5k are coplanar, is
a) 4 b) – 4 c) 2 d) – 2

4. If a = 3i − j + 2k and b = −1 − 2j + 4k, then a unit vector along the vector a × b is

−2j+k −j−2k −2j−k
a) b) c) d) None of these
√5 √5 √5

5. If i, j, k are the unit vectors and mutually perpendicular, then [i j k] is equal to

a) 1 b) – 1 c) 0 d) none of these

6. The volume of the tetrahedron whose vertices are the points 0(0, 0, 0), A(1, -1, 1), B(k, 0, 1) and
5
C(0, 1, k) is 6 cubic units, if the value of k is
a) -3 b) 3 c) -2 d) 2

7. The direction cosines of y-axis are

a) 1, 0, 0 b) 0, 1, 0 c) 0, 0, 1 d) 1, 1, 1

8. If the angle between two vectors with magnitude 8 and 2 is 60o then their scalar product is
a) 12 b) 8 c) 16 d) 1

9. If a, b, c are unit vectors such that a + b + c = 0 then the value of a. b + b. c + c. a =

3
a) 1 b) 2 c) − 2 d) none of these

10. Let a = 2i − 3j − 6k and b = −2i − 2j − k then the value of (the projection of a on b)/ (the
projection of b on a) is equal to
7
a) b) 2 c) 4 d) none of these
3

11. The area of parallelogram of which i and i + j are adjacent sides is

1
a) 2 b) c) 1 d) √2
2

12. If a⃗ = 2i + 3j − k, ⃗b = −i2j − 4k and c = i + j + k, then |(a × b). (b × c)| =

a) 104 b) 108 c) 106 d) None of these

13. i. (j × k) + j. (k × i) + k(i × j) =
a) 1 b) 3 c) -3 d) 0

MUHAMMAD ALI 249

 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014

14. Θ is the angle between two vectors a and b then a. v ≥ 0 only if

π π π
a) 0 ≤ θ ≤ π b) 2 ≤ θ ≤ π c) 0 ≤ θ ≤ 2 d) 0 < θ < 2

15. The vectors a + 3b is perpendicular to 7a − 5b and a − 5b is perpendicular to 7a + 3b. The

angle between a and b is
π π π
a) 6 b) 2 c) 4 d) none of these

16. If r. a = 0, r. b = 0 and r. c = 0 for some non-zero vector r, then the value of [a b c] is

1
a) 0 b) 2 c) 1 d) 2

17. The number of vectors of unit length perpendicular to vectors a = (1, 1, 0) and b = (0, 1, 1) is
a) One b) two c) three d) infinite

18. i × (j × k) =
a) 1 b) 0 c) -1 d) none of these

19. The work done in moving an object along the vector 3i + 2j − 5k, if the applied force is F = 2i −
j − k is
a) 11 b) 8 c) 9 d) none of these

20. Two vectors a and b are equal if

a) Their direction is same b) their magnitude as well as direction is same
c) They originate from the same point d) their magnitude are equal

21. If cross product of two non-zero vectors is zero, then the vectors are
a) Co-terminus b) co-initial c) co-directional d) collinear

22. If a and b are two vectors such that a × b = a. b = 0 then

a) a is equal to zero b) b is equal to zero c) either a or b is zero
d) both a and b are necessarily zero

23. [i j k] + [k j i] + [j k i] =
a) 1 b) 3 c) – 3 d) – 1

24. The projection of vectors i − 2j + k on the vectors 4i − 4j + 7k is

5√6 19 9 √6
a) 10
b) 9
c) 19 d) 19

25. If a = 2i + 4j − 5k and b = i + 2j + 3k then |a × b| is

11 11 11 11
a) 5 b) 3 c) 7 d) 2
√ √ √ √

26. For what value of λ are the vectors 2i − j + k, i + 2j − 3k and 3i + λj + 5k coplanar?

a) – 3 b) -4 c) 2 d) 4

27. If a⃗ = i + j and ⃗b = j − k, then the angle between a⃗ + ⃗b and a⃗ − ⃗b is

a) 0o b) 45o c) 60o d) 90o

MUHAMMAD ALI 250

 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014
⃗ | = 3 and the angle between the vectors is cos−1 (5) then a⃗. ⃗b =
28. If |a⃗| = 7, |b 7
a) 15 b) 10 c) 16 d) none of these

⃗ | = 3 and the angle between the vectors is 2π then a⃗. ⃗b is equal to

29. If |a⃗| = 4, |b 3
a) 6 b) 0 c) 1 d) – 6

30. The volume of the parallelepiped whose co-terminus edges are 2i − 3j + 5k, i + 2j − 2k and 6i +
j − k in the cubic units is
a) 44 b) – 22 c) 11 d) 22

⃗ = 2i − 3j + 2k in moving a particle from (3, 4, 5) to (1, 2, 3) is

31. The work done by the force F
3
a) 0 b) 2 c) −4 d) – 2

32. The value of λ for which he vector λ(i + j + k) is a unit vector is

1 1
a) (3) b) 3 c) 1 d) none of these
√

33. The sine of the angle between the vectors 2i + j − k and i + 2j + k is

2 1 √3 1
a) 3√3
b) 2 c) 2
d)
√2

34. The direction cosines of (i + j + k) are

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
a) ( , 0, ) b) ( , , 0) c) ( , , ) d) ( , , )
√2 √3 √3 √2 √3 √3 √3 3 3 3

35. λi − 3j + 5k and λi − 2j − 2k are perpendicular to each other, then the value of λ =

a) ±1 b) ±2 c) ±3 d) None of these

36. The value of p for which the vector i + 3j − 2k, 2i − j + 4k, 3i + 2j + pk from the parallelepiped
of volume 49 cc is
a) – 5 b) 4 c) 8 d) 10

37. If ai + 6j − k and 7i − 3j + 17k are perpendicular vectors, then the value of a =

1
a) – 5 b) 7 c) 7 d) 5

38. (i + j) × (j + k). (k + i) =
a) 0 b) 1 c) 2 d) [i j k]

39. The adjacent sides of a parallelogram are i + 2j + 3k. Its area is

5√3
a) 3√5 b) 5√3 c) −3√5 d) 2

MUHAMMAD ALI 251

 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014

ANSWERS
1. A 11. C 21. D 31. D
2. B 12. B 22. C 32. B
3. B 13. B 23. C 33. C
4. C 14. C 24. D 34. C
5. A 15. B 25. A 35. B
6. (A, D) 16. A 26. B 36. A
7. B 17. B 27. D 37. D
8. B 18. B 28. A 38. C
9. C 19. C 29. D 39. B
10. A 20. B 30. D

SOLUTIONS / HINTS
1. Solution:
Resultant vector = 6i + 0j + k
6i+k
Req. unit vector = 36+1
√
6i+k
= a)
√37

2. Solution:
a + b − c = 2i + 1j − k + 1i − 1k
= −2i + j − 2k
(−2i+j−2k)
Req. vector = − 4+1+4
√
2i−j+2k
= 3
b)

3. Solution:
If given vectors are coplanar; then we have
2 −1 1
|1 2 −3| = 0
3 a 5
=> a = −4 b)

(a×b)
4. Hint: Unit vector = |a×b|
c)

1 0 0
5. Hint: [i j k] = |1 2 −3| = 0 a)
3 a 5

6. Solution:
1 −1 1
1 5
Put 6 |k 0 1| = 6
0 1 k
=> k = −3, k = 2 (a, d)

MUHAMMAD ALI 252

 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014

9. Solution:
Given a + b + c = 0
=> (a + b + c)2 = 0
=> a2 + b2 + c 2 + 2a. b + 2b. c + 2a. c = 0
=> 1 + 1 + 1 + 2(a. b + b. c + a. c) = 0
=> 3 + 2(a. b + b. c + a. c) = 0
3
=> a. b + b. c + a. c = − 2 c)

11. Hint: Area of parallelogram = |u × v| c)

14. Solution:
a. b = |a||b| cos θ ≥ 0
if cos θ ≥ 0
π
i.e. 0 ≤ θ ≤ 2 c)
15. Solution:
We have a + 3b is perpendicular to 7a − 5b
=> (a + 3b). (7a − 5b) = 0
=> 7a2 + 16a. b − 15b2 = 0 (1)
Also given (a − 5b). (7a + 3b) = 0
=> 7a2 − 32a. b − 15b2 = 0 (2)
Subtracting (2) from (1)
π
=> 48a. b = 0 => θ = 2 b)

16. Solution:
The given conditions means that r is perpendicular to all the vectors a, b and c. This is possible
only if they are coplanar, which is equivalent to saying that the scalar triple product [a b c] is
equal to zero a)

17. Solution:
A unit vector perpendicular to the vectors a and b is
a×b i−j−k
= |a×b| = ±
√3
There are two vectors of unit length b)

23. Solution:
[i j k] + [k j i] + [j k i] = −1 + (−1) + (−1)
= −3 c)

27. Hint: Check (a + b). (a − b) = 0 d)

28. Solution:
5
Given cos θ =
7
Use a. b = |a||b| cos θ
5
= (7)(3) (7)

MUHAMMAD ALI 253

 Omama Campus: A-102, Sector Z-2, Gulshan e Maymar, Karachi – (021) 36350014
= 15 a)

30. Hint: For unit vector √λ2 + λ2 + λ2 = 1

=> √3𝜆2 = 1
1
=> λ = b)
√3

36. Hint: Put u.(v × w) = 49 and simplify a)

38. Solution:
(i + j) × (j + k). (k + i)
= (i − j + k). (k + i)
=1+1=2 c)

39. Hint: Use Area = |u × v| b)

MUHAMMAD ALI 254